PLC Concept Software 2.6 User Manual Vol 3

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 350

Concept

User Manual

Volume 3
840 USE 503 00 eng Version 2.6 - SR1

© 2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved


33002204.00
II
Table of Contents

About the Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IX

The chapters marked gray are not included in this


volume.
Chapter 1 General description of Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Chapter 2 New Performance Attributes of Concept 2.6 in
Comparison with Concept 2.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Chapter 3 Project structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Chapter 4 Creating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Chapter 5 PLC configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Chapter 6 Main structure of PLC Memory and optimization of
memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Chapter 7 Function Block language FBD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Chapter 8 Ladder Diagram LD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Chapter 9 Sequence language SFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Chapter 10 Instruction list IL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Chapter 11 Structured text ST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Chapter 12 Ladder Logic 984 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Chapter 13 DFBs (Derived Function Blocks). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Chapter 14 Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Chapter 15 Variables editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479

III
Chapter 16 Project Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Chapter 17 Derived data types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Chapter 18 Reference data editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Chapter 19 ASCII Message Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Chapter 20 Online functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Chapter 21 Import/Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
Chapter 22 Documentation and Archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
Chapter 23 Simulating a PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Chapter 24 Concept Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691

Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705
Appendix A Tables of PLC-dependent Performance Attributes. . . . . . . . 707
Appendix B Windows interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729
Appendix C List of symbols and short cut keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751
Appendix D IEC conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779
D.1 What is the IEC 1131-3 standard?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781
General information about IEC conformity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782
IEC Conformity Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783
D.2 IEC standards tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784
Common elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785
IL (AWL) language elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791
ST language elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793
Common graphic elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794
LD (KOP) language elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
Implementation-dependent parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796
Error causes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799
D.3 Expansions of IEC 1131-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801
D.4 Text language syntax. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803

IV
Appendix E Configuration examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805
E.1 Quantum Example - Remote Control with RIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
Editing local drop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808
Editing Remote Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812
E.2 Quantum Example - Remote control with RIO (series 800) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815
Editing Local Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816
Editing Remote Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820
E.3 Quantum Example - Remote Control with DIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826
Editing Local Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827
E.4 Quantum Example – INTERBUS Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835
General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836
Editing Local Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837
E.5 Quantum Example - SY/MAX Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841
Editing Local Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842
Editing Remote Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846
E.6 Quantum Example - Profibus DP Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 849
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 849
General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850
Profibus DP Export Settings in SyCon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850
Editing Local Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
Importing Profibus DP Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856
E.7 Quantum-Example - Peer Cop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863
At a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863
Generals to Peer Cop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 864
Configuration of Peer Cop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 865
Global data transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 867
Specific data transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869
E.8 Compact Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 871
Editing Local Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872
E.9 Atrium Example – INTERBUS Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877
General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 878
INTERBUS Export Settings in CMD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879
Editing Local Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880
Editing Remote Drop (Importing INTERBUS Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884
E.10 Momentum Example - Remote I/O Bus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887
General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888

V
Editing local drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888
Example 10 – Editing Remote Drops (I/O Bus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892
E.11 Momentum Example - Ethernet Bus System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895
Configure Ethernet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 896
Network Configuration in Different Operating Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 897
Editing local drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907
Create online connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 910

Appendix F Convert Projects/DFBs/Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 911


Converting projects/DFBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912

Appendix G Concept ModConnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915


At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915
G.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917
G.2 Integration of Third Party Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 918
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 918
Integrating new Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919
Removing Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 920
G.3 Use of third party module in Concept. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921

Appendix H Convertion of Modsoft Programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923


At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 924
How to Convert a Modsoft Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926
Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927

Appendix I Modsoft and 984 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 929


At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 929
Modsoft Keys with Concept Equivalents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930
Modsoft Function Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 932

Appendix J Presettings when using Modbus Plus for startup . . . . . . . . 933


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933
Installing the SA85/PCI85 with Windows 98/2000/XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 934
Installing the SA85/PC185 in Windows NT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937
Installing the Modbus Plus Driver in Windows 98/2000/NT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939
Virtual MBX Driver for 16 bit application capability with
Windows 98/2000/NT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940
MBX Driver for connection between ModConnect Host interface adapters
and 32 bit applications with Windows 98/2000/NT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941
Remote MBX - Driver for Remote Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942
Ethernet MBX - Driver for Modbus Plus Function via TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 943
Establishing the hardware connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945

VI
Appendix K Presettings when using Modbus for startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . 947
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 947
Interface Settings in Windows 98/2000/XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 948
Interface Settings in Windows NT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950
Setting up the hardware connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950
Transfer problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951

Appendix L Startup when using Modbus with the EXECLoader . . . . . . . 953


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 953
Quantum first startup with EXECLoader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 954
Compact first startup with EXECLoader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958
Momentum first startup for IEC with EXECLoader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 962
Momentum first startup for LL984 with EXECLoader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967

Appendix M Startup when using Modbus with DOS Loader . . . . . . . . . . . 973


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 973
Quantum first startup with DOS Loader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 974
Compact first startup with DOS Loader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977
Momentum first startup for IEC with DOS Loader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980
Momentum first startup for LL984 with DOS Loader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983

Appendix N Startup when using Modbus Plus with the EXECLoader . . . 987
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987
Quantum first startup with EXECLoader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 988
Compact first startup with EXECLoader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992
Atrium first startup with EXECLoader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996
Momentum first startup for IEC with EXECLoader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999
Momentum first startup for LL984 with EXECLoader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003

Appendix O Startup when using Modbus Plus with DOS Loader . . . . . . 1007
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007
Quantum first startup with DOS Loader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1008
Compact first startup with DOS Loader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011
Atrium first startup with DOS Loader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014
Momentum first startup for IEC with DOS Loader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1017
Momentum first startup for LL984 with DOS Loader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1020

Appendix P EXEC files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023


Loading Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1024

Appendix Q INI Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027
Q.1 Settings in the CONCEPT.INI File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1029
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1029
General information on the Concept INI file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1030
INI Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031

VII
INI Settings for Register Address Format, Variable Storage and
Project Name Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032
INI Settings for Path Entries and Global DFBs [Path] [Upload] . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033
Representation of Internal Data in the INI File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1035
INI Settings for the LD Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1035
INI Settings for Online Processing [Colors] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1036
INI Settings for Warning Messages and the Address Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1036
INI Security Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1037
Q.2 Settings in the Projectname.INI File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1038
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1038
General Information for Projectname.INI File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1039
INI Settings for the Event Viewer [Online Events] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1039

Appendix R Interrupt Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041
R.1 General information about interrupt sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1043
General Information about Interrupt Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1044
R.2 Interrupt section: Timer event section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1046
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1046
Timer Event Sections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1047
Defining the Scan Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1048
Defining the Phase. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049
Execution Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1051
Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1052
Examples for Parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1054
R.3 Interrupt section: I/O event section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1059
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1059
I/O Event Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1060
Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1061
Runtime Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1062
R.4 Modules for interrupt sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1064
EFBs for Interrupt Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065

Appendix S Automatic Connection to the PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1067


At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1067
Automatic Connection with Command Line Parameters
(Modbus, Modbus +, TCP/IP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1068
Automatic Connection with the CCLaunch Tool (Modbus Plus) . . . . . . . . . . . 1071

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1077

Index ................................................ i

VIII
About the Book

At a Glance

Document Scope This user manual is intended to help you create a user program with Concept. It
provides authoritative information on the individual program languages and on
hardware configuration.

Validity Note The documentation applies to Concept 2.6 for Microsoft Windows 98, Microsoft
Windows 2000, Microsoft Windows XP and Microsoft Windows NT 4.x.

Note: Additional up-to-date tips can be found in the Concept README file.

Related
Documents
Title of Documentation Reference Number
Concept Installation Instructions 840 USE 502 00
Concept IEC Block Library 840 USE 504 00
Concept EFB User Manual 840 USE 505 00
Concept LL984 Block Library 840 USE 506 00

User Comments We welcome your comments about this document. You can reach us by e-mail at
TECHCOMM@modicon.com

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 IX


About the Book

X 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


IEC conformity

D
At a Glance

Overview This Chapter contains the standards tables required by IEC 1131-1.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following sections:


Chapter?
Section Topic Page
D.1 What is the IEC 1131-3 standard? 781
D.2 IEC standards tables 784
D.3 Expansions of IEC 1131-3 801
D.4 Text language syntax 803

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 779


IEC conformity

780 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


IEC conformity

D.1 What is the IEC 1131-3 standard?

At a Glance

Overview This section contains general information about IEC 1131-3 and the implemented
IEC conformity test.

What’s in this This section contains the following topics:


Section?
Topic Page
General information about IEC conformity 782
IEC Conformity Test 783

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 781


IEC conformity

General information about IEC conformity

At a Glance The IEC standard 1131-3 (compare chapter 1.4) specifies the syntax and semantics
of a standardized series of programming languages for Programmable Logic
Controls (PLC). These include the two text languages IL (Instruction List) and ST
(Structured Text) and the two graphical languages LD (Ladder Diagram) and FBD
(Function Block Diagram).

It also defines the elements of the sequential function chart (SFC) language for
structuring the internal organization of PLC programs and Function Blocks.
Configuration elements, used for installing PLC programs onto PLC systems, are
also defined.

Note: Concept uses the English acronyms for the programming languages.

Furthermore, it defines methods to enable communication between the PLC and


other automated system components.

Concept In accordance with the standard, the present version of the programming system
standard Concept supports a subset of language elements, which are defined in the standard.
accordance
In this context, accordance with the standard means the following:
l The standard allows the individual implementing an IEC program system to select
or deselect certain language properties or even complete languages from the
selection tables, which represent an integrated part of the standard
specifications. A system, which itself accords with the standard, may only
implement the selected properties exactly as they are given in the standard.
l In addition, the standard enables the individual implementing to introduce defined
language elements into an interactive programming environment. As the
standard expressly emphasizes that the specification of such environments lies
outside of its area of application, the person implementing has a certain degree
of freedom to offer optimized forms of display and implementation mechanisms
for the benefit of the user.
l Concept uses these degrees of freedom e.g. when introducing the term "Project"
to implement the IEC language elements "Configuration", "Resource" and
"Program" all together (Concept only supports one single cyclically running
program within a single resource within the configuration). Apart from this, it uses
them, for example, with implementation mechanisms made available for
declaring variables and authorizing Function Blocks.

782 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


IEC conformity

IEC standards Information on which properties are supported and other implementation specific
tables details can be found in the following statements on standard fulfilment and the
associated standards tables.

IEC Conformity Test

Testing the An interface for importing standard IEC programs and DFBs from ASCII files (menu
Import/Export File → Import) and exporting these programs into graphical languages in ASCII
Interface format (menu File → Export) is available in Concept. The conformity of this interface
can be tested using files which can be obtained from IFAK (Institut für Automation
und Kommunikation e.V. Magdeburg).

IEC conformity test scripts:


(c) 1994, IFAK Institut für Automation und Kommunikation e.V.
Magdeburg
Steinfeldstraße 3
D-39179 Barleben

Notes The following points must be considered with regard to the conformity of the import
interface:
l In Concept, IL operators are permitted as identifiers.
R, S, LD, S1 and R1 are possible parameter names. Therefore, there will be no
changes made to the standard functions/function blocks. Concept requires no
change in the IEC table 54 with S to SET, R to RESET, S1 to SET1, R1 to
RESET1.
l All IL operators not in conflict with functions are permitted as variable names in
Concept (N, S, R, S1, R1, CLK, CU, CD, PV, IN, PT) – contrary to IEC table 54.
l Counter EFBs must be typified in Concept, e.g. CTU must become CTU_INT.
l Function block instances cannot be called up more than once; a restriction that is
self-evident if IEC table 53, property 3 is required.
l An overflow of time span variables (e.g. t#100s) is not detected. The system
calculates the time correctly, so that detection of an overflow is not necessary.
l IEC IL comments are only permitted as the last element in a line. Concept allows
comments to be made everywhere.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 783


IEC conformity

D.2 IEC standards tables

At a Glance

Overview This system fulfils the requirements of the IEC 1131-3 in the following properties of
the language.

What’s in this This section contains the following topics:


Section?
Topic Page
Common elements 785
IL (AWL) language elements 791
ST language elements 793
Common graphic elements 794
LD (KOP) language elements 795
Implementation-dependent parameters 796
Error causes 799

784 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


IEC conformity

Common elements

IEC standards IEC standards table for common elements:


table
Table Property Property description
number number
1 1 For required character set – see Chapter 2.1.1 of 1131-3
1 2 Lower case characters
1 3a Hash key (#)
1 4a Dollar sign ($)
1 5a Vertical line (|)
1 6a Left and right square brackets "[ ]"
2 1 Upper case character and numbers
2 2 Upper and lower case characters, numbers, embedded underscore
2 3 Upper and lower case characters, numbers, leading and embedded
underscore
3 1 Comments
4 1 Integer (whole number) literals
4 2 Real literals
4 3 Real literals with exponents
4 4 Base 2 literals
4 5 Base 8 literals
4 6 Base 16 literals
4 7 Boolean zero and one
4 8 Boolean FALSE and TRUE
7 1a Time span without underscores: short prefix
7 1b Time span without underscores: long prefix
7 2a Time span with underscores short prefix
7 2b Time span with underscores long prefix
10 1 BOOL: Boolean
10 3 INT: Integer
10 4 DINT: Double integer
10 7 UINT: Signed integer
10 8 UDINT: Signed double integer
10 10 REAL: Floating point number
10 12 TIME: Time span

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 785


IEC conformity

Table Property Property description


number number
10 17 BYTE: Bit sequence 8
10 18 WORD: Bit sequence 16
12 4 Data types for fields
12 5 Data types for structures
15 1 I: Input (Note 1, p. 789)
15 2 Q: Output (Note 2, p. 789)
15 4 X: Bit size (Note 2, p. 789, Note 1, p. 789)
15 5 no prefix: Bit size (Note 2, p. 789, Note 1, p. 789)
15 6 B: Byte size (Note 2, p. 789, Note 1, p. 789)
15 7 W: Word size (Note 2, p. 789, Note 1, p. 789)
15 8 D: Double word size (Note 2, p. 789, Note 1, p. 789)
17 2 Declaration of directly displayed buffered variables (Note 5, p. 790,
Note 9, p. 790)
17 3 Declaration of storage locations with symbolic variables (Note 5,
p. 790)
17 4 Assignment of storage locations with fields (Note 5, p. 790, Note 11,
p. 791)
17 5 Automatic storage allocation for symbolic variables (Note 5, p. 790)
17 7 Declaration for buffered fields (Note 5, p. 790, Note 11, p. 791)
17 8 Declaration for structured variables (Note 5, p. 790)
18 2 Initialization of directly displayed buffered variables (Note 5, p. 790,
Note 9, p. 790, Note 10, p. 791)
18 3 Assignment of storage locations and start values for fields(Note 5,
p. 790)
18 4 Assignment of storage locations and start values for fields (Note 5,
p. 790, Note 11, p. 791)
18 5 Initialization of symbolic variables (Note 5, p. 790)
18 7 Declaration and initialization of buffered variables (Note 5, p. 790, Note
11, p. 791)
18 8 Initialization of structured variables (Note 5, p. 790)
18 9 Initialization of constants
19 1 Negated input
19 2 Negated output
20 1 Use of "EN" and "ENO" - REQUIRED for LD (Note 6, p. 790)
20 2 Use of "EN" and "ENO" – OPTIONAL for FBD

786 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


IEC conformity

Table Property Property description


number number
20 3 FBD without "EN" and "ENO"
21 2 Standardized functions (Note 3, p. 790)
22 1 (*-TO-**) Type conversion functions (Note 4, p. 790
22 2 Truncation towards zero: TRUNC (Note 3, p. 790))
23 1 ABS: Absolute value
23 2 SQRT: Square root
23 3 LN: Natural logarithm
23 4 LOG: Base 10 logarithm
23 5 EXP: Exponential function
23 6 SIN: Sine, input in radians
23 7 COS: Cosine, input in radians
23 8 TAN: Tangent, input in radians
23 9 ASIN: Arc sine, principal value
23 10 ACOS: Arc cosine, principal value
23 11 ATAN: Arc tangent, principal value
24 12 ADD: Add
24 13 MUL: Multiply
24 14 SUB: Subtract
24 15 DIV: Divide
24 16 MOD: Modulo
24 17 EXPT: Exponentiation
24 18 MOVE: Assignment
25 1 SHL: move to the left
25 2 SHR: Move to the right
25 3 ROR: Rotate to the right
25 4 ROL: Rotate to the left
26 5 AND: LLogical And
26 6 OR: Logical Or
26 7 XOR Logical exclusive Or
26 8 NOT: Negation
27 1 SEL: Binary selection
27 2a MAX: Extendable maximum
27 2b MIN: Extendable minimum
27 3 LIMIT: Limit

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 787


IEC conformity

Table Property Property description


number number
27 4 MUX: Extendable multiplexer
28 5 GT: Falling sequence
28 6 GE: Monotonic sequence (decreasing)
28 7 EQ: Equality
28 8 LE: Monotonic sequence (increasing)
28 9 LT: Rising seqence
28 10 NE: Inequality
30 1 ADD: Adding TIME to TIME
30 4 SUB: Subtracting TIME from TIME
30 10 MUL: Multiplying TIME by ANY_NUM
30 11 DIV: Dividing TIME by ANY_NUM
33 1 RETAIN identifier for internal variables (Note 5, p. 790)
33 2 RETAIN identifier for output variables (Note 5, p. 790)
33 3 RETAIN identifier for internal Function Blocks (Note 5, p. 790)
34 1 Bistable Function Block (set priority)
34 2 Bistable Function Block (reset priority)
35 1 Detecting the rising edge
35 2 Detecting the falling edge
36 1 Up counter
36 2 Down counter
36 3 Up/Down counter
37 1 TP: Pulse (timer)
37 2a TON: Switch-on delay
37 3a TOF: Switch-off delay
39 1 RETAIN identifier for internal variables (Note 5, p. 790)
39 2 RETAIN identifier for output variables (Note 5, p. 790)
39 3 RETAIN identifier for internal Function Blocks (Note 5, p. 790)
39 14 Assignment of storage locations with fields (Note 5, p. 790)
39 18 Assignment of storage locations and start values for fields(Note 5,
p. 790)
39 19 Use of directly displayed variables (Note 2, p. 789, Note 1, p. 789)
40 1 Step/Start step – graphical form with directional links
40 2 Step/Start step – text form without directional links (Note 8)
40 3a Step marker – general form

788 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


IEC conformity

Table Property Property description


number number
40 4 Step time elapsed – general form
41 1 Transition condition in ST language within the graphic (Note 8, p. 790)
41 5 Transition condition in ST language – textual reference (Note 9, p. 790)
41 6 Transition condition in IL language – textual reference (Note 9, p. 790)
41 7 Use of the transition name
41 7b Transition condition in FBD language
41 7c Transition condition in IL language
41 7d Transition condition in ST language
42 1 Each Boolean variable can be an action
43 1 Action block
43 2 Concatenated action blocks
43 3 Step body in text form (Note 8, p. 790)
44 1 Identifier
44 2 Action name
45 1 Not saved (no identifier)
45 2 N: not saved
45 3 R: Overriding reset
45 4 S: Set (saved)
45 5 L: Time limited
45 6 D: Delayed
45 7 P: Pulse
45 9 DS: Delayed and saved
46 1 Simple string
46 2a Branching in string selection (priority from left to right)
46 3 Merging a string selection
46 4 Parallel strings - branch and merge
46 5a String jump (priority from left to right)
46 6a String loop (priority from left to right)

Note 1 Modicon TSX Quantum Präfix 3 is used in the prefix IB, ID position in all graphical
languages.

Note 2 Modicon TSX Quantum Präfix 4 is used in the prefix QB, QD position in all graphical
languages.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 789


IEC conformity

Note 3 The following functions are overloaded with reference to the data which is selected,
multiplexed or assigned; the type statement refers to the selection parameters.

List of overloaded functions:


l SEL
l MUX
l MOVE
All other functions are standardized, e.g. REAL_TRUNC_INT.

Note 4 List of type conversion functions:


l BOOL_TO_BYTE, BOOL_TO_DINT, BOOL_TO_INT, BOOL_TO_REAL,
BOOL_TO_TIME, BOOL_TO_UDINT, BOOL_TO_UINT, BOOL_TO_WORD,
l BYTE_TO_BOOL, BYTE_TO_DINT, BYTE_TO_INT, BYTE_TO_REAL,
BYTE_TO_TIME, BYTE_TO_UDINT, BYTE_TO_UINT, BYTE_TO_WORD,
l DINT_TO_BOOL, DINT_TO_BYTE, DINT_TO_INT, DINT_TO_REAL,
DINT_TO_TIME, DINT_TO_UDINT, DINT_TO_UINT, DINT_TO_WORD,
l INT_TO_BOOL, INT_TO_BYTE, INT_TO_DINT, INT_TO_REAL,
INT_TO_TIME, INT_TO_UDINT, INT_TO_UINT, INT_TO_WORD,
l REAL_TO_BOOL, REAL_TO_BYTE, REAL_TO_DINT, REAL_TO_INT,
REAL_TO_TIME, REAL_TO_UDINT, REAL_TO_UINT, REAL_TO_WORD,
l TIME_TO_BOOL, TIME_TO_BYTE, TIME_TO_DINT, TIME_TO_INT,
TIME_TO_REAL, TIME_TO_UDINT, TIME_TO_UINT, TIME_TO_WORD,
l UDINT_TO_BOOL, UDINT_TO_BYTE, UDINT_TO_DINT, UDINT_TO_INT,
UDINT_TO_REAL, UDINT_TO_TIME, UDINT_TO_UINT, UDINT_TO_WORD,
l UINT_TO_BOOL, UINT_TO_BYTE, UINT_TO_DINT, UINT_TO_INT,
UINT_TO_REAL, UINT_TO_TIME, UINT_TO_UDINT, UINT_TO_WORD,
l WORD_TO_BOOL, WORD_TO_BYTE, WORD_TO_DINT, WORD_TO_INT,
WORD_TO_REAL, WORD_TO_TIME, WORD_TO_UDINT, WORD_TO_UINT
The consequences of each conversion are described in the block library and the
help texts, which are available for the library of IEC standard functions.

Note 5 The RETAIN identifier is implicitly required; no language elements displayed in non-
buffered memory areas are supported.

Note 6 "EN" and "ENO" are offered as standard; they can, however, be hidden and any
other input or output of data type BOOL can be used for links.

Note 7 Expressions are restricted to individual simple Boolean variables.

Note 8 Only available on import of IEC text form in graphical SFC representation.

Note 9 Only available in textual declaration in IL or ST sections.

790 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


IEC conformity

Note 10 Initialization only possible for non Boolean outputs.

Note 11 Declaration of field variables only possible when using previously defined field data
type names.

IL (AWL) language elements

IEC standards IEC standards table for IL (AWL) language elements:


table
Table Property Property description
number number
52 1 LD operator: sets the current result to that of the operand
52 2 ST operator: saves the current result to the operand address
52 3 S operator: sets Boolean operands to "1"
R operator: sets Boolean operands to "0"
52 4 AND operator
52 6 OR operator
52 7 XOR operator
52 8 ADD operator
52 9 SUB operator
52 10 MUL operator
52 11 DIV operator
52 12 GT operator: Comparison >
52 13 GE operator: Comparison >=
52 14 EQ operator: Comparison =
52 15 NE operator: Comparison <>
52 16 LE operator: Comparison <=
52 17 LT operator: Comparison <
52 18 JMP operator: Jump to tag (Note 1, p. 791)
52 19 CAL operator: Calls Function Block
52 21 Closing bracket ")": Editing deferred operations
53 1 CAL operator with list of input parameters
53 2 CAL operator with loading/saving of input parameters

Note 1 Jumps are only allowed within sections, not across section boundaries.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 791


IEC conformity

Note 2 The following keywords are not available:


l TYPE...END_TYP
l VAR_INPUT...END_VAR
l VAR_OUTPUT...END_VAR
l VAR_IN_OUT...END_VAR
l VAR_EXTERNAL...END_VAR
l FUNCTION...END_FUNCTION
l FUNCTION_BLOCK...END_FUNCTION_BLOCK
l PROGRAM...END_PROGRAM
l STEP...END_STEP
l TRANSITION...END_TRANSITION
l ACTION...END_ACTION
l SEGMENT_SCHEDULER
l RET
l &

792 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


IEC conformity

ST language elements

IEC standards IEC standards table for ST language elements:


table
Table Property Property description
number number
55 1 Placing in brackets: ( Expression )
55 2 Function calls: Function name ( list of arguments )
55 3 Exponentiation: **
55 4 Negation: -
55 5 Complement: NOT
55 6 Multiplication: *
55 7 Division: /
55 8 Modulo: MOD
55 9 Addition: +
55 10 Subtraction: -
55 11 Comparison: <, >, <=, >=
55 12 Equality: =
55 13 Inequality: <>
55 14 Boolean AND: &
55 15 Boolean AND: AND
55 16 Boolean exclusive OR: XOR
55 17 Boolean OR: OR
56 1 Assignment
56 2 Function Block calls and use of FB outputs
56 4 IF instruction
56 5 CASE instruction
56 6 FOR instruction
56 7 WHILE instruction
56 8 REPEAT instruction
56 9 EXIT instruction
56 10 Empty instruction

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 793


IEC conformity

Note 1 The following keywords are not available:


l TYPE...END_TYP
l VAR_INPUT...END_VAR
l VAR_OUTPUT...END_VAR
l VAR_IN_OUT...END_VAR
l VAR_EXTERNAL...END_VAR
l FUNCTION...END_FUNCTION
l FUNCTION_BLOCK...END_FUNCTION_BLOCK
l PROGRAM...END_PROGRAM
l STEP...END_STEP
l TRANSITION...END_TRANSITION
l ACTION...END_ACTION
l SEGMENT_SCHEDULER
l RETURN

Common graphic elements

IEC standards IEC standards table for common graphic elements:


table
Table Property Property description
number number
57 2 Horizontal lines: Graphic or semi-graphic
57 4 Vertical lines: Graphic or semi-graphic
57 6 Horizontal/vertical connection: Graphic or semi-graphic
57 8 Line intersection without connection: Graphic or semi-graphic
57 10 Connected and unconnected corners: Graphic or semi-
graphic
57 12 Blocks with connecting lines: Graphic or semi-graphic

794 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


IEC conformity

LD (KOP) language elements

IEC standards IEC standards table for LD (KOP) language elements:


table
Table Property Property description
number number
59 1 Left power rail (with linked horizontal connection)
60 1 Horizontal connection
60 2 Vertical connection (with linked horizontal connections)
61 1 Closer
61 3 Opener
61 5 Contact for detection of positive transition
61 7 Contact for detection of negative transition
62 1 Coil (Note 1, p. 795)
62 2 Negative coil (Note 1, p. 795)-{}-
62 3 SET coil (Note 1, p. 795)
62 4 RESET coil (Note 1, p. 795)
62 8 Coil for detection of positive transition
62 9 Coil for detection of negative transition

Note 1 In start behavior of PLCs there is a distinction between cold starts and warm starts:
l Cold start
Following a cold start (loading the program with Online → Load) all variables
(irrespective of type) are set to "0" or, if available, their initial value.
l Warm start
In a warm start (stopping and starting the program or Online → Load changes)
different start behaviors are valid for located variables/direct addresses and
unlocated variables:
l Located variables/direct addresses
In a warm start all 0x, 1x and 3x registers are set to "0" or, if available, their
initial value.
4x registers retain their current value (storage behavior).
l Unlocated variables
In a warm start all unlocated variables retain their current value (storing
behavior).

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 795


IEC conformity

This varying behavior in a warm start leads to peculiarities in the warm start behavior
of set and reset functions.
l Set and Reset in LD and IL
Warm start behavior is dependent on the variable type used (storage behavior in
use of unlocated variables; non storage behavior in use of located variables/
direct addresses)
l SR and RS Function Blocks in FBD, LD, IL and ST
These Function Blocks work with internal unlocated variables and therefore
always have a storage behavior.

Implementation-dependent parameters

IEC standards IEC standards table for implementation-dependent parameters:


table
Parameters Threshold values/behavior
Error-handling procedure See Error causes, p. 799 & EFB help
National characters used All characters in the Windows ANSI
character set are supported.
Maximum length of identifiers Program name: 8
Formal parameter names: 8
DFB type names: 8
EFB type names: 17
Data type names: 24
all others: 32
Maximum comment length: Limited only by Windows resources
Range of values for time span literals 0s to 49d_17h_2m_47.295s
Range of values for variables of type TIME
0s to 49d_17h_2m_47.295s
Accuracy of the seconds display with types not applicable
TIME_OF_DAY and DATE_AND_TIME
Maximum number of field indices Practically no limit
Maximum field size 64 kB
Maximum number of structure elements Only limited by Windows or PLC
resources
Maximum structure size 64 kB
Maximum number of variables per declaration Only limited by Windows or PLC
resources
Maximum number of enumerated values not applicable
Default maximum length of STRING variables not applicable
Maximum authorized length of STRING variables not applicable

796 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


IEC conformity

Parameters Threshold values/behavior


Maximum number of hierarchy tiers 1
Configured or physical illustration Configured illustration, physical
illustration through separate I/O
projection
Parameters Threshold values/behavior
Maximum number of indices Practically no limit
Maximum range of index values Range of data type INT
Maximum number of structure levels Only limited by Windows or PLC
resources
Initialization of system inputs System zero; no user-definable start
values
Maximum number of variables per declaration Only limited by Windows or PLC
resources
Information for the determination of execution times In preparation
of program organization units
Methods of function display (names or symbols) Names
Maximum number of function specifications not applicable
Maximum number of inputs for extendable functions 32
Type conversion accuracy See EFB help
Accuracy of functions of a variable INTEL floating point processor or
emulator
Arithmetic function implementation INTEL floating point processor or
emulator
Maximum number of Function Block specifications Only limited by Windows or PLC
resources
Maximum number of Function Block authorizations 512 per section; number of sections
per program organization unit is only
limited by Windows or PLC resources
Pvmin, Pvmax of counters Limited by rangess of the INT or
DINT data types
Effect of a change in the value of a PT input during a Directly affects the timer’s default
time measurement operation time
Program size limits Only limited by available PLC
memory
Time behavior and porting effects of the execution The execution of SFC networks in
control elements different sections occurs
sequentially, in the order given in
these sections.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 797


IEC conformity

Parameters Threshold values/behavior


Accuracy of elapsed step time 10 ms
Maximum number of steps per SFC Limited by the available area for
entering characters within the
section; number of sections per
program organization unit only
limited by Windows or PLC
resources; the upper limit for the total
number of objects per SFC is 2000
Parameters Threshold values/behavior
Maximum number of transitions per SFC and per step Limited by the available area for
entering characters within the
section; number of sections per
program organization unit only
limited by Windows or PLC
resources; the upper limit for the total
number of objects per SFC is 2000
Action control mechanism Functionally equivalent to the
specification in the standard
Maximum number of actions per step Only limited by Windows or PLC
resources
Graphical display of the step situation Green = active
Red = inactive
Transition switch time Of the magnitude of 10 ms
Maximum width of branches/connections Limited by the available area for
entering characters 32
Contents of the RESOURCE libraries See EFB libraries & help
Maximum number of tasks 1
Task interval resolution not applicable
Pre-justified and non pre-justified schedules not applicable
Maximum length of expressions Practically no limit
Partial evaluation of Boolean expressions no partial evaluation
Maximum length of instructions Practically no limit
Maximum number of CASE selections Practically no limit
Value of the control variables on completion of FOR undefined
loops
Graphic/semi-graphic display Graphic
Network topology restrictions no restrictions

798 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


IEC conformity

Parameters Threshold values/behavior


Evaluation sequence of feedback loops Within a network, the starting point of
the FFB execution sequence is
determined by the "single" available
feedback variable
Means of specifying the network execution sequence 1: Execution sequence of program
organization unit sections
2: The network execution sequence
can be changed within sections; this
is done by using a menu command to
switch between the execution
sequences of two selected FFB
items

Error causes

IEC standards IEC standards table for error causes:


table
Error cause Handling (see Note 1, p. 800)
Variable value exceeds the specified range not applicable
Initialization list length and number of field 2) Error message during programming
elements do not agree
Incorrect use of directly displayed or external not applicable
variables in functions
Type conversion error 4) Error message during execution
Numerical result exceeds the range for data 4) Error message during execution
type
Division by zero 4) Error message during execution
Mixed input data types in a selection function 2) Error message during programming
Selector (K) outside MUX function range 4) Error message during execution
Invalid character position not applicable
Result exceeds maximum sequence length not applicable
Numerical result exceeds the range for data 4) Error message during execution
type
Zero or more than one starting step in SFC 3) Error message during analysis/loading/
network connection
User program attempting to change step 2) Error message during programming
situation or step time

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 799


IEC conformity

Error cause Handling (see Note 1, p. 800)


Simultaneously completed transitions without not applicable
priority in a selection branch
Side effects of evaluation of a transition 3) Error message during analysis/loading/
condition connection
Action control error 1) Error not reported
Unsafe or unreachable SFCs 3) Error message during analysis/loading/
connection
Data type conflict in VAR_ACCESS not applicable
Tasks demanding too many processor 3) Error message during analysis/loading/
resources connect
Scan time overrun 4) Error message during execution
Error cause Handling (see note 1)
Further task schedule conflicts not applicable
Numerical result exceeds the range for data 4) Error message during execution
type
Division by zero 4) Error message during execution
Invalid data type for operation 3) Error message during analysis/loading/
binding
Return from function without assigned value not applicable
Occurrence arrives at no outcome 4) Error message during execution
The same identifier as connector tag and not applicable
element name use
Non-initialized feedback variable (initialized 1) Error not reported
with system zero)

Note 1 Identification for the handling of error causes according to IEC 1131-3, chapter
1.5.1, d):
l 1) Error not reported
l 2) Error message during programming
l 3) Error message during analysis/loading/binding
l 4) Error message during execution

800 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


IEC conformity

D.3 Expansions of IEC 1131-3

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 801


IEC conformity

Expansions of IEC 1131-3

At a Glance The Concept programming environment makes the construct of the so-called
section available in all programming languages permitting the subdivision of a
program organization unit. This construct provides the opportunity to mix several
languages in the body of a POU (e.g. FBD sections, SFC sections), a property,
which, if used for this purpose, represents an expansion of the IEC syntax. Sections
do not generate their own name space; the name space for all language elements
is the POU.

Sections appearing in the body of a POU written only in the FBD language are not
to be viewed as an expansion, rather as a permitted means of specifying the
execution sequences of several FBD networks furnished with tags, as specified in
the corrigendum to 1131-3.

Purpose of Sections serve various purposes


sections l Sections permit the functional division of an expansive POU body: The body of a
POU can be divided into sensible functional parts. The section list represents a
kind of functional table of contents for a large, otherwise unstructured POU body.
l Sections permit the graphical division of an expansive POU body: in accordance
with an intentionally graphic form of representation, sub-structures of an
expansive body can be established. Smaller or larger partial structures may be
chosen.
l The division of an expansive POU body enables faster online changes: the
section serves as the unit for online changes in Concept. If the POU body is
changed in various places during the program runtime, all sections affected by
the changes are taken into account if explicitly initiated reloading occurs.
l Sections permit the execution sequence to influence particular marked parts of
the POU body: the section name serves as a marking for the part of the body
contained in the section, and the execution sequence of the sections can be
changed by ranking the sections (see also the last part of the "implementation-
dependent parameters" table for information on the execution sequence of
networks in the FBD language).
l Sections permit the parallel use of different languages in the same POU: this
property is a considerable expansion of the syntax of the IEC 1131-3 standard,
which only permits the use of a single IEC language for a POU body. Only the
SFC language also provides the opportunity to formulate parts of the body in
different languages, because transitions and actions can be expressed in any
language, in as far as the corresponding properties are supported by the
programming system.

802 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


IEC conformity

D.4 Text language syntax

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 803


IEC conformity

Text Language Syntax

Description The programming system Concept supports the complete language syntax, as
specified in appendix B of the IEC language standard 1131-3, with the following
exceptions:
l Syntax productions in appendix B of 1131-3, belonging to properties, which
according to the IEC standards tables in IEC standards tables, p. 784 in this
document are not supported by Concept, are not implemented.
l The use of some Concept supported properties is, according to the associated
remarks in the IEC standards table, only possible in a restricted or modified form.
The associated syntax productions are therefore only occasionally or somewhat
differently implemented.
l Concept supports the NOT Operator for inverting Boolean battery content in IL.
l The implementation of some faulty syntax productions in appendix B of 1131-3,
improved upon either in the corrigendum to 1131-3 or in the planned amendment
to 1131-3, uses the suggestions in these documents for orientation.
The improved productions are implemented in Concept as follows (chapter
numbers refer to appendix B of 1131-3):
l B.1.3.3:
array_initialization ::= ’[’ array_initial_elements {’,’
array_initial_elements} ’]’

initialized_structure ::= structure_type_name [’:=’


structure_initialization]
l B.2.1:
il_operand_list ::= il_operand [’,’ [EOL] il_operand]

il_fb_call ::= (’CAL’ | ’CALC’ | ’CALCN’) fb_name ’(’


il_operand_list ’)’
l B.2.2:
il_operator ::= ’LD’ | ’LDN’ | ’ST’ | ’STN’ | ’S’ | ’R’
| (’AND’ | ’ANDN’ | ’OR’ | ’ORN’ | ’XOR’ | ’XORN’) [’(’]
| (’ADD’ | ’SUB’ | ’MUL’ | ’DIV’) [’(’]
| (’GT’ | ’GE’ | ’EQ’ | ’NE’ | ’LT’ | ’LE’) [’(’]
| ’JMP’ | ’JMPC’ | ’JMPCN’ | ’)’ | function_name

804 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

E
At a Glance

Overview This section contains various configuration examples, given as step-by-step


instructions.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following sections:


Chapter?
Section Topic Page
E.1 Quantum Example - Remote Control with RIO 807
E.2 Quantum Example - Remote control with RIO (series 800) 815
E.3 Quantum Example - Remote Control with DIO 826
E.4 Quantum Example – INTERBUS Control 835
E.5 Quantum Example - SY/MAX Controller 841
E.6 Quantum Example - Profibus DP Controller 849
E.7 Quantum-Example - Peer Cop 863
E.8 Compact Example 871
E.9 Atrium Example – INTERBUS Controller 877
E.10 Momentum Example - Remote I/O Bus 887
E.11 Momentum Example - Ethernet Bus System 895

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 805


Configuration examples

806 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

E.1 Quantum Example - Remote Control with RIO

Introduction

Overview This Chapter contains the step-by-step process for the configuration of remote
control with RIO (Remote I/O).

What’s in this This section contains the following topics:


Section?
Topic Page
Editing local drop 808
Editing Remote Drop 812

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 807


Configuration examples

Editing local drop

Introduction This section describes the configuration of the first (local) drop. The processing
sequence begins first of all with the definition of all drops.
When editing the first (local) drop the modules must be set with their I/O references
before the individual modules can be parameterized.
Quantum – remote controller with RIO
1 2 3 4

C C D D A A C C D D A A
P P D D V V R R D D V V I/O
S U I O I O P A I O I O

S908
1 Local Quantum drop 1
2 RIO master module
3 RIO slave module
4 RIO drop 2

808 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

Defining Drops To define drops proceed as follows in the PLC Configuration window:
Step Action
1 Select PLC Selection.
Response: The PLC selection dialog is opened.
2 Select the Quantum PLC family and a CPU x113 xx. Using OK return to the
PLC Configuration window.
3 Select I/O Map.
Response: The I/O Map dialog is opened and the first drop is automatically
entered in the table.
4 Select the Head Setup command button.
Response: The Head Setup dialog is opened.
5 Enter a 7 in RIO Slot and quit the dialog using OK.
Response: The CRP-93x-00 module is automatically inserted in the component
list (in slot 7) of the selected drop. In the Go To list box, the Local/RIO (Slot 7)
network link is displayed.
6 Select the last line in the table.
Select the Insert command button.
Response: The second drop is entered in the Type column.
Note: The number of drops to be inserted is defined in the Segment scheduler
dialog. The default predetermines a maximum number of 32.
Dialog display
I/O Map

Reserve for 144 Insert Delete

Go To RIO (slot 4) Cut Copy Paste

Supervision
Drop Type Time In bits Out bits Status Edit
1 Quantum I/O 3 0 0 Edit…
2 Quantum I/O 3 0 0 Edit…
To insert at the end of the list, select this line

Remote I/O... OK Cancel Help

7 Select the drop from the Drop column.


Select the Edit... command button.
Response: You reach the module map.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 809


Configuration examples

Mapping To map the modules and specify the address ranges proceed as follows in the Local
Modules and Quantum Drop dialog:
Specifying I/O
Step Action
References
1 Select the Module → ... column.
Response: The I/O Module Selection dialog is opened.
2 From the Category column, select the <all> option.
Response: All modules are listed in the Modules column.
3 In the Modules column, select the CPS-214-00 module.
Exit the dialog with OK.
Response: The module is inserted in the I/O map.
4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example (see Local Quantum
Drop dialog representation).
5 In the In Ref and Out Ref columns, set the start references for the input and
output modules.
Note: Discrete Input References have the prefix 1 (e.g. 100001), Coil
References have the prefix 0 (e.g. 000001), Input Register References have the
prefix 3 (e.g. 300001) and Output Register References have the prefix 4 (e.g.
400001).
Response: The end reference (column In.End. or Out.End) of the available
address range is automatically entered.

810 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

Dialog display Following module mapping and I/O reference specification the dialog looks like this:
Local Quantum Drop

Drop Module
Modules: 7 ASCII Port No.: None Input bits: 0
Params
Input bits: 176 Output bits: 0
Output bits: 96
Status table:

Previous Next Delete Delete Cut Copy Paste

Rack-Slot Module Detected In Ref In End Out Ref Out End Description
1-1 CPS-214-00 DC SUMMABLE PS 2
1-2 CPU-x13-0x CPU 1xMB+
1-3 DDI-353-00 100001 100032 DC IN 24V 4x8
1-4 DDO-353-00 000001 000032 DC OUT 24V 4x8
1-5 AVI-030-00 300001 300009 AN IN 8CH BIPOLAR
1-6 AVO-020-00 400001 400004 AN OUT 4CH VOLT
1-7 CPR-93x-00 RIO Head S908
1-8 ...
1-9 ...
1-10 ...
1-11 ...
1-12 ...
1-13 ...
1-14 ...

OK Cancel Help Poll

Set module To set parameters for the individual modules, proceed as follows in the Local
parameters Quantum Drop dialog:
Step Action
1 From the Rack Slot column select the 1-3 line.
Response: The 1-3 text box has a dark background, i.e. the DDI-353-00 module
has been selected for editing.
Note: Parameters are not set for the CPS-214-00 and CPU-x13-0x modules.
2 Select the Params command button.
Response: The 140-DDI-353-00 dialog is opened.
3 Select the Discrete option button.
Response: You return to the I/O map.
4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example.
Note: The modules are sometimes set with different parameters. Help with this
can be obtained from the corresponding help texts in the parameter dialog.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 811


Configuration examples

Editing Remote Editing of the I/O st. (Drop) defined second takes place in the dialog RIO (Slot 7) -
Drop Quantum I/O-St. 2.
This dialog can be reached in two ways:
l In the I/O Map dialog, using the Edit.... command button, or
l in the Local Quantum Drop dialog, using the Next command button.

Editing Remote Drop

Introduction This section describes the configuration of the second (remote) drop. The drop has
already been defined in Editing the First (local) Drop (See Editing local drop, p. 808).
To edit the second (remote) drop, the modules must be specified with their I/O
references before parameters for the individual modules can be set.
Quantum – remote controller with RIO
1 2 3 4

C C D D A A C C D D A A
P P D D V V R R D D V V I/O
S U I O I O P A I O I O

S908
1 Local Quantum drop 1
2 RIO master module
3 RIO slave module
4 RIO drop 2

812 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

Mapping To allocate the modules and specify the address ranges use the dialog RIO (slot 7)
Modules and - Quantum I/O-St. 2 and proceed as follows:
Specifying I/O
Step Action
References
1 Select the Module → ... column.
Response: The I/O Module Selection dialog is opened.
2 From the Category column, select the <all> option.
Response: All modules are listed in the Modules column.
3 In the Modules column select the CRA-93x-00 module.
Exit the dialog with OK.
Response: The module is inserted in the I/O map.
4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example (see dialog representation
RIO (Slot 7) Quantum Drop 2).
5 In the In Ref and Out Ref columns, set the start references for the input and
output modules.
Note: Discrete Input References have the prefix 1 (e.g. 100001), Coil
References have the prefix 0 (e.g. 000001), Input Register References have the
prefix 3 (e.g. 300001) and Output Register References have the prefix 4 (e.g.
400001).
Response: The end reference (column In.End. or Out.End) of the available
address range is automatically entered.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 813


Configuration examples

Dialog display Following module mapping and I/O reference specification the dialog looks like this:
RIO (slot 7) - Quantum Drop 2

Drop Module
Modules: 5 ASCII Port No.: None Input bits: 0
Params
Input bits: 176 Output bits: 0
Output bits: 96
Status table:

Previous Next Delete Delete Cut Copy Paste

Rack-Slot Module Detected In Ref In End Out Ref Out End Description
1-1 CRA-93x-00 RIO DROP S908
1-2 DDI-353-00 100033 100064 DC IN 24V 4x8
1-3 DDO-353-00 000033 000064 DC OUT 24V 4x8
1-4 AVI-030-00 300033 300041 AN IN 8CH BIPOLAR
1-5 AVO-020-00 400033 400036 AN OUT 4CH VOLT
1-6 ...
1-7 ...
1-8 ...
1-9 ...
1-10 ...
1-11 ...
1-12 ...
1-13 ...
1-14 ...

OK Cancel Help Poll

Set module To set parameters for individual modules use the dialog RIO (slot 7) - Quantum
parameters I/O-St. 2 and proceed as follows:
Step Action
1 From the Rack Slot column select the 1-2 line.
Response: The 1-2 text box has a dark background, i.e. the DDI-353-00 module
has been selected for editing.
2 Select the Params command button.
Response: The 140-DDI-353-00 dialog is opened.
3 Select the Discrete option button.
Response: You return to the I/O map.
4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example.
Note: The modules are sometimes set with different parameters. Help with this
can be obtained from the corresponding help texts in the parameter dialog.

814 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

E.2 Quantum Example - Remote control with RIO


(series 800)

Introduction

Overview This Chapter contains the step-by-step process for the configuration of remote
control with RIO (Remote I/O) and series 800 modules.

What’s in this This section contains the following topics:


Section?
Topic Page
Editing Local Drop 816
Editing Remote Drop 820
Editing Remote Drop 823

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 815


Configuration examples

Editing Local Drop

Introduction This section describes the configuration of the first (local) drop. The processing
sequence begins first of all with the definition of all drops.
When editing the first (local) drop the modules must be set with their I/O references
before parameters can be set forindividual modules.
Quantum – remote controller with RIO (Series 800)
1 2 3 4 5 6

J B B
C C D D A A C C D D A A
P P D D V V R R D D V V I/O 8 8 8 I/O
S U I O I O P A I O I O 9 1 0
0 0 4

S908 S908
1 Local Quantum drop 1
2 RIO master module
3 RIO slave module
4 RIO drop 2
5 Adapter module
6 RIO drop 3 with series 800 modules

Defining Drops To define drops proceed as follows in the PLC Configuration window:
Step Action
1 Select PLC Selection.
Response: The PLC selection dialog is opened.
2 Select the Quantum PLC family and a CPU x113 xx. Using OK return to the
PLC Configuration window.
3 Select I/O Map.
Response: The I/O Map dialog is opened and the first drop is automatically
entered in the table.
4 Select the Head Setup command button.
Response: The Head Setup dialog is opened.
5 Enter a 7 in RIO Slot and quit the dialog using OK.
Response: The CRP-93x-00 module is automatically inserted in the I/O map (in
slot 7) of the selected drop. In the Go To list box, the Local/RIO (Slot 7) network
link is displayed.

816 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

Step Action
6 Select the last free row in the table, and insert the second drop with the
command button Insert.
Response: The second drop is entered in the Type column of the table.
Note: The number of drops to be inserted is defined in the Segment scheduler
dialog. The default predetermines the maximum number of 32, so that settings
are not necessary.
7 Select the last free row in the table again, and insert the third drop with the Insert
command button.
Response: The second drop is entered in the Type column of the table.
8 Select the third drop and open the list box in the Type column.
Select the 800 I/O option.
Dialog display
I/O Map

Reserve for expansion: 144 Insert Delete

Go To Local/ RIO (slot 7) Cut Copy Paste

Supervision
Drop Type Time In bits Out bits Status Edit
1 Quantum I/O 3 0 0 Edit…
2 Quantum I/O 3 0 0 Edit…
3 800 I/O 3 0 0 Edit…
To insert at the end of the list, select this line

Remote I/O... OK Cancel Help

9 Select the first drop from the Drop column.


Select the Edit... command button.
Response: You reach the module map.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 817


Configuration examples

Mapping To map the modules and specify the address ranges proceed as follows in the Local
Modules and Quantum Drop dialog:
Specifying I/O
Step Action
References
1 Select the Module → ... column.
Response: The I/O Module Selection dialog is opened.
2 From the Category column, select the <all> option.
Response: All modules are listed in the Modules column.
3 In the Modules column, select the CPS-214-00 module.
Exit the dialog with OK.
Response: The module is inserted in the I/O map.
4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example (see Local Quantum
Drop dialog representation).
5 In the In Ref and Out Ref columns, set the start references for the input and
output modules.
Note: Discrete Input References have the prefix 1 (e.g. 100001), Coil
References have the prefix 0 (e.g. 000001), Input Register References have the
prefix 3 (e.g. 300001) and Output Register References have the prefix 4 (e.g.
400001).
Response: The end reference (column In.End. or Out.End) of the available
address range is automatically entered.

818 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

Dialog display Following module mapping and I/O reference specification the dialog looks like this:
Local Quantum Drop

Drop Module
Modules: 7 ASCII Port No.: None Input bits: 0
Params
Input bits: 176 Output bits: 0
Output bits: 96
Status table:

Previous Next Delete Delete Cut Copy Paste

Rack-Slot Module Detected In Ref In End Out Ref Out End Description

1-1 CPS-214-00 DC SUMMABLE PS 2


1-2 CPU-x13-0x CPU 1xMB+
1-3 DDI-353-00 100001 100032 DC IN 24V 4x8
1-4 DDO-353-00 000001 000032 DC OUT 24V 4x8
1-5 AVI-030-00 300001 300009 AN IN 8CH BIPOLAR
1-6 AVO-020-00 400001 400004 AN OUT 4CH VOLT
1-7 CPR-93x-00 RIO Head S908
1-8 ...
1-9 ...
1-10 ...
1-11 ...
1-12 ...
1-13 ...
1-14 ...

OK Cancel Help Poll

Set module To set parameters for the individual modules, proceed as follows in the Local
parameters Quantum Drop dialog:
Step Action
1 From the Rack Slot column select the 1-3 line.
Response: The 1-3 text box has a dark background, i.e. the DDI-353-00 module
has been selected for editing.
Note: Parameters are not set for the CPS-214-00 and CPU-x13-0x modules.
2 Select the Params command button.
Response: The 140-DDI-353-00 dialog is opened.
3 Select the Discrete option button.
Response: You return to the I/O map.
4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example.
Note: The modules are sometimes set with different parameters. Help with this
can be obtained from the corresponding help texts in the parameter dialog.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 819


Configuration examples

Editing Remote Editing of the I/O st. (Drop) defined second takes place in the dialog RIO (Slot 7) -
Drop Quantum I/O-St. 2.
This dialog can be reached in two ways:
l In the I/O Map dialog, using the Edit... command button, or
l in the Local Quantum Drop dialog, using the Next command button.

Editing Remote Drop

Introduction This section describes the configuration of the second (remote) drop. The drop has
already been defined in Editing the First (local) Drop (See Editing Local Drop,
p. 816).
To edit the second (remote) drop, the modules must be specified with their I/O
references before parameters for the individual modules can be set.
Quantum – remote controller with RIO (Series 800)
1 2 3 4 5 6

C C D D A A C C D D A A J B B
P P D D V V R R D D V V I/O 8 8 8 I/O
9 1 0
S U I O I O P A I O I O
0 0 4

S908 S908
1 Local Quantum drop 1
2 RIO master module
3 RIO slave module
4 RIO drop 2
5 Adapter module
6 RIO drop 3 with series 800 modules

820 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

Mapping To allocate the modules and specify the address ranges use the dialog RIO (slot 7)
Modules and - Quantum I/O-St. 2 and proceed as follows:
Specifying I/O
Step Action
References
1 Select the Module → ... column.
Response: The I/O Module Selection dialog is opened.
2 From the Category column, select the <all> option.
Response: All modules are listed in the Modules column.
3 In the Modules column select the CRA-93x-00 module.
Exit the dialog with OK.
Response: The module is inserted in the I/O map.
4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example (see dialog representation
RIO (Slot 7) Quantum Drop 2).
5 In the In Ref and Out Ref columns, set the start references for the input and
output modules.
Note: Discrete Input References have the prefix 1 (e.g. 100001), Coil
References have the prefix 0 (e.g. 000001), Input Register References have the
prefix 3 (e.g. 300001) and Output Register References have the prefix 4 (e.g.
400001).
Response: The end reference (column In.End. or Out.End) of the available
address range is automatically entered.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 821


Configuration examples

Dialog display Following module mapping and I/O reference specification the dialog looks like this:
RIO (slot 7) - Quantum Drop 2

Drop Module
Modules: 5 ASCII Port No.: None Input bits: 0
Params
Input bits: 176 Output bits: 0
Output bits: 96
Status table:

Previous Next Delete Delete Cut Copy Paste

Rack-Slot Module Detected In Ref In End Out Ref Out End Description
1-1 CRA-93x-00 RIO DROP S908
1-2 DDI-353-00 100033 100064 DC IN 24V 4x8
1-3 DDO-353-00 000033 000064 DC OUT 24V 4x8
1-4 AVI-030-00 300033 300041 AN IN 8CH BIPOLAR
1-5 AVO-020-00 400033 400036 AN OUT 4CH VOLT
1-6 ...
1-7 ...
1-8 ...
1-9 ...
1-10 ...
1-11 ...
1-12 ...
1-13 ...
1-14 ...

OK Cancel Help Poll

Set module To set parameters for individual modules use the dialog RIO (slot 7) - Quantum
parameters I/O-St. 2 and proceed as follows:
Step Action
1 From the Rack Slot column select the 1-2 line.
Response: The 1-2 text box has a dark background, i.e. the DDI-353-00 module
has been selected for editing.
2 Select the Params command button.
Response: The 140-DDI-353-00 dialog is opened.
3 Select the Discrete option button.
Response: You return to the I/O map.
4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example.
Note: The modules are sometimes set with different parameters. Help with this
can be obtained from the corresponding help texts in the parameter dialog.

822 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

Editing Remote The third defined drop is edited in the RIO (Slot 7) - 800 Drop 3 dialog.
800 Drops This dialog can be reached in two ways:
l In the I/O Map dialog, using the Edit.... command button, or
l in the RIO (Slot 7) - Quantum Drop 2 dialog using the Next command button.

Editing Remote Drop

Introduction This Section describes the configuration of the third (remote) drop. The drop has
already been defined in Editing the First (local) Drop (See Editing Local Drop,
p. 816).
To edit the third (remote) drop, the modules must be specified with their I/O
references before the individual modules can be parameterized.

Note: The J890 adapter module must be mounted in the rack of the third drop.
However, this module is not visible either in the software or in the dialogs.

Quantum – remote controller with RIO (Series 800)


1 2 3 4 5 6

C C D D A A C C D D A A J B B
P P D D V V R R D D V V I/O 8 8 8 I/O
9 1 0
S U I O I O P A I O I O
0 0 4

S908 S908
1 Local Quantum drop 1
2 RIO master module
3 RIO slave module
4 RIO drop 2
5 Adapter module
6 RIO drop 3 with series 800 modules

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 823


Configuration examples

Mapping To map the modules and specify the address ranges go to the RIO (Slot 7) - 800
Modules and Drop 3 dialog and proceed as follows:
Specifying I/O
Step Action
References
1 Select the Module → ... column.
Response: The I/O Module Selection dialog is opened.
2 From the Category column, select the <all> option.
Response: All modules are listed in the Modules column.
3 In the Modules column select the B810 module.
Exit the dialog with OK.
Response: The module is inserted in the I/O map.
4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example (see dialog representation
RIO (slot 7) 800 drop 3).
5 In the Out Ref. column, enter the start references for the output modules.
Note: Discrete Input References have the prefix 1 (e.g. 100001), Coil
References have the prefix 0 (e.g. 000001), Input Register References have the
prefix 3 (e.g. 300001) and Output Register References have the prefix 4 (e.g.
400001).
Response: The end reference of the available address range (Out End column)
is entered automatically.

824 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

Dialog display Following module mapping and I/O reference specification the dialog looks like this:
RIO (slot 7) - 800 drop 3

Drop Module
Modules: 2 ASCII Port No.: None Input bits: 0
Params
Input bits: 0 Output bits: 0
Output bits: 24
Status table:

Previous Next Delete Delete Cut Copy Paste

Rack-Slot Module Detected In Ref In End Out Ref Out End Description
1-1 B810 000065 000072 8-OUT ISO
1-2 B804 400065 400065 16-OUT
1-3 ...
1-4 ...
1-5 ...
1-6 ...
1-7 ...
1-8 ...
1-9 ...
1-10 ...
1-11 ...
2-1 ...
2-2 ...
2-3 ...

OK Cancel Help Poll

Set module To set parameters for individual modules go to the RIO (slot 7) - 800 drop 3 dialog
parameters and proceed as follows:
Step Action
1 From the Rack Slot column select the 1-1 line.
Response: The 1-1 text box has a dark background, i.e. the B810 module has
been selected for editing.
2 Select the Params command button.
Response: The B810 dialog is opened.
3 Select the option button Discrete
Response: You return to the I/O map.
4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example.
Note: The modules are sometimes set with different parameters. Help with this
can be obtained from the corresponding help texts in the parameter dialog.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 825


Configuration examples

E.3 Quantum Example - Remote Control with DIO

Introduction

Overview This Chapter contains the step-by-step process for the configuration of remote
control with DIO (Distributed I/O).

What’s in this This section contains the following topics:


Section?
Topic Page
Editing Local Drop 827
Editing Local Drop 831

826 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

Editing Local Drop

Introduction This section describes the configuration of the first (local) drop. The processing
sequence begins first of all with the definition of the drop.
When editing the first (local) drop the modules must be set with their I/O references
before parameters can be set forindividual modules.
Quantum – remote controller with DIO
1 2 3 4

C C D D A A N C D D A A
P P D D V V O R D D V V I/O
S U I O I O M A I O I O
MB+

1 Local Quantum drop 1


2 DIO master module
3 DIO slave module
4 DIO drop 2

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 827


Configuration examples

Defining the To define the drop use Configure from the main menu and proceed as follows:
Drop
Step Action
1 Select PLC Selection.
Response: The PLC selection dialog is opened.
2 Select the Quantum PLC family and a CPU x113 xx. Using OK return to the
PLC Configuration window.
3 Select I/O Map.
Response: The I/O Map dialog is opened and the first drop is automatically
entered in the table.
4 Select the Head Setup command button.
Response: The Head Setup dialog is opened.
5 Enter a 7 in NOM Slot 1 and quit the dialog using OK.
Response: The NOM module NOM-2xx-00 is automatically inserted in the I/O
map (in slot 7) of the selected drop. In the Go to list box, the network link Loca
l/O RIO (Slot ?) is displayed.
Dialog display
I/O Map

Reserve for 144 Insert Delete

Go To Local/RIO (slot ?) Cut Copy Paste

Supervision
Drop Type Time In bits Out bits Status Edit
1 Quantum I/O 3 0 0 Edit…
To insert at the end of the list, select this line

Remote I/O... OK Cancel Help

6 Select the drop from the Drop column.


Select the Edit... command button.
Response: You reach the module map.

828 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

Mapping To map the modules and specify the address ranges proceed as follows in the Local
Modules and Quantum Drop dialog:
Specifying I/O
Step Action
References
1 Select the Module → ... column.
Response: The I/O Module Selection dialog is opened.
2 From the Category column, select the <all> option.
Response: All modules are listed in the Modules column.
3 In the Modules column, select the CPS-214-00 module.
Exit the dialog with OK.
Response: The module is inserted in the I/O map.
4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example (see Local Quantum
Drop dialog representation).
5 In the In Ref and Out Ref columns, set the start references for the input and
output modules.
Note: Discrete Input References have the prefix 1 (e.g. 100001), Coil
References have the prefix 0 (e.g. 000001), Input Register References have the
prefix 3 (e.g. 300001) and Output Register References have the prefix 4 (e.g.
400001).
Response: The end reference (column In.End. or Out.End) of the available
address range is automatically entered.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 829


Configuration examples

Dialog display Following module mapping and I/O reference specification the dialog looks like this:
Local Quantum Drop

Drop Module
Modules: 7 ASCII Port No.: None Input bits: 4272
Params
Input bits: 176 Output bits: 0
Output bits: 96
Status table:

Previous Next Delete Delete Cut Copy Paste

Rack-Slot Module Detected In Ref In End Out Ref Out End Description

1-1 CPS-214-00 DC SUMMABLE PS 2


1-2 CPU-x13-0x CPU 1xMB+
1-3 DDI-353-00 100001 100032 DC IN 24V 4x8
1-4 DDO-353-00 000001 000032 DC OUT 24V 4x8
1-5 AVI-030-00 300001 300009 AN IN 8CH BIPOLAR
1-6 AVO-020-00 400001 400004 AN OUT 4CH VOLT
1-7 NOM-2xx-00 MN1 MB+
1-8 ...
1-9 ...
1-10 ...
1-11 ...
1-12 ...
1-13 ...
1-14 ...

OK Cancel Help Poll

Set module To set parameters for the individual modules, proceed as follows in the Local
parameters Quantum Drop dialog:
Step Action
1 From the Rack Slot column select the 1-3 line.
Response: The 1-3 text box has a dark background, i.e. the DDI-353-00 module
has been selected for editing.
Note: Parameters are not set for the CPS-214-00 and CPU-x13-0x modules.
2 Select the Params command button.
Response: The 140-DDI-353-00 dialog is opened.
3 Select the Discrete option button.
Response: You return to the I/O map.
4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example.
Note: The modules are sometimes set with different parameters. Help with this
can be obtained from the corresponding help texts in the parameter dialog.

830 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

Editing Remote To edit the remote drop with DIO, you must return to the I/O Map dialog and define
Drop the drop.

Editing Local Drop

Introduction This section describes the configuration of the second (remote) drop. The
processing sequence begins first of all with the definition of the drop.
To edit the second (remote) drop, the modules must be specified with their I/O
references before parameters for the individual modules can be set.

Note: To link to the remote network, the coupling module CRA-21x-x0 must be
entered during module mapping.

Quantum – remote controller with DIO


1 2 3 4

C C D D A A N C D D A A
P P D D V V O R D D V V I/O
S U I O I O M A I O I O
MB+

1 Local Quantum drop 1


2 DIO master module
3 DIO slave module
4 DIO drop 2

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 831


Configuration examples

Defining the To define the drop go to the I/O map dialog and proceed as follows:
Drop
Step Action
1 From the Go to list box, select the DIO 1 (Slot 7) network link.
Response: The drop entered in the table is no longer displayed.
2 Select the Insert command button.
Response: In the Type column, the Read/Write type is entered.
Dialog display
I/O Map

Reserve for 144 Insert Delete

Go To DIO1 (slot ?) Cut Copy Paste

Supervision
Drop Type In bits Out bits Status Edit
Time
1 Read/Write 3 0 0 Edit…
To insert at the end of the list, select this line

Remote I/O... OK Cancel Help

3 Select the drop from the Drop column.


Select the Edit... command button.
Response: You reach the module map.

832 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

Mapping To map the modules and specify the address ranges use the DIO 1 (slot 7) - drop
Modules and 1 dialog and proceed as follows:
Specifying I/O
Step Action
References
1 Select the Module → ... column.
Response: The I/O Module Selection dialog is opened.
2 From the Category column, select the <all> option.
Response: All modules are listed in the Modules column.
3 In the Modules column select the CRA-21x-x0 module.
Exit the dialog with OK.
Response: The module is inserted in the I/O map.
4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example (see dialog representation
DIO (slot 7) Quantum drop 1).
5 In the In Ref and Out Ref columns, set the start references for the input and
output modules.
Note: Discrete Input References have the prefix 1 (e.g. 100001), Coil
References have the prefix 0 (e.g. 000001), Input Register References have the
prefix 3 (e.g. 300001) and Output Register References have the prefix 4 (e.g.
400001).
Response: The end reference (column In.End. or Out.End) of the available
address range is automatically entered.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 833


Configuration examples

Dialog display Following module mapping and I/O reference specification the dialog looks like this:
RIO (slot 7) - Quantum Drop 2

Drop Module
Modules: 5 ASCII Port No.: None Input bits: 0
Params
Input bits: 176 Output bits: 0
Output bits: 96
Status table:

Previous Next Delete Delete Cut Copy Paste

Rack-Slot Module Detected In Ref In End Out Ref Out End Description

1-1 CRA-21x-x0 DIO DROP MB+


1-2 DDI-353-00 100033 100064 DC IN 24V 4x8
1-3 DDO-353-00 000033 000064 DC OUT 24V 4x8
1-4 AVI-030-00 300033 300041 AN IN 8CH BIPOLAR
1-5 AVO-020-00 400033 400036 AN OUT 4CH VOLT
1-6 ...
1-7 ...
1-8 ...
1-9 ...
1-10 ...
1-11 ...
1-12 ...
1-13 ...
1-14 ...

OK Cancel Help Poll

Set module To set parameters for individual modules use the DIO 1 (slot 7) - Drop 1 dialog and
parameters proceed as follows:
Step Action
1 From the Rack Slot column select the 1-2 line.
Response: The 1-2 text box has a dark background, i.e. the DDI-353-00 module
has been selected for editing.
2 Select the Params command button.
Response: The 140-DDI-353-00 dialog is opened.
3 Select the Discrete option button.
Response: You return to the I/O map.
4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example.
Note: The modules are sometimes set with different parameters. Help with this
can be obtained from the corresponding help texts in the parameter dialog.

834 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

E.4 Quantum Example – INTERBUS Control

Introduction

Overview This Chapter contains the step-by-step process for the configuration of INTERBUS
control with the Quantum.

What’s in this This section contains the following topics:


Section?
Topic Page
General Information 836
Editing Local Drop 837

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 835


Configuration examples

General Information

Introduction INTERBUS control using Quantum occurs via module NOA-611-10. During this
process the module collects the words of all remote bus nodes and creates a
telegram with status information and I/O words. The telegram is then transferred to
the CPU, so that the NOA behaves like an I/O module.

Note: Using branch interfaces in the remote bus, remote bus branches with further
remote bus nodes (TIOs) can be constructed. However, the branch interfaces can
only be inserted in the remote bus, not in the remote bus branch.

Parameterization Command sequence parameterization (restart procedure) occurs in the CMD Tool,
produced by the PHOENIX firm (see also " NOA 611 1 restart procedure" with an
example for parameterizing the command sequence in CMD Tool).

836 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

Editing Local Drop

Introduction This section describes the configuration of the first (local) drop. The processing
sequence begins first of all with the definition of the drop.
When editing the first (local) drop the modules must be set with their I/O references
before parameters can be set for individual modules.

Note: When the NOA-611-00 module is entered in the I/O map, the loadable ULEX
is automatically installed.

Quantum - INTERBUS controller


1 2

C C D D A A N
P P D D V V O
S U I O I O A

TIO 1

3
TIO 2

TIO

1 Local Quantum Drop


2 INTERBUS master module
3 Remote bus without branch interface

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 837


Configuration examples

Note: The configuration of remote bus nodes does not take place in Concept and
is therefore not apparent in the I/O map. To edit the remote bus nodes, you must
use the CMD tool produced by the PHOENIX firm (Configuration Monitoring and
Diagnostic Software).

Defining Drops To define drops proceed as follows in the PLC Configuration window:
Step Action
1 Select PLC Selection.
Response: The PLC selection dialog is opened.
2 Select the Quantum PLC family and a CPU x113 xx. Use OK return to the PLC
Configuration window.
3 Select I/O Map.
Response: The I/O Map dialog is opened and the first drop is automatically
entered in the table.
Dialog display

I/O Map

Reserve for 144 Insert Delete

Go To Local/RIO (slot ?) Cut Copy Paste

Drop Type Supervision Time In bits Out bits Status Edit


1 Quantum I/O 3 0 0 Edit…
To insert at the end of the list, select this line

Remote I/O... OK Cancel Help

4 Select the drop from the Drop column.


Select the Edit... command button.
Response: You reach the module map.

838 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

Mapping To map the modules and specify the address ranges proceed as follows in the Local
Modules and Quantum Drop dialog:
Specifying I/O
Step Action
References
1 Select the Module → ... column.
Response: The I/O Module Selection dialog is opened.
2 From the Category column, select the <all> option.
Response: All modules are listed in the Modules column.
3 In the Modules column, select the CPS-214-00 module.
Exit the dialog with OK.
Response: The module is inserted in the I/O map.
4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example (see Local Quantum
Drop dialog representation).
5 In the In Ref and Out Ref columns, set the start references for the input and
output modules.
Note: Discrete Input References have the prefix 1 (e.g. 100001), Coil
References have the prefix 0 (e.g. 000001), Input Register References have the
prefix 3 (e.g. 300001) and Output Register References have the prefix 4 (e.g.
400001).
Response: The end reference (column In.End. or Out.End) of the available
address range is automatically entered.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 839


Configuration examples

Dialog display Following module mapping and I/O reference specification the dialog looks like this:
Local Quantum Drop

Drop Module
Modules: 7 ASCII Port No.: None Input bits: 4272
Params
Input bits: 176 Output bits: 0
Output bits: 96
Status table:

Previous Next Delete Delete Cut Copy Paste

Rack-Slot Module Detected In Ref In End Out Ref Out End Description
1-1 CPS-214-00 DC SUMMABLE PS 2
1-2 CPU-x13-0x CPU 1xMB+
1-3 DDI-353-00 100001 100032 DC IN 24V 4x8
1-4 DDO-353-00 000001 000032 DC OUT 24V 4x8
1-5 AVI-030-00 300001 300009 AN IN 8CH BIPOLAR
1-6 AVO-020-00 400001 400004 AN OUT 4CH VOLT
1-7 NOA-611-00 300010 300276 400005 400268 IBS-Head (Mode2)
1-8 ...
1-9 ...
1-10 ...
1-11 ...
1-12 ...
1-13 ...
1-14 ...

OK Cancel Help Poll

Set module To set parameters for the individual modules, proceed as follows in the Local
parameters Quantum Drop dialog:
Step Action
1 From the Rack Slot column select the 1-3 line.
Response: The 1-3 text box has a dark background, i.e. the DDI-353-00 module
has been selected for editing.
Note: Parameters are not set for the CPS-214-00 and CPU-x13-0x modules.
2 Select the Params command button.
Response: The 140-DDI-353-00 dialog is opened.
3 Select the Discrete option button.
Response: You return to the I/O map.
4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example.
Note: The modules are sometimes set with different parameters. Help with this
can be obtained from the corresponding help texts in the parameter dialog.

840 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

E.5 Quantum Example - SY/MAX Controller

Introduction

Overview This Chapter contains the step-by-step process for the configuration of a SY/MAX
controller.

What’s in this This section contains the following topics:


Section?
Topic Page
Editing Local Drop 842
Editing Remote Drop 846

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 841


Configuration examples

Editing Local Drop

Introduction This section describes the configuration of the first (local) drop. The processing
sequence begins first of all with the definition of all drops.
When editing the first (local) drop the modules must be set with their I/O references
before parameters can be set forindividual modules.
Quantum – SY/MAX controller
1 2 3

C C D D A A C C R R S
P P D D V V R R I O I
S U I O I O P M M M M

1 Local Quantum drop 1


2 RIO master module
3 SY/MAX drop 2

Defining Drops To define drops proceed as follows in the PLC Configuration window:
Step Action
1 Select PLC Selection.
Response: The PLC selection dialog is opened.
2 Select the Quantum PLC family and a CPU x113 xx. Using OK return to the
PLC Configuration window.
3 Select I/O Map.
Response: The I/O Map dialog is opened and the first drop is automatically
entered in the table.
4 Select the Head Setup command button.
Response: The Head Setup dialog is opened.
5 Enter a 7 in RIO Slot and quit the dialog using OK.
Response: The CRP-93x-00 module is automatically inserted in the I/O map (in
slot 7) of the selected drop. In the Go To list box, the Local/RIO (Slot 7) network
link is displayed.
6 Select the last line in the table.
Select the Insert command button.
Response: The second drop is entered in the Type column.
Note: The number of drops to be inserted is defined in the segment scheduler
dialog. The default defines a maximum number of 32.

842 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

Step Action
7 Select the second drop and in the Type column, open the list box.
Select the SY/MAXoption.
Dialog display
I/O Map

Reserve for expansion: 144 Insert Delete

Go To Local/RIO (slot 7) Cut Copy Paste

Drop Supervision In bits Out bits Status Edit


Type Time
1 Quantum I/O 3 0 0 Edit…
2 SY/MAX 3 0 0 Edit…
To insert at the end of the list, select this line

Remote I/O... OK Cancel Help

8 Select the first drop from the Drop column.


Select the Edit... command button.
Response: You reach the module map.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 843


Configuration examples

Mapping To map the modules and specify the address ranges proceed as follows in the Local
Modules and Quantum Drop dialog:
Specifying I/O
Step Action
References
1 Select the Module → ... column.
Response: The I/O Module Selection dialog is opened.
2 From the Category column, select the <all> option.
Response: All modules are listed in the Modules column.
3 In the Modules column, select the CPS-214-00 module.
Exit the dialog with OK.
Response: The module is inserted in the I/O map.
4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example (see Local Quantum
Drop dialog representation).
5 In the In Ref and Out Ref columns, set the start references for the input and
output modules.
Note: Discrete Input References have the prefix 1 (e.g. 100001), Coil
References have the prefix 0 (e.g. 000001), Input Register References have the
prefix 3 (e.g. 300001) and Output Register References have the prefix 4 (e.g.
400001).
Response: The end reference (column In.End. or Out.End) of the available
address range is automatically entered.

844 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

Dialog display Following module mapping and I/O reference specification the dialog looks like this:
Local Quantum Drop

Drop Module
Modules: 7 ASCII Port No.: None Input bits: 0
Params
Input bits: 176 Output bits: 0
Output bits: 96
Status table:

Previous Next Delete Delete Cut Copy Paste

Rack-Slot Module Detected In Ref In End Out Ref Out End Description

1-1 CPS-214-00 DC SUMMABLE PS 2


1-2 CPU-x13-0x CPU 1xMB+
1-3 DDI-353-00 100001 100032 DC IN 24V 4x8
1-4 DDO-353-00 000001 000032 DC OUT 24V 4x8
1-5 AVI-030-00 300001 300009 AN IN 8CH BIPOLAR
1-6 AVO-020-00 400001 400004 AN OUT 4CH VOLT
1-7 CPR-93x-00 RIO Head S908
1-8 ...
1-9 ...
1-10 ...
1-11 ...
1-12 ...
1-13 ...
1-14 ...

OK Cancel Help Poll

Set module To set parameters for the individual modules, proceed as follows in the Local
parameters Quantum Drop dialog:
Step Action
1 From the Rack Slot column select the 1-3 line.
Response: The 1-3 text box has a dark background, i.e. the DDI-353-00 module
has been selected for editing.
Note: Parameters are not set for the CPS-214-00 and CPU-x13-0x modules.
2 Select the Params command button.
Response: The 140-DDI-353-00 dialog is opened.
3 Select the Discrete option button.
Response: You return to the I/O map.
4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example.
Note: The modules are sometimes set with different parameters. Help with this
can be obtained from the corresponding help texts in the parameter dialog.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 845


Configuration examples

Editing Remote Editing the drop defined second takes place in the dialog RIO (slot 7) – SY/MAX
Drop I/O-St. 2.
This dialog can be reached in two ways:
l In the I/O Map dialog, using the Edit.... command button, or
l in the Local Quantum Drop dialog, using the Next command button.

Editing Remote Drop

Introduction This section describes the configuration of the second (remote) drop. The drop has
already been defined in Editing the First (local) Drop (See Editing Local Drop,
p. 842).
To edit the second (remote) drop, the modules must be specified with their I/O
references before parameters for the individual modules can be set.

Note: To link to the remote network, the coupling module CRM-931-RG must be
entered during module mapping.

Quantum – SY/MAX controller


1 2 3

C C D D A A C C R R S
P P D D V V R R I O I
S U I O I O P M M M M

1 Local Quantum drop 1


2 RIO master module
3 SY/MAX drop 2

846 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

Mapping To map the modules and specify the address ranges proceed as follows in the RIO
Modules and (slot 7) – SY/MAX I/O-St. 2 dialog:
Specifying I/O
Step Action
References
1 Select the Module → ... column.
Response: The I/O Module Selection dialog is opened.
2 From the Category column, select the <all> option.
Response: All modules are listed in the Modules column.
3 In the Modules column select the CRM-931-RG module.
Exit the dialog with OK.
Response: The module is inserted in the I/O map.
4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example (see dialog representation
RIO (Slot 7) SY/MAX drop 2).
5 In the In Ref and Out Ref columns, set the start references for the input and
output modules.
Note: Discrete Input References have the prefix 1 (e.g. 100001), Coil
References have the prefix 0 (e.g. 000001), Input Register References have the
prefix 3 (e.g. 300001) and Output Register References have the prefix 4 (e.g.
400001).
Response: The end reference (column In.End. or Out.End) of the available
address range is automatically entered.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 847


Configuration examples

Dialog display Following module mapping and I/O reference specification the dialog looks like this:
Local Quantum Drop

Drop Module
Modules: 4 ASCII Port No.: None Input bits: 0
Params
Input bits: 32 Output bits: 0
Output bits: 64
Status table:

Previous Next Delete Delete Cut Copy Paste

Rack-Slot Module Detected In Ref In End Out Ref Out End Description
1 CRM-931-RG REG RMT IF
2 RIM-101/361 100033 100048 16 IN AC/DC
3 ROM-121 400005 400008 4 OUT ANLG
4 SIM-116 100049 100064 16 IN SIM
5 ...
6 ...
7 ...
8 ...
9 ...
10 ...
11 ...
12 ...
13 ...
14 ...

OK Cancel Help Poll

Set module To parameter the individual modules use the dialog RIO (slot 7) – SY/MAX I/O-St.
parameters 2 and proceed as follows:
Step Action
1 In the Slot column, select line 2.
Response: The 2 text box has a dark background, i.e. the RIM-101/361 module
has been selected for editing.
2 Select the Params command button.
Response: The 8030-RIM-101/361 dialog is opened.
3 Select the Discrete option button.
Response: You return to the I/O map.
4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example.
Note: The modules are sometimes set with different parameters. Help with this
can be obtained from the corresponding help texts in the parameter dialog.

848 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

E.6 Quantum Example - Profibus DP Controller

Introduction

Overview This Chapter contains the step-by-step process for the configuration of a Profibus
DP controller with the Quantum.

What’s in this This section contains the following topics:


Section?
Topic Page
General Information 850
Profibus DP Export Settings in SyCon 850
Editing Local Drop 852
Importing Profibus DP Configuration 856

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 849


Configuration examples

General Information

Introduction Configuring Profibus DP is done using the SyCon (System Configurator) software
produced by Hilscher GmbH. It is initially stored there as a file (*.CNF). This
generated file is loaded into Concept and is visible in the I/O map of the configurator.
Before the Profibus DP nodes (max. 32) can be imported, a bus controller (CRP 811
00) must be mapped in the drop (Quantum I/O). Depending on the CPU selection in
the Select Extensions dialog box, a maximum of two to six bus controllers can be
inserted.

Profibus DP Export Settings in SyCon

Introduction SyCon is used to configure Profibus DP. The procedure for this is to be found in the
user manual provided by the manufacturer. The settings for the export of the *.CNF
file are explained in the following step-by-step instructions.

Preconditions For CRP-811-00 diagnostics the serial interface of the host computer and the
diagnostic interface of the bus controller must be linked with a V24 cable.
To display this diagnostic data, terminal emulation software must be started (e.g.
PROCOMM using the settings: 19.2 kBd, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity).

Defining the Firstly, specify the destination directory in which all files are to be saved:
Destination
Step Action
Directory
1 Select in the main menu Settings → Search Path....
Response: The Search Path dialog is opened and is pre-set with the SyCon
directory path as the project directory (e.g. C:\HILSCHER
GMBH\SYCON\FIELDBUS\PROFIBUS).
2 Enter the path of the Concept directory (e.g. C:\CONCEPT\PROFIBUS) in the
Project Directory text box.
Note: You can also accept the default.
Response: Execution of the Save and Export menu commands (in the File
main menu) saves all files in the entered Concept directory.

850 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

Generating an To generate an export file (*.CNF) proceed as follows:


Export File
Step Action
1 Select in the main menu File → Save → *.PB.
Response: The configuration is stored as a database file *.PB in the specified
directory.
2 Select in the main menu File → Export → ASCII.
Response: The configuration is stored as an ASCII file *.CNF in the specified
directory.
3 Exit SyCon and start Concept.

Note about The configuration must always be saved as a database file *.PB first, only then can
Saving an ASCII file be generated from the saved *.PB file. Every change must therefore
also be saved as a *.PB file first, before an ASCII file can be generated for export.
The files *.PB and *.CNF should always be saved in the same project directory.

Profibus DP After the Profibus DP nodes have been configured in SyCon, the Profibus DP
Configuration in configuration is imported into the Concept I/O map.
Concept An example of configuration and import is described in the chapter "Editing a Local
Drop (See Editing Local Drop, p. 852)".

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 851


Configuration examples

Editing Local Drop

Introduction This section describes the configuration of the first (local) drop.
For Profibus DP configuration the CRP-811-00 coupling module must be registered
in the I/O map. The configuration defined in SyCon is loaded into Concept as the
generated *.CNF file is imported into the parameter dialog of the CRP-811-00
coupling module.

Note: For an error free transfer of the Profibus DP configuration, it should be


ensured that sufficient memory is available. To optimize storage occupancy open
the dialog PLC Memory Partition (PLC Configuration → PLC Memory
Partition).

When editing the first (local) drop the modules must be set with their I/O references
before the individual modules can be parameterized.
Quantum – Profibus DP controller
1 2 3 4 5 6

MB+
C C D D A A C
P P D D V V R PROFIBUS
S U I O I O P

1 Device data base for CRP-811-00 (load onto SyCon)


2 Host computer for Concept and SyCon
3 V24 cable
4 Local Quantum drop 1
5 RIO master module
6 Profibus DP configuration (External modules)

852 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

Defining Drops To define drops proceed as follows in the PLC Configuration window:
Step Action
1 Select PLC Selection.
Response: The PLC Selection dialog is opened.
2 Select the Quantum PLC family and a CPU x113 xx. Using OK return to the
PLC Configuration window.
3 Select Config. Extensions → Select Extensions list.
Response: The Select Extensions dialog is opened.
4 In the Profibus DP list box select the 1 option.
Response: The coupling module then appears in the I/O Module Selection
dialog and can be used in the I/O map.
5 Select I/O Map.
Response: The I/O Map dialog is opened and the first drop is automatically
entered in the table.
Dialog Representation
I/O Map

Reserve for 144 Insert Delete

Go To Local/RIO (slot ?) Cut Copy Insert

Supervision
Drop Type In bits Out bits Status Edit
Time
1 Quantum I/O 3 0 0 Edit…
To insert at the end of the list, select this line

Head setup... OK Cancel Help

6 Select the drop from the Drop column.


Select the Edit... command button.
Response: You reach the module map.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 853


Configuration examples

Mapping To map the modules and specify the address ranges proceed as follows in the Local
Modules and Quantum Drop dialog:
Specifying I/O
Step Action
References
1 Select the Module → ... column.
Response: The I/O Module Selection dialog is opened.
2 From the Category column, select the <all> option.
Response: All modules are listed in the Modules column.
3 In the Modules column, select the CPS-214-00 module.
Exit the dialog with OK.
Response: The module is inserted in the I/O map.
4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example (see Local Quantum
Drop dialog representation).
5 In the In Ref and Out Ref columns, set the start references for the input and
output modules.
Note: Discrete Input References have the prefix 1 (e.g. 100001), Coil
References have the prefix 0 (e.g. 000001), Input Register References have the
prefix 3 (e.g. 300001) and Output Register References have the prefix 4 (e.g.
400001).
Response: The end reference of the available address range (In End or Out
End column) is entered automatically.

854 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

Dialog Following module mapping and I/O reference specification, the dialog looks like this:
Representation Local Quantum Drop

Drop Module
Modules: 7 ASCII Port No.: None Input bits: 0
Params
Input bits: 176 Output bits: 0
Output bits: 96
Status table:

Previous Next Delete Delete Cut Copy Paste

Rack-Slot Module Detected In Ref In End Out Ref Out End Description
1-1 CPS-214-00 DC SUMMABLE PS 2
1-2 CPU-x13-0x CPU 1xMB+
1-3 DDI-353-00 100001 100032 DC IN 24V 4x8
1-4 DDO-353-00 000001 000032 DC OUT 24V 4x8
1-5 AVI-030-00 300001 300009 AN IN 8CH BIPOLAR
1-6 AVO-020-00 400001 400004 AN OUT 4CH VOLT
1-7 CRP -811 -00 PROFIBUS DP
1-8 ...
1-9 ...
1-10 ...
1-11 ...
1-12 ...
1-13 ...
1-14 ...

OK Cancel Help Poll

Parameter- To parameterize the individual modules, proceed as follows in the Local Quantum
ization of Drop dialog:
Modules
Step Action
1 From the Rack Slot column, select line 1-3.
Response: The 1-3 text box has a dark background, i.e. the DDI-353-00 module
has been selected for editing.
Note: The CPS-214-00 and CPU-x13-0x modules are not parameterized.
2 Select the Params command button.
Response: The 140-DDI-353-00 dialog is opened.
3 Select the Discrete option button.
Response: You return to the I/O map.
4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example.
Note: The modules are sometimes parameterized differently. Help with this can
be obtained from the corresponding help texts in the parameter dialog.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 855


Configuration examples

Importing a Importing configured Profibus DP nodes occurs in the parameter dialog of the CRP-
Profibus DP 811-00 coupling module. This dialog opens when you select the CRP-811-00 row
Configuration from the I/O map and press the Params command button.

Importing Profibus DP Configuration

Introduction This section describes the import of the Profibus DP configuration. After that, further
parameter settings for the master take place and the I/O map can be established.

Downloading a To import, proceed as follows:


Profibus DP
Step Action
Configuration to
Concept 1 Select the Import... command button.
Response: The Select Import File standard window is opened.
2 Enter the path of the previously generated *.CNF file and exit the dialog with OK.
Response: The transfer of the *.CNF file is displayed in the Import Status
dialog.
3 Close the dialog after the transfer (100%).
Response: The imported configuration is displayed in the CRP-811-00
(Profibus DP) dialog.

856 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

Dialog Following the import of the configuration, the dialog looks like this (view scrolled all
Representation the way to the left):
CRP-811-00 (Profibus DP)

Master Slave
Bus address: 1 Slot: 7 Delete Parameters...

Delete Import... Presettings Parameters... Cut Copy Paste

Bus-Adr. Module Module In Type In Ref In End Out Type Out Ref Out End
11 170 DNT 110 10
1 BOOL 100081 100160 BOOL 000081 000160
12 170 BDM 344 00/01 BOOL 100161 100176 BOOL 000161 000176
13 170 DNT 110 10
1 BOOL 100177 100192
14 170 DNT 110 10
1 BOOL 100193 100208 BOOL 000177 000192
15 170 DNT 110 10
1 BOOL 100209 100464 BOOL 000193 000448
16 170 DNT 110 10
1 BOOL 100465 100480

OK Cancel Help Poll

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 857


Configuration examples

Following the import of the configuration, the dialog looks like this (view scrolled all
the way to the right):
CRP-811-00 (Profibus DP)

Master Slave
Bus address: 1 Slot: 7 Delete Parameters...

Delete Import... Presettings Parameters... Cut Copy Paste

Diag Diag
End Out Type Out Ref Out End Type Length Diag Ref Diag End Description

UINT8 6 300013 300018


160 BOOL 000081 000160 170 AMM 090 00 4AI+2AO 4 DI
176 BOOL 000161 000176 UINT8 6 300019 300024
UINT8 6 300025 300030
192 170 ADI 740 50 16DI 230V AC
UINT8 6 300031 300036
208 BOOL 000177 000192 170 ARM 370 30 10DI+8DO 12
UINT8 6 300037 300042
464 BOOL 000193 000448 170 ADM 540 80 Modbus Gate
UINT8 6 300043 300048
480 170 ADI 340 00 16DI 24 V DC

OK Cancel Help Poll

Note: In the Slave range, the Parameter... command button is used for displaying
slave parameters. The slave modules are, however, parameterized in SyCon (see
SyCon software user manual).

858 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

Parameterizing To parameterize the master, proceed as follows:


the Master
Step Action
1 In the Master range, select the Parameters... command button.
Response: The DP Master Parameters dialog is opened.
Dialog Representation
DP-Master-Parameter

Bus-Address 1

Baudrate 12 MBaud

Max. Diag. inputs 100

Max. Diag. lengths 32

Live character 3x: 467

OK Cancel Help

2 Accept the defaults, as shown in the figure above, or redefine them.


3 Close the dialog using OK.
Response: You return to the CRP-811-00 (Profibus DP) dialog.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 859


Configuration examples

Setting I/O To set the I/O references proceed as follows:


References
Step Action
1 Select the command button Preset. ....
The Preset dialog is opened.
Dialog Representation

Presetting

I/O assignment
Input Refs Output Refs

1x 1 0x 1

3x 1 4x 1

Diag Ref
3x 1

OK Cancel Help

2 Accept the defaults, as shown in the figure above, or redefine them.


3 Close the dialog using OK.
Response: You return to the CRP-811-00 (Profibus DP) dialog, in which the
defined reference ranges have automatically been entered.

860 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

Dialog After the I/O references have been set the dialog looks like this (view scrolled all the
Representation way to the left):
CRP-811-00 (Profibus DP)

Master Slave
Bus address: 1 Slot: 7 Delete Parameters...

Delete Import... Presettings Parameters... Cut Copy Paste

Bus-Adr. Module Module In Type In Ref In End Out Type Out Ref Out End
11 170 DNT 110 10
1 BOOL 100081 100160 BOOL 000081 000160
12 170 BDM 344 00/01 BOOL 100161 100176 BOOL 000161 000176
13 170 DNT 110 10
1 BOOL 100177 100192
14 170 DNT 110 10
1 BOOL 100193 100208 BOOL 000177 000192
15 170 DNT 110 10
1 BOOL 100209 100464 BOOL 000193 000448
16 170 DNT 110 10
1 BOOL 100465 100480

OK Cancel Help Poll

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 861


Configuration examples

After the I/O references have been set the dialog looks like this (view scrolled all the
way to the right):
CRP-811-00 (Profibus DP)

Master Slave
Bus address: 1 Slot: 7 Delete Parameters...

Delete Import... Presettings Parameters... Cut Copy Paste

Diag Diag
End Out Type Out Ref Out End Type Length Diag Ref Diag End Description

UINT8 6 300013 300018


160 BOOL 000081 000160 170 AMM 090 00 4AI+2AO 4 DI
176 BOOL 000161 000176 UINT8 6 300019 300024
UINT8 6 300025 300030
192 170 ADI 740 50 16DI 230V AC
UINT8 6 300031 300036
208 BOOL 000177 000192 170 ARM 370 30 10DI+8DO 12
UINT8 6 300037 300042
464 BOOL 000193 000448 170 ADM 540 80 Modbus Gate
UINT8 6 300043 300048
480 170 ADI 340 00 16DI 24 V DC

OK Cancel Help Poll

862 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

E.7 Quantum-Example - Peer Cop

At a glance

Introduction In this chapter the configuration of Peer Cop is described step by step.

What’s in this This section contains the following topics:


Section?
Topic Page
Generals to Peer Cop 864
Configuration of Peer Cop 865
Global data transfer 867
Specific data transfer 869

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 863


Configuration examples

Generals to Peer Cop

Introduction Peer Cop is a data exchange service provided by the Modbus Plus network. As an
overview, imagine that every Modbus Plus network segment (max. 64 nodes) has a
global memory, i.e. a certain number of global variables can be read by every node
connected to the same segment. The total amount of global variables depends on
the number. of connected (and active) nodes, every node can provide up to 32
words (16 bit) to the global memory. Only the 32 words provided by a node can be
written by the same node, all other nodes have read only access to these variables.
So by definition, there is a maximum of 64 * 32 words of global memory available to
a Modbus Plus network segment. Nodes connected to different (through bridges or
gateways) segment cannot share global memory.
When a PLC provides 32 words of global memory it does so by assigning holding
registers for broadcast, and when the PLC wants to read global variables provided
by another Peer Cop node, assigning holding registers to receive them. These
registers are called Global Input (from other nodes) and Global Output (what this
node provides) get updated cyclically (in case of a PLC after every scan).

To pass Routing Actually every Modbus Plus node has its own communication processor (the so
Paths called Peer processor), in addition to the processor that controls the node specific
work (in case of a PLC: solving user logic).

This leads to some routing paths the global data has to pass to traverse from one
node to the other:
l From the data provider (e.g. user logic) to the local (most times embedded peer
processor).
l From the local peer processor to the other peer processors (this takes the token
cycle time of the Modbus Plus network segment, that depends directly on the
number of connected nodes).
l From the peer processor of the data receiver to the data receiver itself, (that is
usually the user logic in the receiver PLC).

The actual update time depends on the speed of the Modbus Plus network segment
and (that’s the big time consumer) the scan times of the data provider and the data
receiver.

864 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

Send directly But the sharing of global memory is just the first part of the full Peer Cop service.
Since the gobal memory architecture requires a setup (or configuration) for both
communication partners, there is another subservice to communicate directly with
rather than Configure nodes. This service is somewhat like a master to slave
communication, where the master knows what data to send and the slave expects
data in a fixed layout and uses this data in a fixed manner (like Terminal I/O). The
limit of data that can be sent from the master to the slave is also 32 words. This
mode is not global data, since it is sent from one node directly and explicitly to one
other node. The sender specifies this as specific output and the receiver as specific
input (this specification is hardwired on nonintelligent modules like Terminal I/O).
The specific output and input words are also assigned to holding registers when a
PLC makes use of this Peer Cop service.
Since both, global and specific data transfer, depend on scan time of the PLC’s
which provide and use this data in their logic, there is no big performance difference
with the transfer from one holding register to the other registers.

Configuration of Peer Cop

Define Peer Cop Before configure a Peer Cop you must activate the check box Peer Cop in the dialog
functionality box Select Extensions.

Note: Since every PLC can be connected to up to 3 different Modbus Plus network
segments, you can setup Peer Cop for every connection separately (remember
Peer Cop is reduced to one segment, it doesn’t work through bridges).

Peer Cop To configure a Peer Cop, proceed with the following steps:
settings
Step Action
1 In the window PLC Configuration with the menu command Config. Extensions
→ Peer Cop open the dialog box Peer Cop.
2 Assume the default value 100 in the text field Expansion Size:.
Note: This text field is just a space of memory (in words) that gets reserved for
future changes (in offline mode) that shall not cause the necessity for a complete
download (this is especially importent for direct application setup at a plant).
3 Select the option button Link 0 (CPU) in the area Go To.
4 Assume the default value 500 in the text field Health timeout (msec.):.
Note: The Health timeout value has the same meaning as it has in the I/O map
for local and remote I/O.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 865


Configuration examples

Step Action
5 Select the option button Hold on timeout in the area Last value.
Representation of the dialog:

Peer Cop

Expansion Size: 100

Go To
Link 0 [CPU]

Link 1 [Head Slot ?] 0

Link 2 [Head Slot ?] 0

Health timeout [msec.]: 500

Last value Global Specific

Clear on timeout Input... Input...

Hold on timeout Output... Output...

OK Cancel Help

866 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

Global data transfer

Global Input For Global Input proceed as follows:


Step Action
1 For global data transfer open the dialog box Gobal Input by clicking the
command button Input... in the area Global.
2 Select node 10 in the list box of the left side of the dialog box.
3 Enter the Destination register, the index, the length and the Bin/BCD Code in the
text field of the dialog box, as shown in the figure.
Representation of the dialog box:
Global Input

(1-64) Range: 400001-401872 1-32 1-32


7 Subfield Dest. Ref. Index Length Bin/BCD
8
9 1 400040 1 1 BIN
10* 2
11
12 3
13 4
14
15 5
16 6
7

Clear Subfields 8

OK Cancel Help

Result: The holding register 400040 gets the first word of global output data of
node 10, therefore this is global input data for this PLC. If the length value is
higher, lets say 2, register 400041 would get the second word of global output
data of node 10. The index value declares with what word the assignment shall
start, in this case with the first word. The BIN/BCD column gives you the choice
of getting the global data formatted either into the usual binary format or into
binary coded decimals.
The index value may not be higher than 32, since every node can provide a
maximum of 32 word only for global output data. The lenght value may also not
be higher than 32 for the same reason.
4 Close the dialog box Global Input with the command button OK.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 867


Configuration examples

Global Output For Global Output proceed as follows:


Step Action
1 Open the dialog box Gobal Output by clicking the command button Output... in
the area Global.
2 Enter the Source register, the length and the Bin/BCD Code in the text field of
the dialog box, as shown in the figure.
Representation of the dialog box:

Global Output

Range: 300001-300512 1-32


Dest. Node Source Ref. Length Bin/BCD
All Nodes 300020 10 BIN

OK Cancel Help

3 Close the dialog box Global Output with the command button OK.

868 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

Specific data transfer

Specific Input For Specific Input proceed as follows:


Step Action
1 For specific data transfer open the dialog box Specific Input by clicking the
command button Input... in the area Specific.
2 Enter the Destination register, the length and the Bin/BCD Code in the text field
of the dialog box, as shown in the figure.
Representation of the dialog box:

Specific Input

Range: 400001-401872 1-32

Source Dest. Ref. Length Bin/BCD


1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 400040 20 BIN
11
12

OK Cancel Help

Result: If node 10 has declared some specific output, which gets delivered with
every token cycle on the Modbus Plus network segment (which is usually faster
than the updating by the controller’s user logic), that gets sent to holding register
400040. And if it is more than one word, it gets stored in the following holding
register, up to 400019 in this example. The formatting can also be either binary
or binary coded decimals.
3 Close the dialog box with the command button OK.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 869


Configuration examples

Specific Output For Specific Output proceed as follows:


Step Action
1 Open the dialog box Specific Output by clicking the command button Output...
in the area Specific.
2 Enter the Destination Reference register, the length and the Bin/BCD Code
option in the text field of the dialog box, as shown in the figure.
Representation of the dialog box:

Specific Output

Range: 300001-300512 1-32

Dest. Node Source Ref. Length Bin/BCD


13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20 300030 3 BIN
21
22
23
24

OK Cancel Help

Result: The values or registers 300030 to 300032 will be sent to node 20 (Target
Source) in binary format.
3 Close the dialog box with the command button OK.

870 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

E.8 Compact Example

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 871


Configuration examples

Editing Local Drop

Introduction This section describes the configuration of the first (local) drop.
When editing the first (local) drop the modules must be set with their I/O references
before the individual modules can be parameterized.

Note: The communication module MVB258A is parameterized in the TCN tool


(Train Communication Network). A parameterization file (binary file) is generated
and imported into the Concept parameter dialog.

Compact controller
DTA200 DTA201 DTA202

C M N N D D D D N A D
P V U U E E A A U D A
U B L L P P P P L U U

872 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

Defining Drops To define drops proceed as follows in the PLC Configuration window:
Step Action
1 Select PLC Selection.
Response: The PLC Selection dialog is opened.
2 Select the Compact PLC family and a PC-E984-258. Using OK return to the
PLC Configuration window.
3 Select I/O Map.
Response: The I/O Map dialog is opened and the first drop is automatically
entered in the table.
Dialog Representation
I/O Map

Reserve for 144 Insert Delete

Go To Lokal/RIO Cut Copy Paste

Supervision
Drop Type In bits Out bits Status Edit
Time
1 Compact I/O 3 0 0 Edit…

Head setup... OK Cancel Help

4 Select the drop from the Drop column.


Select the Edit... command button.
Response: You reach the module map.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 873


Configuration examples

Mapping To map the modules and specify the address ranges proceed as follows in the Local
Modules and TSX Compact Drop dialog:
Specifying I/O
Step Action
References
1 Select the Module → ... column.
Response: The I/O Module Selection dialog is opened.
2 From the Category column, select the <all> option.
Response: All modules are listed in the Modules column.
3 In the Modules column, select the MVB258A module.
Exit the dialog with OK.
Response: The module is inserted in the I/O map.
4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example (see Dialog
Representation Local TSX Compact Drop).
5 In the In Ref and Out Ref columns, set the start references for the input and
output modules.
Note: Discrete Input References have the prefix 1 (e.g. 100001), Coil
References have the prefix 0 (e.g. 000001), Input Register References have the
prefix 3 (e.g. 300001) and Output Register References have the prefix 4 (e.g.
400001).
Response: The end reference of the available address range (In End or Out
End column) is entered automatically.

874 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

Dialog Following module mapping and I/O reference specification, the dialog looks like this:
Representation Local TSX Compact Drop

Drop Module
Modules: 7 ASCII Port No.: Input bits: 16
None Params
Input bits: 128 Output bits: 16
Output bits: 64
Status table:

Previous Next Delete Delete Cut Copy Paste

Rack-Slot Module Detected In Ref In End Out Ref Out End Description
1-1 CPU TSX COMPACT
1-2 CPU TSX COMPACT
1-3 MVB258A 300001 300001 400001 400001 MVB Controller w/RS232
1-4 ...
1-5 ...
2-1 DEP214/254 100001 100016 DC 16-IN 12-60V
2-2 DEP2x6/2x7 100017 100032 DC 16-IN
2-3 DAP210 000001 000008 AC 8-OUT 115/230V
2-4 DAP208/258 000009 000016 8-OUT 24..110VDC/24
2-5 ...
3-1 ADU206/256 300065 300069 Analog 4 In
3-2 DAU2x2 400002 400003 An Out 2 ch Volt or Cu
3-3 ...
3-4 ...

OK Cancel Help Poll

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 875


Configuration examples

Parameter- To parameterize the individual modules proceed as follows in the Local TSX
ization of Compact Drop dialog:
Modules
Step Action
1 From the Rack Slot column, select line 1-3.
Response: The 1-3 text box has a dark background, i.e. the MVB258A module
has been selected for editing.
Note: The CPU module is not parameterized.
2 Select the Params command button.
Response: The AS-BMVB258A dialog is opened.
3 Select the Select command button.
Response: The Select MVB Import File dialog is opened.
4 Set the path of the parameterization file generated in the TCN tool, and exit the
dialog using OK.
Response: The selected parameterization file is displayed in the text box in the
AS-BMVB258A dialog.
5 Select the Do Import command button.
Response: The project data of the parameterization file is transferred to
Concept and displayed in the lower list box.
Dialog Representation

AS-BMVB258A

*.mv1 Select...

Start import

Project: test Traffic Store: examp.tool


Version: 7 SW Version: 1
Generation Date: 24/12/96 Device address: 157

001:0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000


009:0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
017:0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
025:0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000

OK Cancel Help

6 Exit the dialog using OK.


7 Repeat steps 1 to 2 for all the modules in the example.
Note: The modules are sometimes parameterized differently. Help with this can
be obtained from the corresponding help texts in the parameter dialog.

876 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

E.9 Atrium Example – INTERBUS Controller

Introduction

Overview This Chapter contains the step-by-step process for the configuration of an
INTERBUS controller with Atrium (PC based).

What’s in this This section contains the following topics:


Section?
Topic Page
General Information 878
INTERBUS Export Settings in CMD 879
Editing Local Drop 880
Editing Remote Drop (Importing INTERBUS Configuration) 884

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 877


Configuration examples

General Information

Introduction The configuration of the INTERBUS is done using the PHÖNIX software CMD. It is
initially stored as a file (*.SVC). This generated file is loaded into Concept and is
visible in the I/O map of the configurator.
Before the INTERBUS nodes are imported, set up the first drop (Atrium I/O) with the
CPU board (180-CCO-121-01, 180-CCO-241-01 and 180 CCO 241 11) and the
INTERBUS master (CRP-660-00). A maximum of two INTERBUS masters may be
inserted. The diagnosis of the field bus can take place in the CRP-660-00 register in
Concept.

878 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

INTERBUS Export Settings in CMD

Introduction The CMD tool (Configuration Monitoring and Diagnostic tool) is used to configure the
INTERBUS. For information about this, refer to the corresponding chapter in the
Phoenix user manual

Preconditions The serial interface of the host computer and the diagnostic interface of a PC104
board must be linked with a V24 cable.

Implementing Before you import the configuration into Concept, carry out the following settings in
Export Settings the CMD tool:
Step Action
1 Select Configuration → Controller Board → Data Type....
2 Select IBS PC104 SC-T and confirm the selection using OK.
3 Select File → Operating State....
Response: The Operating State dialog is opened.
4 Activate the Configuration (Online) option button and exit the dialog using OK.
5 Under Configuration → Controller Board → Control select the command
Activate Configuration Frame.
Confirm with Yes.
Response: A configuration frame is generated.
6 Select Configuration → Configuration Frame → Read Again.
Response: The configuration is read into the frame.
7 Under Configuration → Parameterization Memory → Write ASCII File select
the command INTERBUS Data (*.SVC)....
Response: The INTERBUS data is stored in a file.
8 Enter the directory and the file name in the open dialog and confirm the entry
using OK.
9 Select File → Save As....
Response: The INTERBUS project is saved.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 879


Configuration examples

Editing Local Drop

Introduction This section describes the configuration of the first (local) drop. The processing
sequence begins first of all with the definition of all drops.

Note: For an error free transfer of the INTERBUS configuration, it should be


ensured that sufficient memory is available. To optimise the storage allocation
open the PLC Memory Partition dialog (PLC Configuration → PLC Memory
Partition).

When editing the first (local) drop the modules must be set with their I/O references
before parameters can be set forindividual modules.
Atrium –INTERBUS Controller
1 4

MB+ 2 INTERBUS INTERBUS INTERBUS

3
C C
C R
O P

1 Host computer for Concept and CMD


2 V24 cable
3 PC104 board on a standard AT board
4 INTERBUS configuration

880 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

Defining Drops To define drops proceed as follows in the PLC Configuration window:
Step Action
1 Select PLC Selection.
Response: The PLC selection dialog is opened.
2 Select the Atrium PLC family and a 180-CCO-121-01. Using OK return to the
PLC Configuration window.
3 Select I/O Map.
Response: The I/O Map dialog is opened and the first drop is automatically
entered in the table.
4 Enter a 7 in RIO Slot and quit the dialog using OK.
Response: The CRP-93x-00 module is automatically inserted in the I/O map (in
slot 7) of the selected drop. In the Go To list box, the Local/RIO (Slot 7) network
link is displayed.
5 Select the last line in the table.
Select the Insert command button.
Response: The second drop is entered in the Type column.
Note: The number of INTERBUS masters to be inserted is limited to two drops.
Dialog display
I/O Map

Reserve for 144 Insert Delete

Go To Local/RIO Cut Copy Paste

Supervision
Drop Type Time In bits Out bits Status Edit
1 Atrium I/O 3 0 0 Edit…
2 Interbus S 3 0 0 Edit…
To insert at the end of the list, select this line

OK Cancel Help

6 Select the drop from the Drop column.


Select the Edit... command button.
Response: You reach the module map.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 881


Configuration examples

Setting I/O In the Local Atrium Drop dialog the INTERBUS master CRP-660-00 is
References automatically entered in the I/O map.
For the specification of the I/O references, enter the start references in the In Ref.
and Out Ref columns. After the start reference has been entered, the end reference
of the available address range of the module is automatically displayed.

Note: Discrete input references have the prefix 1 (e.g. 100001), coil references
have the prefix 0 (e.g. 000001), input register references have the prefix 3 (e.g.
300001) and output register references have the prefix 4 (e.g. 400001).

Dialog display
Local Atrium I/O I/O Station
Drop Module
Modules: 2 ASCII Port No.: None Input bits: 480
Parameter...
Input bits: 480 Output bits:0
Output bits: 32
Status table:

Previous Next Delete Delete Cut Copy Paste

Slot Module Detected In Ref In End Out Ref Out End


1 CCO-12000 Atrium Board
2 CRP-660-00 300001 300030 400001 400002

3 ...
4 ...

OK Cancel Help Poll

882 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

Set Module To set parameters for the INTERBUS master proceed in the following way in the
Parameters Local Atrium Drop dialog:
Step Action
1 In the Slot column, select line 2.
Response: The 2 text box has a dark background, i.e. the CRP-660-00 module
has been selected for editing.
Note: Parameters are not set for CCO-12000 module.
2 Select the Params command button.
Response: The CRP-660-00 dialog is opened.
3 Press the option buttons as shown in the following figure and exit the dialog using
OK.
Note: Help with setting parameters is obtained via the dialog’s help text.
Dialog display

CRP 660 00

Output timeout status


Set to zero Retain previous value

Addressing mode
MSB left (IBS) MSB right (984)

IBS Start behavior


Compl. config. necessaryPart. config. allowed

OK Cancel Help

Editing Remote To edit the remote drop open the INTERBUS Drop. 2 dialog. This dialog is reached
Drop via the I/O map dialog by pressing the Edit... command button in the second drop.
(INTERBUS).

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 883


Configuration examples

Editing Remote Drop (Importing INTERBUS Configuration)

Introduction This section describes the import of the INTERBUS configuration. The assignment
of I/O references takes place in the import dialog before the transfer of the
configuration file is performed.

Note: The module parameters are set in the CMD tool (see CMD tool user
manual), because the imported modules are not recognized in Concept.

Atrium –INTERBUS Controller


1 4

MB+ 2 INTERBUS INTERBUS INTERBUS

3
C C
C R
O P

1 Host computer for Concept and CMD


2 V24 cable
3 PC104 board on a standard AT board
4 INTERBUS configuration

884 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

Setting I/O To specify the address ranges proceed as follows in the INTERBUS Drop 2 dialog:
References
Step Action
1 Select the Import... command button.
Response: The Import IBS Configuration dialog is opened.
2 Check the Overwrite IBS Drop box.
Response: The Do I/O Mapping check box becomes available.
3 Check the Do I/O Mapping check box.
Response: The Digital Module in 3x/4x Range check box and the Input 3x
and Output 4x text boxes become available.
4 Uncheck the Digital Module in 3x/4x Range check box.
Response: The Input 1x and Output 0x text boxes become available.
5 Enter the value 100 in the Input 3x and Output 4x text boxes.
Response: The 3x and 4x address ranges of the imported module begin with the
start references 300100 and 400100.
Note: The 1x and 0x address ranges retain the default value 1, i.e. these address
ranges begin with the start references 100001 and 000001.
Dialog display

Import IBS configuration

Options Start refs. For I/O assignment


Overwrite IBS Drop Input Output

1x 1 0x 1
Do I/O mapping
3x 100 4x 100
Map Discretes to 3x/4x

OK Cancel Help

6 Exit the dialog with OK.


Response: The Select Import File dialog is opened.
7 Enter the path of the configuration file *.SVC.
Select OK.
Response: The Dialog Import Status dialog is opened, the file transfer starts,
and the import status is displayed.
8 Following the transfer (100%), close the dialog.
Response: The imported INTERBUS configuration is displayed in the
INTERBUS Drop 2 dialog in the I/O map.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 885


Configuration examples

Dialog display Following the import of the INTERBUS configuration, the dialog looks like this:
Interbus 8 I/O St. 2

Drop Module
Modules: 12 ASCII Port No.: None Input bits: 0
Parameter...
Input bits: 144 Output bits:16
Output bits: 206
Status table:

Previous Next Delete Delete Cut Copy Paste

No. Module Detected In Ref In End Out Ref Out End Description
1 BK-012-00
2 DIO-003-16 100001 100016 000001 000016
3 DIO-011-16 100017 100032 000017 000032
4 DI-130-16 100033 100048
5 AD-065-64 400100 400103
6 DO-129-16 000033 000048
7 BK-052-00
8 AIO-067-64 300100 300103 400104 400107
9 PCP-203-00
10 DI-002-16 100049 100064
11 DO-001-16 000049 000064
12 DIO-003-16 100065 100080 000065 000080
13 ...
14 ...

OK Cancel Help Poll

886 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

E.10 Momentum Example - Remote I/O Bus

Introduction

Overview This Chapter contains the step-by-step process for the configuration of a remote I/
O bus (Momentum).

What’s in this This section contains the following topics:


Section?
Topic Page
General Information 888
Editing local drop 888
Example 10 – Editing Remote Drops (I/O Bus) 892

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 887


Configuration examples

General Information

Introduction TSX Momentum is a modular system. Bus adapters (e.g. 170 INT 110 00) and CPU
adapters (e.g. 171-CCC-760-10-IEC) work in conjunction with an I/O unit as
independent modules. In order to function properly, each I/O unit must be equipped
with an adapter.

Editing local drop

Introduction This section describes the configuration of the first (local) drop. The processing
sequence begins first of all with the definition of all drops.
When editing the first (local) drop the modules must be set with their I/O references
before parameters can be set forindividual modules.
Momentum – remote controller with I/O bus
1
2 3 4 5 6 7

MB+

1 Host Computer
2 I/O unit e.g. 170-AAI-030-00
3 Interface adapter
4 CPU adapter e.g. 171-CCC-760-10-IEC
5 I/O bus interface e.g. 172-PNN-210-22
6 Bus adapter e.g. 170-INT-110-00
7 I/O unit e.g. 170-AMM-090-00

888 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

Defining Drops To define drops proceed as follows in the PLC Configuration window:
Step Action
1 Select PLC Selection.
Response: The PLC selection dialog is opened.
2 Select the PLC family Momentum and CPU 171-CCC-760-10-IEC. Use OK
return to the PLC Configuration window.
3 Select I/O Map.
Response: The I/O Map dialog is opened and the first drop is automatically
entered in the table.
4 Select the last line in the table.
Select the Insert command button.
Response: The second drop is entered in the Type column.
Note: Only one I/O bus can be configured.
Dialog display
I/O Map

Reserve for expansion: 144 Insert Delete

Drop Supervision In bits Out bits Status Edit


Type Time
1 Momentum I/O 0 0 ....
2 I/O bus 0 0 ....

OK Cancel Help

5 Select the drop from the Drop column.


Select the Edit... command button.
Response: You reach the module map.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 889


Configuration examples

Mapping To map the modules and specify the address ranges proceed as follows in the Local
Modules and Quantum Drop dialog:
Specifying I/O
Step Action
References
1 Select the Module → ... column.
Response: The I/O Module Selection dialog is opened.
2 From the Category column, select the <all> option.
Response: All modules are listed in the Modules column.
3 Select from the column Modules, the moduleAAI-030-00.
Exit the dialog with OK.
Response: The module is inserted in the I/O map.
4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example (see Local Momentum
drop).
5 In the In Ref and Out Ref columns, set the start references for the input and
output modules.
Note: Discrete Input References have the prefix 1 (e.g. 100001), Coil
References have the prefix 0 (e.g. 000001), Input Register References have the
prefix 3 (e.g. 300001) and Output Register References have the prefix 4 (e.g.
400001).
Response: The end reference (column In.End. or Out.End) of the available
address range is automatically entered.

Dialog display Following module mapping and I/O reference specification the dialog looks like this:
Local Momentum Drop

Drop Module
Modules: 1 Input bits: 0
Params
Input bits: 0 Output bits:0
Output bits: 0
Status table:

Delete Delete Cut Copy Paste

Module Detected In Ref In End Out Ref Out End Description

AAI 030 00 300001 300008 400001 400002 I/O BASE, ANALOG-8CH DI

OK Cancel Help Poll

Note: With this addressing the 8 measurements of the AAI-030-00 are to be found
in the words 300001-300008. The parameters are in the words 400001 and
400002.

890 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

Set Module To set parameters for the module proceed as follows in the Local Momentum Drop
Parameters dialog:
Step Action
1 Select the Params command button.
Response: The 170-DDI-353-00 dialog is opened.
2 Select the signal conditions for the input and output channels from the list boxes
and exit the dialog using OK.
Note: Help with this can be obtained from the corresponding help text in the
parameter dialog.
Response: The parameter settings are automatically allocated to the addresses
400001 and 400002.
Dialog display

170 AAI 030 00

Input selection

Channel 1: Disable Channel 5: Disable


Disable Disable
Channel 2: -10 V to + 10 V Channel 6: Disable
+/-5V and +/-20mA
1..5V and 4..20mA
Channel 3: Disable Channel 7: Disable

Channel 4: Disable Channel 8: Disable

Parameter words
Word 1: 4444 Word 2: 4444

OK Cancel Help

3 Exit the dialog using OK.


Response: You return automatically to the I/O Map dialog.

Editing Remote To edit the remote drop open the RIO I/O Bus Drop dialog. This dialog is reached
Drops (I/O bus) via the I/O Map dialog by pressing the Edit... command button in the second drop
(I/O bus).

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 891


Configuration examples

Example 10 – Editing Remote Drops (I/O Bus)

Introduction This section describes the configuration of the Momentum I/O bus. The drop has
already been defined in Editing the First (local) Drop (See Editing local drop, p. 888).
When editing the I/O bus the modules must be specified with their I/O references
before the individuals modules can be parameterized.
Momentum – remote controller with I/O bus
1
2 3 4 5 6 7

MB+

1 Host Computer
2 I/O unit e.g. 170-AAI-030-00
3 Interface adapter e.g. 172-PNN-210-22
4 CPU adapter e.g. 171-CCC-760-10-984
5 I/O bus interface
6 Bus adapter e.g. 170-INT-110-00
7 I/O unit e.g. 170-AMM-090-00

892 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

Mapping To map the modules and specify the address ranges proceed as follows in the Local
Modules and TSX Compact Drop dialog:
Specifying I/O
Step Action
References
1 Select the Module → ... column.
Response: The I/O Module Selection dialog is opened.
2 From the Category column, select the <all> option.
Response: All modules are listed in the Modules column.
3 Select from the column Modules, the module AMM-090-00.
Exit the dialog with OK.
Response: The module is inserted in the I/O map.
4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example (see Local Quantum
Drop dialog representation).
5 In the In Ref and Out Ref columns, set the start references for the input and
output modules.
Note: Discrete Input References have the prefix 1 (e.g. 100001), Coil
References have the prefix 0 (e.g. 000001), Input Register References have the
prefix 3 (e.g. 300001) and Output Register References have the prefix 4 (e.g.
400001).
Response: The end reference (column In.End. or Out.End) of the available
address range is automatically entered.

Dialog display Following module mapping and I/O reference specification the dialog looks like this:
RIO I/O Bus Drop
Drop Module
Modules: 1 Input bits: 80
Params
Input bits: 80 Used I/O points: 80 Output bits:80
Output bits: 80
Status table:

Delete Delete Cut Copy Paste

No. Module Detected In Ref In End Out Ref Out End Description
1 AMM-090-00 300009 300013 400003 400007 Analog 4 Ch 4 - 20
2 ...
3 ...

OK Cancel Help Poll

Note: With this addressing, the 4 measurements of the AMM-090-00 are to be


found in the words 300009-300013. The parameters are in the words 400009-
400013.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 893


Configuration examples

Set Module To set parameters for the module proceed as follows in the RIO I/O bus drop dialog:
Parameters
Step Action
1 Select column No. line 1.
Response: The 1 text box has a dark background, i.e. the AMM-090-00 module
has been selected for editing.
2 Select the Params command button.
Response: The 170-AMM-090-00 dialog is opened.
3 Select the signal states for the input and output channels from the list boxes and
exit the dialog using OK.
Note: Help with this can be obtained from the help text in the parameter dialog.
Response: The parameter settings are automatically allocated to the addresses
400009-400013.
Dialog display
170 AMM 090 00

Input Selections Output Selections

Channel 1: 1..5V or 4..20mA Channel 1 Output: Disable


Disable
Channel 2: 1..5V or 4..20mA Channel 1 Fallback: +0mA To +20mA
-10 V To + 10 V

Channel 3: 1..5V or 4..20mA Channel 2 Output: Disable

Channel 4: 1..5V or 4..20mA Channel 2 Fallback: Output to Zero

Parameter Words
Word 1: AAAA Word 2: 0044

OK Cancel Help

894 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

E.11 Momentum Example - Ethernet Bus System

Introduction

Overview This chapter contains step-by-step instructions for the configuration of an Ethernet
bus system with Momentum.

What’s in this This section contains the following topics:


Section?
Topic Page
Configure Ethernet 896
Network Configuration in Different Operating Systems 897
Editing local drop 907
Create online connection 910

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 895


Configuration examples

Configure Ethernet

Preconditions To configure an Ethernet bus system, the following preconditions must be fulfilled:
l PCI network cards in the host computer
l Installation of the network card driver
l Setting Ethernet interface parameters
l Addressing the M1 Ethernet CPU

Installing the PCI For a link to an Ethernet bus system an Ethernet interface located on a PCI network
network card card must be available in the host computer. This card can be upgraded in PCs, as
long as a PCI slot is available. Information about this can be found in the computer
manufacturer’s user manual.

Network Network configurations for different operating systems are given in section Network
configuration Configuration in Different Operating Systems, p. 897.

Installing Drivers Following the installation of the PCI network card the drivers, which come with the
network card, must be installed.
To proceed further, the IP address of the network card is required (it may be
necessary to contact network administrator).

Addressing the The M1 Ethernet CPU does not have an IP address when supplied, and must
M1 Ethernet CPU therefore be determined in the Ethernet / I/O Scanner dialog. The address for the
gateway and Subnet Mask is also determined in this dialog.
The IP address can be assigned via the system administrator or the BOOTP server.

Note: It is important to ensure that the IP address has not already been assigned
to another device. Double addressing causes an unforeseeable function in the
network.

After addressing, saving to Flash is recommended (Online Control Panel → Flash


Program...), so that the settings are not lost in case of a power outage.

896 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

Network Configuration in Different Operating Systems

Network Declare this IP address in the operating system as follows:


configuration in
Step Action
Win 98
1 Select Start → Settings → Control Panel → Network.
Response: The Network dialog box is opened.
Dialog display
Network

Configuration Identification Access control

The following network components are installed:

Client for Microsoft networks


DEC Etherworks 3 (All ISA versions)
TCP/IP
File and printer enabling for Microsoft networks

Add… Remove Properties

Primary Network Logon:


Client for Microsoft networks

File and printer enabling…

Description
The Microsoft TCP/IP protocol serves to create
Internet and WAN links

OK Cancel

2 Select the register Configuration.


Select the network connection TCP/IP.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 897


Configuration examples

Step Action
3 Select the Properties command button.
Response: The TCP/IP Properties dialog is opened.
Dialog display
TCP/IP Properties ?

Links Advanced NetBIOS DNS Configuration


Gateway WINS Configuration IP address

This computer can automatically be assigned an IP address


If IP addresses are not automatically assigned in the network
get an address from your
network administrator and enter it below.

Automatically assign IP address


Determine IP address:

IP Address:

Subnet Mask:

OK Cancel

4 Select the register IP Address and make the following settings.


Response: The programming device is then registered for network operation
with the IP address.

898 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

Computer The information is used to identify the computer in the network:


Identification in
Step Action
Win 98/NT
1 Select Start → Settings → Control Panel → Network.
Response: The Network dialog box is opened.
2 Select the register Identification.
Enter the computer name, the name of the workgroup and a short description of
the computer.
Dialog display

Network

Configuration Identification Access control

Using the following information, the computer is


identified in the network. Enter the
computer name, the name of the workgroup and a short
description of the computer.

Computer name: SG6191

Workgroup: de.acc

Description: Dell OptiPlex XL 5100

OK Cancel

3 Exit the dialog using OK.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 899


Configuration examples

Network Declare this IP address in the operating system as follows:


configuration in
Step Action
Win NT
1 Select Start → Settings → Control Panel → Network.
Response: The Network dialog box is opened.
Dialog display
Network (View Mode) ?

Identification Services Protocols Network Card

Using the following information, the computer is identified in the network.

Computer Name: SG POOL

Domain: SG.OA

Close Cancel

900 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

Step Action
2 Select the register Protocols.
Dialog display
Network (View Mode) ?

Identification Services Protocols Network Card

Network protocols:

TCP/IP protocol

Add... Remove Properties... Update

Member of
TCP/IP stands for Transport Control Protocol / Internet Protocol. The
standard protocol for long distance networks (WANs = Wide Area Networks), which
allow communication between different networks.

Close Cancel

Select the network connection TCP/IP Protocol.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 901


Configuration examples

Step Action
3 Select the Properties command button.
Response: The Microsoft TCP/IP Properties dialog box is opened.
Dialog display

Microsoft TCP/IP Properties ?

IP address DNS WINS address Routing

A DHCP server can automatically assign this network card


an IP address. Get an address from your network administrator
if an DHCP server is not available in the network.
Enter this address below.

Network cards:
[1] 3 Com Etherlink III-Adapter

Get IP address from a DHCP server


Enter IP Address

IP Address:

Subnet Mask:

Standard Gateway:

Options...

OK Cancel Apply

4 Select the register IP Address and make the following settings.


Response: The programming device is then registered for network operation
with the IP address.

902 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

Network Declare this IP address in the operating system as follows:


configuration in
Step Action
Win 2000
1 Select Start → Settings → Network and Dial-Up Connections.
Response: The Network and Dial-Up Connections window is opened.
2 Select the LAN Connection icon.
Response: The LAN Connection status dialog box is opened.
Dialog display

Status of LAN Connection ?

General

Terminate

Status: Establish connection


Duration: 00:12:20
Transfer rate: 100.0 MBit/s

Activity

Sent Received

Packages: 756 559

Properties Deactivate

Close

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 903


Configuration examples

Step Action
3 Select the Properties command button.
Response: The LAN Connection Properties dialog box is opened.
Dialog display
LAN Connection Properties ?

General

Establish connection using:

3Com 3C918 integrated Fast Ethernet-Controller [3C905B-

Configure
Activated components are used by this connection:

Client for Microsoft networks

File and printer enabling for Microsoft networks

Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)

Install... Uninstall Properties

Description
TCP/IP, the standard protocol for WAN networks which
allow data to be exchanged over different, connected
networks.

Show icon in the task bar when connected

OK Cancel

4 Select the network connection Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).

904 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

Step Action
5 Select the Properties command button.
Response: The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box is opened.
Dialog display
Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties ?

General

IP settings can be assigned automatically if the


network supports this function. If not, contact your
network administrator, to get the correct IP settings.

Obtain IP address automatically


Use the following IP Addresses:

IP Address:

Subnet mask:

Standard gateway:

Obtain DNS server address automatically


Use the following DNS server addresses:

Preferred DNS server:

Alternative DNS server:

Advanced...

OK Cancel

6 Make the settings there.


Response: The programming device is then registered for network operation
with the IP address.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 905


Configuration examples

Computer The information is used to identify the computer in the network:


Identification in
Step Action
Win 2000
1 Select Start → Settings → Control Panel → System.
Response: The System Properties window is opened.
2 Select the register Network Identification.
Dialog display
System Properties ?

General Network Identification Hardware User Profile Advanced

The following information is used to identify the computers in the


network.

Computer name: sg4002.


Domain: SG.ENG

Click on the command button "Network Identification" to join a Network


domain and to create a local user. Identification

Click on "Properties" to change Properties


for a computer or to join a domain.

OK Cancel Apply

3 Select the Network ID command button.


Response: The assistant for creating a user on the network is started.
Or select the Properties command button.
Response: The Identification Changes dialog box is opened.
4 Exit the dialog using OK.

906 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

Editing local drop

Introduction This section describes the configuration of the local I/O station (Drop). The
processing sequence begins first of all with the definition of the drop.
When editing the local I/O station (Drop) the I/O unit must be specified with its I/O
references before parametering of the individual assemblies can take place.

Note: Only particular CPUs can be used for the Ethernet bus configuration.
The following CPUs are available:
l 171 CCC 980 30
l 171 CCC 960 30
l 171 CCC 980 20
l 171 CCC 960 20

Momentum - Ethernet Bus System


1

2 3 4 5

1 Host Computer
2 Ethernet network card
3 I/O unit e.g. 170-AMM-090-00
4 CPU adapter e.g. 171-CCC-960-20-IEC
5 Hub or Switch

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 907


Configuration examples

Defining Drops To define drops proceed as follows in the PLC Configuration window:
Step Action
1 Select PLC Selection.
Response: The PLC selection dialog is opened.
2 Select the PLC family Momentum and CPU 171-CCC-960-20-IEC. Use OK
return to the PLC Configuration window.
3 Select I/O Map.
Response: The I/O Map dialog is opened and the first drop is automatically
entered in the table.
4 Select the drop from the Drop column.
Select the Edit... command button.
Response: You reach the module map.

Mapping To map the modules and specify the address ranges proceed as follows in the Local
Modules and Quantum Drop dialog:
Specifying I/O
Step Action
References
1 Select the Module → ... column.
Response: The I/O Module Selection dialog is opened.
2 From the Category column, select the <all> option.
Response: All modules are listed in the Modules column.
3 Select from the column Modules, the moduleAMM-090-00.
Exit the dialog with OK.
Response: The module is inserted in the I/O map.
4 In the In Ref and Out Ref columns, set the start references for the input and
output modules.
Note: Discrete Input References have the prefix 1 (e.g. 100001), Coil
References have the prefix 0 (e.g. 000001), Input Register References have the
prefix 3 (e.g. 300001) and Output Register References have the prefix 4 (e.g.
400001).
Response: The end reference (column In.End. or Out.End) of the available
address range is automatically entered.

908 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Configuration examples

Dialog display Following module mapping and I/O reference specification the dialog looks like this:
Local Momentum Drop

Drop Module
Modules: 1 Input bits: 80
Params
Input bits: 80 Output bits:80
Output bits: 80
Status table:

Delete Delete Cut Copy Paste

Module Detected In Ref In End Out Ref Out End Description

AMM 090 00 300001 300008 400001 400005 I/O BASE, ANALOG-4CH 4-

OK Cancel Help Poll

Set module To set parameters for the individual modules, proceed as follows in the Local
parameters Momentum Drop dialog:
Step Action
1 Select the Params command button.
Response: The 170-AMM-090-00 dialog is opened.
2 Select the signal states for the input and output channels from the list boxes and
exit the dialog using OK.
Note: Help with this can be obtained from the corresponding help text in the
parameter dialog.
Dialog display
170 AMM 090 00

Input Selection Output Selection

Channel 1: 1..5V or 4..20mA Channel 1 Output: Disable


Sperren
Channel 2: 1..5V or 4..20mA Channel 1 Fallback: +0mA To +20mA
-10 V To + 10 V

Channel 3: 1..5V or 4..20mA Channel 2 Output: Disable

Channel 4: 1..5V or 4..20mA Channel 2 Fallback: Output to Zero

Parameter Words
Word 1: AAAA Word 2: 0044

OK Cancel Help

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 909


Configuration examples

Create online connection

Introduction This chapter describes how a link is created between the programming device and
the Ethernet bus system.

Creating a link For the link between the programming device and the Ethernet bus system use the
Concept main menu Online and proceed as follows.
Step Action
1 Select menu commandConnect....
Response: The Connect to PLC dialog box opens.
2 From the list Protocol type select the link TCP/IP.
Response: The zone Protocol settings alters for the TCP/IP settings.
3 In the text box IP address or DNS hostname enter the IP address of the Ethernet
network card (PCI card).
Note: Make sure that the address in Concept matches the address in Network
settings of the operating system (See Network configuration in Win 98, p. 897).
Response: An online link exists between the programming device and the
Ethernet bus system, and all bus nodes are displayed in the list.
Dialog display
Connect to PLC

Protocol type:
Protocol settings: TCP/IP
Modbus
Modbus Plus IP address or DNS Hostname: Bridge MB+ Index
TCP/IP 127.0.0.1
IEC Simulator (32-Bit)

Access List of nodes in Modbus Plus network:


Display only
Change data

Change program

Change Configuration
Host adapter:

OK Cancel Update < Back Forward > Help

4 Exit the dialog using OK.

910 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Convert Projects/DFBs/Macros

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 911


Convert Projects/DFBs/Macros

Converting projects/DFBs

At a Glance The four main steps for converting projects/DFBs are as follows:
Step Action
1 Exporting projects/DFBs/macros within the earlier version of Concept, see
Exporting project/DFB/macro (earlier version of Concept), p. 913.
2 For information on installing the new version of Concept, see Installing new
versions of Concepts, p. 914.
3 For information on importing projects/DFBs/macros, see Importing project/DFB/
macro, p. 914.
4 For information on editing projects/DFBs/macros, see Editing the project/DFB/
macro, p. 914.

Converting EFBs
CAUTION
Risk of losing data
If user-defined EFBs are being used in the project (EFBs which have
been created manually), the current version of the EFB toolkit must be
used to convert them (File → Concept library…). The Concept
converter is not able to convert user-defined EFBs.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment
damage.

912 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Convert Projects/DFBs/Macros

Exporting The procedure for exporting projects/DFBs/macros is as follows:


project/DFB/
macro (earlier
CAUTION
version of
Concept) Risk of losing data
The following steps must be performed in the EARLIER version of
Concept. The new version of Concept may only be installed once all
existing projects have been exported.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment
damage.

Step Action
1 Start the Concept converter.
2 From File → Export... open the menu to select the export range.
3 Select the required export range:
l Project with used DFBs: All project information including the DFBs and data
structures used within the project (derived data types) will be exported.
l Project with all DFBs + macros: All project information including all the
DFBs and data structures (derived data types) will be exported.
l Project without DFBs: All project information including all data structures
(derived data types), but excluding DFBs and macros will be exported.
l Single DFB with used DFBs/single macro: Only the selected DFB/macro
will be exported.
Reaction: The select export data dialog box will be opened.
4 Different file extensions must be selected depending on the element to be
exported:
l Exporting projects: From the Format list select the extension .prj.
l Exporting DFBs: From the Format list select the extension .dfb.
l Exporting macros: From the Format list select the extension .mac.
5 Select the project / DFB / macro and confirm with OK.
Reaction: The project/DFBs/macros/data structures (derived data types) will be
contained in the current directory as an ASCII data file (.asc).
6 Quit the Concept converter with File → Quit.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 913


Convert Projects/DFBs/Macros

Installing new
versions of
CAUTION
Concepts
Risk of losing data
Only install the NEW version of Concept if you have performed the
previous steps.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment
damage.

Follow the procedure described in the "Installation" chapter of the installation


instructions.

Importing The procedure for importing projects/DFBs/macros is as follows:


project/DFB/
Step Action
macro
1 Start the Concept converter.
2 From File → Import... open the select import projects/DFBs/macros dialog box.
3 Select the project/DFB/macro (data file format .asc) and confirm with OK.
Reaction: The project/DFBs/macros/data structures will be contained in the
current directory as Concept data files.
4 Quit the Concept converter with File → Quit.

Editing the Start the Concept/Concept DFB and edit the project/DFBs/macros/data structures
project/DFB/ in the usual way.
macro

914 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Concept ModConnect

G
At a Glance

Introduction This chapter describes how to integrate third party modules into the Concept I/O
map and how to remove it.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following sections:


Chapter?
Section Topic Page
G.1 Introduction 917
G.2 Integration of Third Party Modules 918
G.3 Use of third party module in Concept 921

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 915


Concept ModConnect

916 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Concept ModConnect

G.1 Introduction

Introduction

Overview Information on hardware and I/O modules is stored in the Concept System
Information Database (SysInfDb). This database is maintained and updated by
Schneider and included with every Concept release.Nevertheless, Concept is able
to support new I/O modules without having to wait for a new release. That’s where
the ModConnect Tool comes in - it takes a textual module description (MDC) and
adds this information into the SysInfDb. This means that supplier of a new I/O
module, who wants this module to be available in Concept, must also deliver an
MDC file which describes the characteristics of this module.

Once installed, the I/O modules have the same functionality as existing Schneider
Automation modules. This includes the ability to set module parameters and to
display an online help.

For the installation of new modules, the third party module manufacturer has to
supply a disk which contains a specific MDC file and the help information.

Note: The MDC file is dependent on the version of Concept so if you upgrade your
Concept version, make sure you get also an upgraded version of your previously
used MDC files. You will have to reinstall them.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 917


Concept ModConnect

G.2 Integration of Third Party Modules

At a Glance

Introduction This chapter describes the procedures which have to be used in Concept
ModConnect in order to integrate third party modules into Concept or to remove it.

What’s in this This section contains the following topics:


Section?
Topic Page
Integrating new Modules 919
Removing Modules 920

918 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Concept ModConnect

Integrating new Modules

Precondition The specific MDC file for the new module has to be available.

Integrating new For integrating new modules, proceed the following steps:
Modules
Step Action
1 For starting the application select ModConnect Tool in the Concept programm
group.
Reaction: Concept ModConnect displays its main window. If any Modules have
been installed, a lis of installed modules is shown.
2 Copy the MDC file and the help file supplied with module to the Concept
installation path.
3 Select File → Open Installation File...
Reaction: A dialog for selection the specific MDC file is opened.
4 Set the correct path to the MDC file and select it (e.g. SAMPLE.MDC). Confirm
with OK.
Reaction: The path including the name of the MDC file is now displayed in the
Select Module dialog along with the defined modules.
5 Select the module you want to add and click Add Module or in the case of
multiple entries click on the Add All button. You may additionally click the
Browse button to return to the Open file dialog where you can select another
.MDC for evaluation.
6 Click on the Close button to return to the main window.
Reaction: The main window will now be displayed with the module information
appearing in the Imported Modules in Concept Database window. By clicking
on the added module (to select it) the module details are shown. With Help →
Help on Module the help of the selected module can be displayed.
7 Select File → Save Changes to save the changes data base.
8 Select File → Exit for terminating Concept ModConnect.
Reaction: The installed modules are now avaiable in the Concept I/O map (See
Use of third party module in Concept, p. 921).

Upgrate of
Concept
Note: The MDC-File is dependent on the version of Concept so if you upgrade your
Concept version, make sure you get also an upgraded version of your previously
used MDC files. You will have to reinstall them.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 919


Concept ModConnect

Removing Modules

Removing For removing modules, proceed the following steps:


Modules
Step Action
1 For starting the application select ModConnect Tool in the Concept programm
group.
Reaction: Concept ModConnect displays its main window with a lis of the
installed modules.
2 Select the module you want to remove and select File → Remove selected
Module.
Reaction: The Confirm IOModule Removal dialog is displayed.
3 Selecting OK, causes the removal of the module from Concept.
Reaction: The module is no longer listed in the main window of Concept
ModConnect or in the I/O Module Selection list box of Concept.
Note: When removing modules. If the module has been used in existing Concept
projects, the integrity of these projects will be compromised.
4 Select File → Save Changes to save the changes data base.
5 Select File → Exit for terminating Concept ModConnect.
Reaction: The installed modules are now avaiable in the Concept I/O map (See
Use of third party module in Concept, p. 921).

920 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Concept ModConnect

G.3 Use of third party module in Concept

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 921


Concept ModConnect

Use of Third Party Modules in Concept

Precondition The modules have to be installed according to the procedure Integrating new
Modules, p. 919.

Insert module to To insert a module to the I/O map, proceed the following steps:
I/O Map
Step Action
1 Start Concept.
2 Open the configurator with Project → Configurator.
3 Open the I/O map with I/O map... → Edit....
4 Open the I/O Module Selection dialog by clicking on ... at the Module column.
Reaction: The third party modules appear in the Other column.
5 Select the module by clicking.
Reaction: A short description appear at the top of the dialog. You may press the
Help on Module button to display the module’s help file supplied by the vendor.
6 Click on OK (or doubleclick on the module) to insert the module the the I/O map.
Reaction: The I/O Module Selection dialog is cloes and the selected module is
inserted in the I/O map.
7 For entering the module’s parameters (if available), select the Rack-Slot column
of the module and click on the Params button.
Reaction: The parameter screen for the selected dialog is opened.
8 Set the parameters for the module and confirm with OK.
9 Enter the input and output references for the module.
10 Confirm the I/O map with OK and save the project with File → Save project.

922 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Convertion of Modsoft Programs

H
At a Glance

Introduction This information provides you with the necessary process required to change
previously generated Modsoft derived Ladder Logic programs into the Concept
environment.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:


Chapter?
Topic Page
Introduction 924
How to Convert a Modsoft Program 926
Exceptions 927

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 923


Convertion of Modsoft Programs

Introduction

Overview For the convertion of an existing Modsoft program to a valid Concept 984 Ladder
Logic project the Mosdsoft Converter is used. The Modsoft Converter provides
current Modsoft users with a migration path to the 984 Ladder Logic for Windows
environment. The Modsoft Converter requires no previous knowledge of the
Concept programming environment. The term project is synonymous with a Modsoft
program.

Starting the Windows 98, Windows 2000 or Windows NT allows you to run the program from the
Modsoft Start menu, by selecting Modsoft Converter in the Concept programm group.
Converter

The Modsoft For the convertion the Modsoft .ENV file is needed. The .ENV file contains all the file
.ENV File information pertaining to the Modsoft program.

The Modsoft .ENV file contains the following files:


l .CFG Configuration file
l .PRG Ladder Logic file
l .PCM Network comments
l .PCT Network comments
l .ASC ASCII file
l .USL User Loadables
l .RFD Reference presets set by the user in the Modsoft Reference Data Editor
l .REF Reference contents contained in the PLC, from an upload
l .RSF Reference symbols
The convert process requires the .CFG file to be present in the .ENV file. If it does
not exist, an error dialog is displayed indicating that the .ENV file does not reference
a .CFG file. All other files are optional.

By forcing you to enter the Modsoft *.ENV filename, some of the validation is
avoided that would otherwise be required if you were allowed to enter a *.PRG and
*.CFG name separately, i.e. Loadables (DX, User and EXE), state ram and builtin
functions.

Incompatibilities Due to differences in "address calculations in the configuration table" between


Modsoft 2.6 and Concept 2.2 or later, the same Modsoft program loaded in a PLC
and converted using the Modsoft Converter will cause a configuration miscompare
in certain page zero locations. This will not affect the validity of the converted
program.

924 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Convertion of Modsoft Programs

Invalid PLC If the Modsoft configuration file PLC type, is not legal for Concept, you are warned
Types that the convert process will not continue. You then have to return to Modsoft and
change the PLC type to one that is valid.

Handling of SY/ SY/MAX programs converted to Modsoft file format will migrate to the Quantum PLC
MAX type. The Modsoft Convert utility can then bring the SY/MAX program into Concept.

Modsoft Version The Convert utility handles Modsoft file format supported in revision 2.2 or greater.

Handling of SFC Modsoft does allow the user to save a Ladder Logic program that consists of
and Macros undefined elements, and Concept needs to resolve those elements. The Modsoft
Ladder Logic program is converted without performing any validity checks against
the Configuration. When the Modsoft *.prg file contains either SFC or Macros the
convert process is aborted and an Error dialog is displayed informing you to return
to Modsoft and use Segment Status → Commands → Convert to File. This
process expands the Macros and translates the SFC elements.

Handling of I/O Modsoft sets a default I/O map size of 512. Concept does not, but calculates the size
Map as required. Uploading a Controller that has been downloaded with Modsoft will
cause a miscompare. You are allowed to continue.

Handling of Modsoft can have two types of reference data or none at all. There exists online
References reference data information (RAM) if you have uploaded from the PLC. There are
also references defined using the offline Reference Data Editor. When both types of
data exist in the .env file, the convert utility first imports the online references then
overlays the offline reference data.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 925


Convertion of Modsoft Programs

How to Convert a Modsoft Program

Precondition For converting a Modsoft program the Modsoft .ENV file (See The Modsoft .ENV
File, p. 924) is necessary. The .ENV file contains all the file information pertaining to
the Modsoft program. Once selected the conversion takes place and you are
prompted to a Save as dialog.

How to Convert a For converting a Modsoft programm, proceed the following steps:
Mosdsoft
Step Action
Programm
1 Open the Modsoft Converter.
2 Select File → Convert....
3 Select the drive and the directory, where to find the Modsoft .ENV file. (The file
will be found in the Modsoft program directory, e.g. C:\Modsoft\Programs.)
4 Pick the file from the list.
5 Start the convertion with Convert.
Reaction:
The convertion is started.
l A convert progress dialog is displayed after the validity checks on the *.ENV
file are performed. The first line of the dialog indicates the section currently
being converted and the second line indicates progress as it pertains to the
whole convert process.
l f any errors, such as Out of memory, Out of disk space or File access
errors, occur during the convert process, an error dialog is displayed.
l An operation completed error free results in the automatic display of the Save
as Concept project dialog. The default name of the project, displayed in the
Save project dialog, is the *.ENV filename prompt.
6 You can then change the project name and the directory in which Concept
project will be saved.
Reaction: If the project name selected already exists a confirmation dialog is
displayed.
Note: Saving the Modsoft converted program as a Concept project does not
have to be done at this time, you can still save using the File → Save project as
menu item.

926 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Convertion of Modsoft Programs

Exceptions

Description 0x and 1x references in a Modsoft program are converted to a Located Variable with
data type BOOL in Concept. This data type is compatible with the use of these
references.

However, 3x and 4x are converted to integer.

Note: This straight conversion precludes both Modsoft bit defination and floating
point types.

Example If you have the following defined in Modsoft:


REF BIT SYMBOL DESCRIPTOR
000001 located_0x_boolean located 0x boolean descriptor
100001 located_1x_boolean located 1x boolean descriptor
300001 /16 bit_16_of_3000001 16th bit of 300001 descriptor
400100 incoming_integer incoming integer descriptor
400200 outgoing_interger outgoing flt32 descriptor
400300 /1 bit_1_of_400300 bit 1 of 400300 descriptor

A conversion of the above to Concept using the Convert program yields:


Variable Name Data Type Address Comment
located_0x_boolean BOOL 000001 located 0x boolean descriptor
located_1x_boolean BOOL 100001 located 1x boolean descriptor
bit_16_of_3000001 INT 300001 16th bit of 300001 descriptor
incoming_integer INT 400100 incoming integer descriptor
outgoing_interger INT 400200 outgoing flt32 descriptor
bit_1_of_400300 INT 400300 bit 1 of 400300 descriptor

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 927


Convertion of Modsoft Programs

928 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Modsoft and 984 References

I
At a Glance

Introduction This chapter contains the Modsoft and 984 References.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:


Chapter?
Topic Page
Modsoft Keys with Concept Equivalents 930
Modsoft Function Compatibility 932

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 929


Modsoft and 984 References

Modsoft Keys with Concept Equivalents

Keys
Note: When possible, the Ctrl key is used in place of the Modsoft Alt key.

Table of keys:
Funtion Modsoft 2.x Key Concept Key
Normally open contact ’ or " same
Coil ( or [ same
Normally closed contacts / or \ same
Horizontal short = same
Vertical short | same
Negative transitional contact Alt+N N
Positive transitional contact Alt+P P
Inserting a function block by name Alt+F Ctrl+F
Copy element(s) Alt+F3 Ctrl+C
Delete element(s) Alt+F4 or Del Ctrl+X or Del
Paste Alt+F5 Ctrl+V
Offset references Alt+F6 Ctrl+H
Search Alt+F7 F3
Search next Alt+F8 F6
When online in direct mode,
Concept uses a nonmodal
dialog with accelerators for
search previous and search
next.
Network comments Alt+C Ctrl+M
Goto network Alt+G Ctrl+G
Insert network Alt+I Ctrl+I
Append network Alt+A Ctrl+A
Trace Alt+T Ctrl+T
Retrace Alt+B Ctrl+B or Ctrl+T
Dx zoom Alt+Z Ctrl+D
Goto node (1,1) of active network Home same
Goto node (7,11) of active network End same
Goto first network in current segment Ctrl+Home same

930 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Modsoft and 984 References

Funtion Modsoft 2.x Key Concept Key


Goto last network in current segment Ctrl+End same
Insert equation Ins Ctrl+Q
Append - Ctrl+A
Append equation - Ctrl+U
Delete current network - Ctrl+K
Copy to the clipboard - Ctrl+C
Undo - Ctrl+Z
Closing an mdi child window - Ctrl+F4
Switching to the next open mdi child - Ctrl+F6
window

Status Line These Concept keys change the status line display value of the currently selected
Values reference:
A ASCII
H Hexidecimal
D Decimal (signed)
U Decimal (unsigned)
R Real
L Long (32 bit)
S Short (16 bit)

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 931


Modsoft and 984 References

Modsoft Function Compatibility

Not Supported The following Modsoft functions are not supported in Concept:
Features l Macros/macro programming
l SFC (use IEC SFC instead)
l Search of comments

User Interface Concept is an MS-Windows based application. Modsoft is a DOS based application.
Difference Concept uses MS-Windows user interface standards and practices. Functions of
Concept with 984 Ladder editor are based on the pre-existing functions of Concept.

There are no exact similarities of specific user actions required to perform Concept
tasks as compared to Modsoft tasks.

Constant Sweep Concept has no off line selection to set the constant sweep mode. This mode is
available from the Online Control Panel.

Once constant sweep has been set in the controller, you can upload the controller
and save the project. The constant sweep settings will be retained in the project. If
this project is downloaded, the constant sweep settings will be set.

Note: Any changes to the controller configuration cause the constant sweep
settings to be reset, i.e, constant sweep is disabled whenever the controller
configuration changes. Follow the steps above to reenable constant sweep.

How to Start the To set constant sweep before starting the controller, follow these steps:
Constant Sweep
Step Action
1 Create your configuration and program logic, offline.
2 Download your program to the controller. When the dialog appears asking Do
you want to start the controller?"click on the No button.
3 From the Online menu, choose Online Control Panel.
4 Set the constant sweep mode and sweep time.
5 Start the controller.

932 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Presettings when using
Modbus Plus for startup
J
Introduction

Overview This chapter provides a brief description of the presettings when using Modbus Plus
for first startup.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:


Chapter?
Topic Page
Installing the SA85/PCI85 with Windows 98/2000/XP 934
Installing the SA85/PC185 in Windows NT 937
Installing the Modbus Plus Driver in Windows 98/2000/NT 939
Virtual MBX Driver for 16 bit application capability with Windows 98/2000/NT 940
MBX Driver for connection between ModConnect Host interface adapters and 941
32 bit applications with Windows 98/2000/NT
Remote MBX - Driver for Remote Operation 942
Ethernet MBX - Driver for Modbus Plus Function via TCP/IP 943
Establishing the hardware connection. 945

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 933


Presettings for Modbus Plus

Installing the SA85/PCI85 with Windows 98/2000/XP

Introduction A Modbus Plus connection can be made using the SA85 or PCI85 adapters.
The difference between the adapters is in the bus used:
l SA85 for ISA Bus
l PCI85 for PCI Bus
While the Modbus Node Address and Memory Based Address for the SA85 is set
directly on the card with the DIP switches, the address for the PCI85 is made during
the configuration in Windows.

SA85 Hardware Carry out the following steps to configure the Hardware settings for the SA85:
settings
Step Action
1 Enter the Modbus node location (Modbus Plus Port Location) and the memory
based address in SA85 (see documentation "IBM Host Based Devices").
2 Install the SA85 as described in the "IBM Host Based Devices" documentation.

PCI85 Install the PCI85 (416 NHM 300 30 or 416 NHM 300 32) as described in the
Installation "Modbus Plus PCI-85 Interface Adapter" 890 USE 162 00 documentation.

Driver Install the Virtual MBX driver and then the MBX or Remote MBX driver.
installation See also:
l Virtual MBX Driver for 16 bit application capability with Windows 98/2000/NT,
p. 940
l MBX Driver for connection between ModConnect Host interface adapters and 32
bit applications with Windows 98/2000/NT, p. 941
l Remote MBX - Driver for Remote Operation, p. 942

934 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Presettings for Modbus Plus

Configuration Carry out the following steps to configure the adapter after installing the driver:
Step Action
1 Open the Control Panel (Start → Settings → Control Panel).
2 Windows XP: Select the Printer and other Hardware icon.
3 Windows XP: Select the System icon.
4 Select the Hardware icon.
Result: The hardware wizard is called.
5 Select the Next command button.
6 Windows 98: Select the option Yes (Recommended).
Windows 2000/XP: Select the option Add/Troubleshoot a device.
Select the Next command button.
Result: Hardware detection is started.
7 Only for Windows 98: Select the Next command button.
Result: The hardware detection status is displayed.
8 Only for Windows 98: Select the Next command button.
Result: All hardware types are displayed in a list.
9 Select the hardware type MBX Devices for Modicon Networks, and press the
Next command button.
Result: The database with driver information is created.
10 Select the SA85-000 adapter or PCI85-000 and press the Next command
button.
Result: A memory range is automatically defined.
11 Select the Next command button.
Result: The automatically assigned device number and request mode (20 ms)
is displayed.
12 Select the Next command button.
Result: The software for the new hardware components is installed.
13 Select the Next command button.
Result: You are asked to shutdown the computer.
14 Press the No command button.
Result: The adapter is configured with the default settings.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 935


Presettings for Modbus Plus

Win 98: Edit Carry out the following steps to edit the configuration using Windows 98 after the first
configuration configuration:
Step Action
1 Open the Control Panel (Start → Settings → Control Panel).
2 Select the System icon.
Result: The System Properties window is opened.
3 Select the Device Manager tab.
4 Select the SA85-000 adapter or PCI85-000 and press the Properties command
button.
Result: The SA85-000/PCI85-000 Adapter Properties window is opened.
5 Select the Device Settings tab.
6 Make the changes as required. (See also the Help file LMBX9X on the driver
CD.)
7 Select the Resources tab to change the memory area.
8 Use the OK command button to exit the window.
Result: The changes are accepted by the system.

Win 2000/XP: Carry out the following steps to edit the configuration using Windows 2000/XP after
Edit the first configuration:
configuration
Step Action
1 Open the Control Panel (Start → Settings → Control Panel).
2 Windows XP: Select the Printer and other Hardware icon.
3 Select the System icon.
Result: The System Properties window is opened.
4 Select the Hardware tab.
5 Select the Device Manager... command button.
Result: The Device Manager window is opened.
6 Select the Network adapter → SA85-000 or PCI85-000.
7 Select the Properties command button.
Result: The SA85-000PCI85-000 Adapter Properties window is opened.
8 Select the Device Settings tab.
9 Make the changes as required. (See also the Help file LMBX9X on the driver
CD.)
10 Select the Resources tab to change the memory area.
11 Use the OK command button to exit the window.
Result: The changes are accepted by the system.

936 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Presettings for Modbus Plus

Peer Cop Several parameter settings must be made to enable Peer Cop communication via
functions the adapter. The Peer Cop function is disabled by default, and should only be
enabled if your applications require Peer Cop communication.
To enable and set parameters for Peer Cop communication, start with the first steps
as with "Edit Configuration". In the SA85-000/PCI85-000 Adapter Properties
window, select the Peer Cop tab and make your settings as desired.

Installing the SA85/PCI85 in Windows NT

Introduction A Modbus Plus connection can be made using the SA85 or PCI85 adapters.
The difference between the adapters is in the bus used:
l SA85 for ISA Bus
l PCI85 for PCI Bus
While the Modbus Node Address and Memory Based Address for the SA85 is set
directly on the card with the DIP switches, the address for the PCI85 is made during
the configuration in Windows.

SA85 Hardware Carry out the following steps to set the SA85 hardware settings:
Settings
Step Action
1 Set the Modbus node address (Modbus Plus Port Address) and the memory
based address on the SA85 (see documentation "IBM Host Based Devices").
2 Install the SA85 as described in the "IBM Host Based Devices" documentation.

PCI85 Install the PCI85 (416 NHM 300 30 or 416 NHM 300 32) as described in the
Installation "Modbus Plus PCI-85 Interface Adapter" 890 USE 162 00 documentation.

Installing drivers Install the Virtual MBX driver and then the MBX or Remote MBX driver.
Also see:
l Virtual MBX Driver for 16 bit application capability with Windows 98/2000/NT,
p. 940
l MBX Driver for connection between ModConnect Host interface adapters and 32
bit applications with Windows 98/2000/NT, p. 941
l Remote MBX - Driver for Remote Operation, p. 942

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 937


Presettings for Modbus Plus

Configuration Carry out the following steps to configure the adapter after installing the driver:
Step Action
1 In the start menu, open the folder WinConX/MBXDriver (Start → Program →
WinConX).
2 Double-click on the MBX Driver Configuration icon.
Result: The dialog box MBX Driver configuration is opened.
3 In the Device Configuration register, click on the command button New.
Result: A list box will appear in the Device type column.
4 Select the option SA85 or PCI85 from the list.
Result: The dialog box SA85 configuration is opened.
5 Make the following settings. (also see Help file LMBX9X on the driver CD.)
Note: With the PCI85 you enter the Modbus Node address in the Node list box.
6 Exit the dialog box by clicking Close.
Result: The settings are accepted by the system.

Edit Carry out the following steps to edit the configuration after the first configuration:
configuration
Step Action
1 In the start menu, open the folder WinConX/MBXDriver (Start → Program →
WinConX).
2 Double-click on the MBX Driver configuration icon.
Result: The dialog box MBX Driver configuration is opened.
3 Select SA85 from the Device configuration register.
4 Click on the command button Edit.
Result: The SA85 configuration dialog box is opened.
5 Make the following changes. (also see Help file LMBX9X on the driver CD.)
6 Exit the dialog box by clicking Close.
Result: The settings are accepted by the system.

Peer Cop Several parameter settings must be made to enable Peer Cop communication via
functionality the adapter. The Peer Cop function is deactivated as standard, and should only be
enabled if your application requires Peer Cop communication.
To enable and set parameters for Peer Cop communication, start with the first steps
as with "Edit SA85 Configuration". In the dialog box SA85 configuration, select the
Peer Cop register and make your settings.

938 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Presettings for Modbus Plus

Installing the Modbus Plus Driver in Windows 98/2000/NT

Introduction In order to use the Modbus Plus communication, you must first install the
CyberLogic MBX driver for Windows 98/2000/NT version >=4.20 (+ Service Release
1 for Windows 2000)
The following drivers are available on the CD "MBX Driver Suite v4.20":
Driver Operating system
MBX Driver MBX Driver for connection between ModConnect Windows 98/2000/NT
Host interface adapters and 32 bit applications with Windows 98/
2000/NT, p. 941
Virtual MBX Driver Virtual MBX Driver for 16 bit application Windows 98/2000/NT
capability with Windows 98/2000/NT, p. 940
Remote MBX Driver Remote MBX - Driver for Remote Operation, Windows 98/2000/NT
p. 942
Ethernet MBX Driver Ethernet MBX - Driver for Modbus Plus Windows NT
Function via TCP/IP, p. 943

Installation Carry out the following steps to install the Modbus Plus driver:
Step Action
1 Start Windows.
2 Insert the CD "MBX Driver Suite ver. 4.20".
3 Select the Start → Execute command.
4 Enter the CD drive and :\SETUP in the command line.
5 Confirm with OK.
6 Follow the onscreen instructions.
Response: After installation the WinConX program with all installed drivers is
created in the Start Menu.

Configuration Configuration occurs automatically after installing the driver. To make changes to
the configuration, open the dialog to be edited from the WinConX → xxx MBX
Driver Start Menu, by double clicking on the xxx MBX Configuration Editor
symbol.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 939


Presettings for Modbus Plus

Virtual MBX Driver for 16 bit application capability with Windows 98/2000/NT

Introduction Installing the Virtual MBX driver guarantees the run capability of all 16 bit DOS or
Windows 3.x NETLIB/NetBIOS compatible applications in their original binary form
in Windows 98/2000/NT.

Note: A detailed description of this driver can be found in the VMBX9X or VMBXNT
Help file on the "MBX Driver Suite ver4.20" CD.

Preconditions In order for the Virtual MBX driver to function correctly, additional drivers must be
installed.
The following additional drivers can be installed to enhance the Virtual MBX driver’s
run capability:
Driver Operating Application
system
MBX Windows 98/ Driver for Modbus Plus Host interface adapter
2000/NT
Remote MBX Windows 98/ Driver for accessing remote nodes on the Modbus
2000/NT Plus and Ethernet network
Ethernet MBX Windows NT Driver for Modbus Plus Emulation via TCP/IP

Installation The virtual MBX driver software for Windows 98/2000 and Windows NT is included
along with other drivers, on the CD "MBX Driver Suite ver4.20".
Installation is done by Autorun when the CD is inserted or can be started manually
(CD drive:\SETUP.EXE). Select the driver to be installed from the main menu. You
will then be taken through the installation step by step. The driver is then configured.

Configuration
Note: To guarantee a connection to Concept (= 16-Bit-Application), in the Virtual
MBX Driver Configuration → 16-bit Windows Applications dialog, check the
Support 16-bit Windows Applications checkbox.

940 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Presettings for Modbus Plus

MBX Driver for connection between ModConnect Host interface adapters and
32 bit applications with Windows 98/2000/NT

Introduction The installation of the MBX driver guarantees the connection between the
MODConnect Host interface adapter and 32 bit applications with Windows 98/2000/
NT. This driver also supports the program interfaces MBXAPI and NETLIB. This
means that practically all Modbus Plus compatible software programs can be
operated via Modbus, Modbus Plus and Ethernet networks, without having to make
changes. This also includes 32 bit Windows 98/2000/NT applications and 16 bit old
DOS/Windows applications.

Note: A detailed description of the driver is included on the CD "MBX Driver Suite
ver4.20" in the Help file LMBX9X or LMBXNT.

Hardware The MBX driver operates either in Interrupt or Polled mode.


support It supports the following ModConnect Host interface adapter:
l ISA
l EISA
l MCA
l PC card (PCMCIA)

Remote The MBX driver includes the MBX Remote Server. This enables remote nodes to
connection access local MBX devices (including the Host interface adapter) via any Windows
98/2000/NT compatible network. Also see Remote MBX - Driver for Remote
Operation, p. 942.

Installation The MBX driver software for Windows 98/2000/NT is included along with other
drivers, on the CD "MBX Driver Suite ver4.20".
The installation is carried out by Autorun when the CD is inserted or can be manually
started(CD drive:\SETUP.EXE). Select the driver to be installed from the main
menu. You will then be taken through the installation step by step. The driver is then
configured.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 941


Presettings for Modbus Plus

Remote MBX - Driver for Remote Operation

Introduction The installation of the remote MBX driver allows remote connection of applications
operated on remote station client nodes. Remote station access of the Modbus Plus
network takes place using a standard LAN (Local Area Network).
This driver also unites applications that support the program interfaces MBXAPI and
NETLIB.

Note: A detailed description of the driver is included on the CD "MBX Driver Suite
ver4.20" in the Help file RMBX9X or RMBXNT.

Preconditions This connection is only made if your programming device is a node on the MBX
Remote Server. Also install one of these drivers because the MBX and Ethernet
MBX drivers include the MBX Remote Server.

Installation The remote MBX driver software for Windows 98/2000/NT is included along with
other drivers, on the CD "MBX Driver Suite ver4.20".
The installation is carried out by Autorun when the CD is inserted or can be manually
started(CD drive:\SETUP.EXE). Select the driver to be installed from the main
menu. You will then be taken through the installation step by step. The driver is then
configured.

Configuration The configuration of the remote MBX driver is presently the same as the
configuration of the other MBX drivers. The remote MBX driver is operated as a
remote client node, which does not require a physical host interface adapter.
Therefore the driver configuration also includes the creation of logical devices (MBX
Remote Client), which refer to the physical devices found on the server node.

942 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Presettings for Modbus Plus

Ethernet MBX - Driver for Modbus Plus Function via TCP/IP

Introduction The installation can only be carried out in Windows NT.


When the Ethernet MBX driver is installed, Modbus Plus function is emulated via
TCP/IP. This driver also supports the program interfaces MBXAPI and NETLIB. This
means that practically all Modbus Plus compatible software programs immediately
have access to TCP/IP based communication without having to make changes. This
also includes 32 bit Windows 98/2000/NT applications and 16 bit old DOS/Windows
applications.

Note: A detailed description of the driver is included on the CD "MBX Driver Suite
ver4.20" in the Help file EMBXNT.

Winsock API When using Winsock API, the Ethernet MBX driver can solve certain critical
problems created by the Winsock interface.
For example: TCP Port 502 can only receive one process with incoming messages.
If several applications attempt to receive unexpected messages, a conflict occurs.
The Ethernet MBX driver eliminated this problem by acting as global dispatcher for
these messages. When using the slave path, Concept in Modbus Plus determines
that several (up to 256) applications refer to these unexpected messages and
execute them simultaneously.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 943


Presettings for Modbus Plus

Advantage of The most important advantages when using the driver via the Winsock API are:
using the driver l Changes are no longer needed for existing NETLIP/NetBIOS/MBXAPI
compatible applications. End user and developer software investments are
completely secured.
l Consistent management and dispatching of unexpected messages, which
prevents overlaps between various products on the same system.
l Complete functionality of TCP/IP communication, while protecting existing
NETLIP/NetBIOS/MBXAPI standards.
For example: Ethernet TCP/IP communication requires a identifier address in
the form of an IP address, and a message contains an identifier index byte. The
Ethernet MBX driver protects this functionality.
l Working with TCP/IP communication is an advantage for software developers not
experienced with the complicated Winsock API.
l A single program model for software developers handles communication in
Modbus, Modbus Plus and Ethernet TCP/IP networks.
l Increased compatibility with various products. Winsock API is more oriented
towards developer executed, TCP/IP strategies in a slightly different manner and
can create compatibility problems in various products.
l Compatible with all MBX products. How e.g. the Virtual MBX driver for use of old
16-bit DOS/Windows applications and the MBX driver which dispatches
messages between Ethernet, Modbus, Modbus Plus and remote MBX nodes.

Remote The Ethernet MBX driver includes the MBX Remote Server. This enables remote
connection nodes to access local MBX devices (including Ethernet MBX devices) via any
Windows compatible network. The remote client can be a Windows 98/2000/NT
node with the remote MBX driver installed. Also see Remote MBX - Driver for
Remote Operation, p. 942.

Installation The Ethernet MBX driver software for Windows NT is included along with other
drivers, on the CD "MBX Driver Suite ver4.20".
The installation is carried out by Autorun when the CD is inserted or can be manually
started(CD drive:\SETUP.EXE). Select the driver to be installed from the main
menu. You will then be taken through the installation step by step. The driver is then
configured.

944 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Presettings for Modbus Plus

Establishing the hardware connection

Introduction
Note: Please refer to the "Modbus Protocol Reference Guide" for a detailed
description of the hardware setup.

Procedure To establish the hardware connection, do the following:


Step Action
1 Set a unique Modbus node address for the CPU using the rotary switch on the
back of the module.
2 Note the Modbus node address set on the CPU’s sliding cover.
3 Connect the CPU to the SA85 interface with a Modbus Plus cable.
Result: The flash interval on the CPU "Modbus +" display changes from 3
flashes per second with a pause to 6 without a pause.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 945


Presettings for Modbus Plus

946 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Presettings when using Modbus
for startup
K
Introduction

Overview The chapter provides a brief description of the presettings when using Modbus for
startup.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:


Chapter?
Topic Page
Interface Settings in Windows 98/2000/XP 948
Interface Settings in Windows NT 950
Setting up the hardware connection 950
Transfer problems 951

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 947


Presetting for Modbus Plus

Interface Settings in Windows 98/2000/XP

Win 98: Interface Carry out the following steps to configure the interface in Windows 95/98/2000:
settings
Step Action
1 Select the My Computer icon.
Result: All available objects are displayed.
2 Select the Control Panel icon.
Result: All available objects are displayed.
3 Select the System icon.
Result: The System Properties dialog box is opened.
4 Select the Device Manager tab.
5 Select Ports (COM and LPT).
Result: The branchesCommunications Port (COMx) and Printer Port (LPTx)
are displayed.
6 Select Communications Port (COMx).
Result: The Communications Port (COMx) Properties dialog box is opened.
7 Select the Port Settings tab.
8 Select the Advanced... command button.
Result:The Advanced Settings dialog box is opened.
9 Check the Use FIFO buffers check box.
Note: Using the FIFO(First In First Out) buffer requires a serial port with 16550
compatible UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter).
10 Use the slider to modify the receive and send buffer by setting both buffers to the
maximum size.
11 Close all dialog boxes using the OK command button.

948 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Presetting for Modbus Plus

Win 2000/XP: Carry out the following steps to configure the interface in Windows 2000/XP:
Interface
Step Action
settings
1 Select the My Computer icon.
Result: All available objects are displayed.
2 Select the Control Panel icon.
Result: All available objects are displayed.
3 Only with Win XP: Select the Printer and other Hardware icon.
4 Select the System icon.
Result:The System Properties dialog box is opened.
5 Select the Hardware tab.
6 Select the Device Manager... command button.
Result: The Device Manager window is opened.
7 Select Ports (COM and LPT).
Result: The branchesECP Printer Port (LPT1) and Communications Port
(COMx) are displayed.
8 Select Communications Port (COMx).
Result: The Communications Port (COMx) Properties dialog box is opened.
9 Select the Port Settings tab.
10 Select the Advanced... command button.
Result: The Advanced settings for COMx dialog box is opened.
11 Check the Use FIFO buffers check box.
Note: Using the FIFO(First In First Out) buffer requires a serial port with 16550
compatible UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter).
12 Use the slider to modify the receive and send buffer by setting both buffers to the
maximum size.
13 Close all dialog boxes using the OK command button.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 949


Presetting for Modbus Plus

Interface Settings in Windows NT

Interface setting Carry out the following steps to set the interface in Windows NT:
Step Action
1 Double-click on the My Computer icon.
Response: All available objects are displayed.
2 Double-click on the Control Panel icon.
Response: All available objects are displayed.
3 Double-click on the Connections icon.
Response: The Connections dialog box is opened.
4 Select the connection to be set in the list box and click on the command button
Settings....
Response: The COMx Settings dialog box is opened.
5 Click on the command button Extended....
Response: The Advanced Settings for COMx dialog box is opened.
6 Activate the check box FIFO activated.
Note: Using the FIFO(First In First Out) buffer requires a serial port with 16550
compatible UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter).
7 Close all dialogs with OK.

Setting up the hardware connection

Introduction
Note: Please refer to the "Modbus Protocol Reference Guide" for a detailed
description of the hardware setup.

Procedure To establish the hardware connection, do the following:


Step Action
1 Set a unique Modbus node address for the CPU using the rotary switch on the
back of the module.
2 Note the Modbus node address set on the CPU’s sliding cover.
3 Connect the Modbus interface CPU to the PC serial COM interface with a
Modbus cable.

950 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Presetting for Modbus Plus

Transfer problems

Introduction Communication errors can occur when loading the EXEC file. Communication,
made via the COM interface with Windows, depends on several factors. These
factors include the programming device clock speed, the communication software
and the other programs (or applications) that are used in the system.

Check list for Refer to the following check list if transfer problems occur:
transfer
Step Action
problems
1 Check that no other applications are running in the background. Another
application running in the background can mean that the active communication
application in the foreground cannot receive information fast enough.
2 Check that the programming device is running at the highest possible clock
speed. Some programming devices can prolong the lifetime of the buffer battery
with lower speeds. Look in the documentation for you computer.
3 Use a serial connector with a 16550A Universal Asynchronous Receiver
Transmitter (UART). Windows uses the buffering capability of these connections
so that Windows data transfer applications can reach higher speeds even on
slower computers.

RTU transfer If sporadic errors occur during data transfer, transfer cannot be carried out
problems successfully with RTU mode. If this is the case, select ASCII mode. (See Quantum/
Compact/Momentum/Atrium first startup.)

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 951


Presetting for Modbus Plus

952 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Startup when using Modbus with
the EXECLoader
L
Introduction

Overview This chapter describes loading executive data (EXEC) onto the PLC with the
EXECLoader program.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:


Chapter?
Topic Page
Quantum first startup with EXECLoader 954
Compact first startup with EXECLoader 958
Momentum first startup for IEC with EXECLoader 962
Momentum first startup for LL984 with EXECLoader 967

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 953


Modbus with EXECLoader

Quantum first startup with EXECLoader

Introduction This section describes the first startup of Quantum when used with Modbus.
The first startup is subdivided into 5 main sections:
l Start EXECLoader, p. 954
l Define Modbus interface, p. 954
l Protocol settings, p. 955
l Select EXEC file, p. 956
l Load EXEC file, p. 956

Start The procedure for launching EXECLoaders is as follows:


EXECLoader
Step Action
1 Open the Concept start menu.
Response: All installed Concept programs are displayed as symbols.
2 Click on the symbol with the identifier EXECLoader.
Response: The EXECLoader program is started.
3 Click on the command Next, as soon as you have read the information on the
page.
Response: The dialog Communication Protocol is opened.

Define Modbus Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus interface:
interface
Step Action
1 Select the Option button Modbus RTU (RS232) for the RTU transfer mode.
Select the Option button Modbus ASCII (RS232) for the ASCII transfer mode.
Note: Data transfer can only take place if you have configured the same transfer
mode (RTU or ASCII) on the CPU (using a button on the front of the module).
2 Click on the command button Next.
Response: The dialog Modbus Target → RTU/ASCII mode is opened.
3 Use the command button COM Port Settings... to open the dialog COM
Properties.
4 Use the list field Connect using: to select the programming cable interface on
the PC (default setting is COM1).
5 Use the list field Bits per second: to select the Baudrate (default is 9600).
6 Use the list field Parity: to select the parity (default is EVEN).
7 Use the list field Stop Bits to select the Stop bits (default is 1).
8 Click on the command button OK.
Response: The dialog is closed and you return to the dialog Modbus Target →
RTU/ASCII Mode.

954 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Modbus with EXECLoader

Protocol settings Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus protocol:
Step Action
1 Click on the command button Scan.
Response: The nodes on the Modbus network are read and displayed
graphically in the left window. A green point in the graphic indicates that the CPU
is in RUN mode. To stop the CPU continue as described in step 3.
2 Double-click on the read network node in the graphical display.
Response:The Modbus address of the node is automatically entered in the
textfeld Modbus Address.
3 Click the right mouse button in the left window.
Response: A context menu with individual PLC commands is opened.
4 If the "Run" display is lit on the CPU, stop the program using the command Stop
PLC.
Response: A message window appears where you can click OK to confirm
stopping the CPU.
5 Click the command button OK, to confirm stopping the CPU.
Response: You return to the dialog Modbus Target → RTU mode, and the
green point disappears from the graph.
6 Activate the check box Bridge, if the connection to the Modbus node should be
made via a Modbus Plus network using a Modbus bridge.
7 Press the appropriate Option button for your system (PLC, Direct Device, Local
Head, Remote I/O Drop).
8 Click on the command button Next.
Response: The Operation dialog is opened.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 955


Modbus with EXECLoader

Select EXEC file Carry out the following steps to select the EXEC file:
Step Action
1 Press the Option button Transfer EXEC to Device.
2 Click on the command button Browse....
Response: The Concept directory is opened in a standard window.
3 Double-click on the DAT directory.
Response: All available*.BIN files are displayed.
4 Click on the *.BIN file that corresponds to your CPU and the desired
programming language. See the table Loading Firmware for Quantum PLC
Types, p. 1024.
Response: The selected *.BIN file is displayed in File name: text field.
5 Click on the command button Open.
Response: You return to the dialog Operation, and the path to the selected
*.BIN file is displayed in the Filename text field.
6 Click on the command button Next.
Response: The dialog File and Device Info is opened. Information is provided
here about the selected *.BIN file and also about the PLC.
7 Click on the command button Next.
Response: The Summary dialog is opened. This gives you an overview of the
settings made for you to check.

Load EXEC file Carry out the following steps to load the EXEC file in the CPU flash RAM:
Step Action
1 Click on the command button Transfer.
Response: A message box appears warning you that all data available on the
PLC will be lost, and the configuration and program must be reloaded on the
PLC.
2 Click on the command button Yes, to continue the transfer.
Response: The Progress dialog is opened. This gives information about the
progress of the transfer in a progress bar and text.
3 Click Close once the transfer is complete.
Response: The dialog is closed, and you return to the dialog Summary.
4 Click on the command button Close, to close the EXECLoader.

956 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Modbus with EXECLoader

CPU display During transfer the CPU display is as follows:


during transfer
LED Response
Ready lit
Run slow flashing
Modbus lit (with some interruptions)
Modbus + 3x flashes with interruptions

CPU display after After transfer the CPU display is as follows:


transfer
LED Response
Ready lit
Run not lit
Modbus not lit
Modbus + 3x flashes with interruptions

Note: The three flash sequence Modbus + display idicates that no communication
is present on the bus. This is displayed on Modbus by a non-lit Modbus display.
The Modbus display is lit again once connection is made with Concept.

Creating the Carry out the steps given in chapter Creating a Project, p. 47.
software
connection

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 957


Modbus with EXECLoader

Compact first startup with EXECLoader

Introduction This section describes the first startup of Compact when used with Modbus.
The first startup is subdivided into 5 main sections:
l Start EXECLoader, p. 958
l Define Modbus interface, p. 958
l Protocol settings, p. 959
l Select EXEC file, p. 960
l Load EXEC file, p. 960

Start The procedure for launching EXECLoaders is as follows:


EXECLoader
Step Action
1 Open the Concept start menu.
Response: All installed Concept programs are displayed as symbols.
2 Click on the symbol with the identifier EXECLoader.
Response: The EXECLoader program is started.
3 Click on the command Next, as soon as you have read the information on the
page.
Response: The dialog Communication Protocol is opened.

Define Modbus Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus interface:
interface
Step Action
1 Select the Option button Modbus RTU (RS232) for the RTU transfer mode.
Select the Option button Modbus ASCII (RS232) for the ASCII transfer mode.
Note: Data transfer can only take place if you have configured the same transfer
mode (RTU or ASCII) on the CPU (using a button on the front of the module).
2 Click on the command button Next.
Response: The dialog Modbus Target → RTU/ASCII mode is opened.
3 Use the command button COM Port Settings... to open the dialog COM
Properties.
4 Use the list field Connect using: to select the programming cable interface on
the PC (default setting is COM1).
5 Use the list field Bits per second: to select the Baudrate (default is 9600).
6 Use the list field Parity: to select the parity (default is EVEN).
7 Use the list field Stop Bits to select the Stop bits (default is 1).
8 Click on the command button OK.
Response: The dialog is closed and you return to the dialog Modbus Target →
RTU/ASCII Mode.

958 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Modbus with EXECLoader

Protocol settings Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus protocol:
Step Action
1 Click on the command button Scan.
Response: The nodes on the Modbus network are read and displayed
graphically in the left window. A green point in the graphic indicates that the CPU
is in RUN mode. To stop the CPU continue as described in step 3.
2 Double-click on the read network node in the graphical display.
Response:The Modbus address of the node is automatically entered in the
textfeld Modbus Address.
3 Click the right mouse button in the left window.
Response: A context menu with individual PLC commands is opened.
4 If the "Run" display is lit on the CPU, stop the program using the command Stop
PLC.
Response: A message window appears where you can click OK to confirm
stopping the CPU.
5 Click the command button OK, to confirm stopping the CPU.
Response: You return to the dialog Modbus Target → RTU mode, and the
green point disappears from the graph.
6 Activate the check box Bridge, if the connection to the Modbus node should be
made via a Modbus Plus network using a Modbus bridge.
7 Press the appropriate Option button for your system (PLC, Direct Device, Local
Head, Remote I/O Drop).
8 Click on the command button Next.
Response: The Operation dialog is opened.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 959


Modbus with EXECLoader

Select EXEC file Carry out the following steps to select the EXEC file:
Step Action
1 Press the Option button Transfer EXEC to Device.
2 Click on the command button Browse....
Response: The Concept directory is opened in a standard window.
3 Double-click on the DAT directory.
Response: All available*.BIN files are displayed.
4 Click on the *.BIN file CTSX201D.
Response: The selected *.BIN file is displayed in File name: text field.
5 Click on the command button Open.
Response: You return to the dialog Operation, and the path to the selected
*.BIN file is displayed in the Filename text field.
6 Click on the command button Next.
Response: The dialog File and Device Info is opened. Information is provided
here about the selected *.BIN file and also about the PLC.
7 Click on the command button Next.
Response: The Summary dialog is opened. This gives you an overview of the
settings made for you to check.

Load EXEC file Carry out the following steps to load the EXEC file in the CPU flash RAM:
Step Action
1 Click on the command button Transfer.
Response: A message box appears warning you that all data available on the
PLC will be lost, and the configuration and program must be reloaded on the
PLC.
2 Click on the command button Yes, to continue the transfer.
Response: The Progress dialog is opened. This gives information about the
progress of the transfer in a progress bar and text.
3 Click Close once the transfer is complete.
Response: The dialog is closed, and you return to the dialog Summary.
4 Click on the command button Close, to close the EXECLoader.

960 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Modbus with EXECLoader

CPU display During transfer the CPU display is as follows:


during transfer
LED Response
Ready lit
Run slow flashing
Modbus lit (with some interruptions)
Modbus + 3x flashes with interruptions

CPU display after After transfer the CPU display is as follows:


transfer
LED Response
Ready lit
Run not lit
Modbus not lit
Modbus + 3x flashes with interruptions

Note: The three flash sequence Modbus + display idicates that no communication
is present on the bus. This is displayed on Modbus by a non-lit Modbus display.
The Modbus display is lit again once connection is made with Concept.

Creating the Carry out the steps given in chapter Creating a Project, p. 47.
software
connection

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 961


Modbus with EXECLoader

Momentum first startup for IEC with EXECLoader

Introduction This section describes the first startup of Momentum for IEC when used with
Modbus.
The first startup is subdivided into 5 main sections:
l Start EXECLoader, p. 962
l Define Modbus interface, p. 963
l Protocol settings, p. 964
l Select EXEC file, p. 965
l Load EXEC file, p. 965

Start The procedure for launching EXECLoaders is as follows:


EXECLoader
Step Action
1 Open the Concept start menu.
Response: All installed Concept programs are displayed as symbols.
2 Click on the symbol with the identifier EXECLoader.
Response: The EXECLoader program is started.
3 Click on the command Next, as soon as you have read the information on the
page.
Response: The dialog Communication Protocol is opened.

962 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Modbus with EXECLoader

Define Modbus Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus interface:
interface
Step Action
1 Select the Option button Modbus RTU (RS232) for the RTU transfer mode.
Select the Option button Modbus ASCII (RS232) for the ASCII transfer mode.
Note: Data transfer can only take place if you have configured the same transfer
mode (RTU or ASCII) on the CPU (using a button on the front of the module).
2 Click on the command button Next.
Response: The dialog Modbus Target → RTU/ASCII mode is opened.
3 Use the command button COM Port Settings... to open the dialog COM
Properties.
4 Use the list field Connect using: to select the programming cable interface on
the PC (default setting is COM1).
5 Use the list field Bits per second: to select the Baudrate (default is 9600).
6 Use the list field Parity: to select the parity (default is EVEN).
7 Use the list field Stop Bits to select the Stop bits (default is 1).
8 Click on the command button OK.
Response: The dialog is closed and you return to the dialog Modbus Target →
RTU/ASCII Mode.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 963


Modbus with EXECLoader

Protocol settings Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus protocol:
Step Action
1 Click on the command button Scan.
Response: The nodes on the Modbus network are read and displayed
graphically in the left window. A green point in the graphic indicates that the CPU
is in RUN mode. To stop the CPU continue as described in step 3.
2 Double-click on the read network node in the graphical display.
Response:The Modbus address of the node is automatically entered in the
textfeld Modbus Address.
3 Click the right mouse button in the left window.
Response: A context menu with individual PLC commands is opened.
4 If the "Run" display is lit on the CPU, stop the program using the command Stop
PLC.
Response: A message window appears where you can click OK to confirm
stopping the CPU.
5 Click the command button OK, to confirm stopping the CPU.
Response: You return to the dialog Modbus Target → RTU mode, and the
green point disappears from the graph.
6 Activate the check box Bridge, if the connection to the Modbus node should be
made via a Modbus Plus network using a Modbus bridge.
7 Press the appropriate Option button for your system (PLC, Direct Device, Local
Head, Remote I/O Drop).
8 Click on the command button Next.
Response: The Operation dialog is opened.

964 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Modbus with EXECLoader

Select EXEC file Carry out the following steps to select the EXEC file:
Step Action
1 Press the Option button Transfer EXEC to Device.
2 Click on the command button Browse....
Response: The Concept directory is opened in a standard window.
3 Double-click on the DAT directory.
Response: All available*.BIN files are displayed.
4 Click on the *.BIN file that corresponds to your CPU and the desired
programming language. See the table Loading Firmware for Momentum PLC
Types, p. 1025.
Response: The selected *.BIN file is displayed in File name: text field.
5 Click on the command button Open.
Response: You return to the dialog Operation, and the path to the selected
*.BIN file is displayed in the Filename text field.
6 Click on the command button Next.
Response: The dialog File and Device Info is opened. Information is provided
here about the selected *.BIN file and also about the PLC.
7 Click on the command button Next.
Response: The Summary dialog is opened. This gives you an overview of the
settings made for you to check.

Load EXEC file Carry out the following steps to load the EXEC file in the CPU flash RAM:
Step Action
1 Click on the command button Transfer.
Response: A message box appears warning you that all data available on the
PLC will be lost, and the configuration and program must be reloaded on the
PLC.
2 Click on the command button Yes, to continue the transfer.
Response: The Progress dialog is opened. This gives information about the
progress of the transfer in a progress bar and text.
3 Click Close once the transfer is complete.
Response: The dialog is closed, and you return to the dialog Summary.
4 Click on the command button Close, to close the EXECLoader.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 965


Modbus with EXECLoader

CPU display During transfer the CPU display is as follows:


during transfer
LED Response
Run slow flashing
COM ACT lit (with some interruptions)
Modbus + 3x flashes with interruptions

CPU display after After transfer the CPU display is as follows:


transfer
LED Response
Run not lit
COM ACT not lit
Modbus + 3x flashes with interruptions

Note: The three flash sequence Modbus + display idicates that no communication
is present on the bus. This is displayed on Modbus by a non-lit COM ACT display.
The COM ACT display is lit again once connection is made with Concept.

Creating the Carry out the steps given in chapter Creating a Project, p. 47.
software
connection

966 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Modbus with EXECLoader

Momentum first startup for LL984 with EXECLoader

Introduction This section describes the first startup of Momentum for LL984 when used with
Modbus.

Note: Loading the EXEC file for LL984 is not necessary with a new computer, since
it is preloaded in the the CPUs Flash RAM. Loading the EXEC file for LL984 is only
necessary if you have already loaded the EXEC file for IEC, and now wish to
change.
You should always check to see if a new EXEC version has been released in the
meantime. This information and the current EXEC file can be found on our website
at www.schneiderautomation.com. You can see the currently loaded version of the
EXEC file in Concept using the Online → Online control panel... menu command.

The first startup is subdivided into 5 main sections:


l Start EXECLoader, p. 967
l Define Modbus interface, p. 968
l Protocol settings, p. 969
l Select EXEC file, p. 970
l Load EXEC file, p. 970

Start The procedure for launching EXECLoaders is as follows:


EXECLoader
Step Action
1 Open the Concept start menu.
Response: All installed Concept programs are displayed as symbols.
2 Click on the symbol with the identifier EXECLoader.
Response: The EXECLoader program is started.
3 Click on the command Next, as soon as you have read the information on the
page.
Response: The dialog Communication Protocol is opened.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 967


Modbus with EXECLoader

Define Modbus Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus interface:
interface
Step Action
1 Select the Option button Modbus RTU (RS232) for the RTU transfer mode.
Select the Option button Modbus ASCII (RS232) for the ASCII transfer mode.
Note: Data transfer can only take place if you have configured the same transfer
mode (RTU or ASCII) on the CPU (using a button on the front of the module).
2 Click on the command button Next.
Response: The dialog Modbus Target → RTU/ASCII mode is opened.
3 Use the command button COM Port Settings... to open the dialog COM
Properties.
4 Use the list field Connect using: to select the programming cable interface on
the PC (default setting is COM1).
5 Use the list field Bits per second: to select the Baudrate (default is 9600).
6 Use the list field Parity: to select the parity (default is EVEN).
7 Use the list field Stop Bits to select the Stop bits (default is 1).
8 Click on the command button OK.
Response: The dialog is closed and you return to the dialog Modbus Target →
RTU/ASCII Mode.

968 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Modbus with EXECLoader

Protocol settings Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus protocol:
Step Action
1 Click on the command button Scan.
Response: The nodes on the Modbus network are read and displayed
graphically in the left window. A green point in the graphic indicates that the CPU
is in RUN mode. To stop the CPU continue as described in step 3.
2 Double-click on the read network node in the graphical display.
Response:The Modbus address of the node is automatically entered in the
textfeld Modbus Address.
3 Click the right mouse button in the left window.
Response: A context menu with individual PLC commands is opened.
4 If the "Run" display is lit on the CPU, stop the program using the command Stop
PLC.
Response: A message window appears where you can click OK to confirm
stopping the CPU.
5 Click the command button OK, to confirm stopping the CPU.
Response: You return to the dialog Modbus Target → RTU mode, and the
green point disappears from the graph.
6 Activate the check box Bridge, if the connection to the Modbus node should be
made via a Modbus Plus network using a Modbus bridge.
7 Press the appropriate Option button for your system (PLC, Direct Device, Local
Head, Remote I/O Drop).
8 Click on the command button Next.
Response: The Operation dialog is opened.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 969


Modbus with EXECLoader

Select EXEC file Carry out the following steps to select the EXEC file:
Step Action
1 Press the Option button Transfer EXEC to Device.
2 Click on the command button Browse....
Response: The Concept directory is opened in a standard window.
3 Double-click on the DAT directory.
Response: All available*.BIN files are displayed.
4 Click on the *.BIN file that corresponds to your CPU and the desired
programming language. See the table Loading Firmware for Momentum PLC
Types, p. 1025.
Response: The selected *.BIN file is displayed in File name: text field.
5 Click on the command button Open.
Response: You return to the dialog Operation, and the path to the selected
*.BIN file is displayed in the Filename text field.
6 Click on the command button Next.
Response: The dialog File and Device Info is opened. Information is provided
here about the selected *.BIN file and also about the PLC.
7 Click on the command button Next.
Response: The Summary dialog is opened. This gives you an overview of the
settings made for you to check.

Load EXEC file Carry out the following steps to load the EXEC file in the CPU flash RAM:
Step Action
1 Click on the command button Transfer.
Response: A message box appears warning you that all data available on the
PLC will be lost, and the configuration and program must be reloaded on the
PLC.
2 Click on the command button Yes, to continue the transfer.
Response: The Progress dialog is opened. This gives information about the
progress of the transfer in a progress bar and text.
3 Click Close once the transfer is complete.
Response: The dialog is closed, and you return to the dialog Summary.
4 Click on the command button Close, to close the EXECLoader.

970 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Modbus with EXECLoader

CPU display During transfer the CPU display is as follows:


during transfer
LED Response
Run slow flashing
COM ACT lit (with some interruptions)
Modbus + 3x flashes with interruptions

CPU display after After transfer the CPU display is as follows:


transfer
LED Response
Run not lit
COM ACT not lit
Modbus + 3x flashes with interruptions

Note: The three flash sequence Modbus + display idicates that no communication
is present on the bus. This is displayed on Modbus by a non-lit COM ACT display.
The COM ACT display is lit again once connection is made with Concept.

Creating the Carry out the steps given in chapter Creating a Project, p. 47.
software
connection

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 971


Modbus with EXECLoader

972 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Startup when using Modbus with
DOS Loader
M
Introduction

Overview This chapter describes loading executive data (EXEC) onto the PLC with the DOS
Loader program.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:


Chapter?
Topic Page
Quantum first startup with DOS Loader 974
Compact first startup with DOS Loader 977
Momentum first startup for IEC with DOS Loader 980
Momentum first startup for LL984 with DOS Loader 983

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 973


Modbus with DOS Loader

Quantum first startup with DOS Loader

Introduction This section describes the first startup of Quantum when used with Modbus.
The first startup is subdivided into 5 main sections:
l Start DOS Loader, p. 974
l Define Modbus interface, p. 974
l Protocol settings, p. 975
l Select EXEC file, p. 975
l Load EXEC file, p. 975

Start DOS Loader The procedure for launching DOS Loaders is as follows:
Step Action
1 If the CPU display "Run" is lit, stop the program with Concept (in main menu
Online).
Response: The "Run" display is no longer lit; the "Ready" is now lit.
2 Open the directory DAT (CONCEPT\DAT).
3 Double-click on the file LOADER.EXE.
Response: The installation program for the Executive file (EXEC) is started.
4 Select the option Communication Parameters.
Response: The dialog box Communication setup is opened.
5 Select the Modbusoption.
Response: The Modbus communication setup window is opened.

Define Modbus Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus interface:
interface
Step Action
1 Select the programming cable interface on the PC (default setting is COM1).
2 Select the Baudrate (default is 9600).
3 Select the parity (default is EVEN).
4 Select the Option button RTU - 8 Bits for the RTU transfer mode.
Select the option ASCII -7 Bits for the ASCII transfer mode.
5 Select the Stop bits (default is 1).
Note: Data transfer can only take place if you have configured the same transfer
mode (ASCII or RTU) on the CPU (using a button on the front of the module).

974 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Modbus with DOS Loader

Protocol settings Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus protocol:
Step Action
1 Enter in Enter PLC Address: the node address set on the CPU (using a rotary
switch on the back of the module).
2 Select the TARGET PATH 0 option.
3 Select the ACCEPT CHANGES option.
Response: You return to the main menu.

Select EXEC file Carry out the following steps to select the EXEC file:
Step Action
1 Select the option File Selection.
Response: The File Selection window is opened.
2 Click on the *.BIN file that corresponds to your CPU and the desired
programming language. See the table Loading Firmware for Quantum PLC
Types, p. 1024.
3 Confirm your selection with RETURN.
Response: You return to the main menu.

Load EXEC file Carry out the following steps to load the EXEC file in the CPU flash RAM:
Step Action
1 Select the option Load File To PLC.
Response: The Loading Process window is opened, and the warning "The
PROGRAM contents of the device being loaded could be lost after loading a new
Executive. The CONTENTS stored in the Micro H H P will always be lost after
loading a new Executive. Would you like to continue (Y/N) ? N" is displayed.
2 Acknowledge the warning with Y.
Response: The message "Node failed to enter normal mode" appears.
3 The DOWNLOAD PROGRESS window appears which shows the transfer rate.
Response: After the transfer is complete, the message "Download Operation
Successful" appears.
4 Confirm the message with RETURN.
Response: You return to the main menu.
5 Select the Exit Program option.
Response: The DOS Loader is exited.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 975


Modbus with DOS Loader

CPU display During transfer the CPU display is as follows:


during transfer
LED Response
Ready lit
Run slow flashing
Modbus lit (with some interruptions)
Modbus + 3x flashes with interruptions

CPU display after After transfer the CPU display is as follows:


transfer
LED Response
Ready lit
Run not lit
Modbus not lit
Modbus + 3x flashes with interruptions

Note: The three flash sequence Modbus + display idicates that no communication
is present on the bus. This is displayed on Modbus by a non-lit Modbus display.
The Modbus display is lit again once connection is made with Concept.

Creating the Carry out the steps given in chapter Creating a Project, p. 47.
software
connection

976 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Modbus with DOS Loader

Compact first startup with DOS Loader

Introduction This section describes the first startup of Compact when used with Modbus.
The first startup is subdivided into 5 main sections:
l Start DOS Loader, p. 977
l Define Modbus interface, p. 977
l Protocol settings, p. 978
l Select EXEC file, p. 978
l Load EXEC file, p. 978

Start DOS Loader The procedure for launching DOS Loaders is as follows:
Step Action
1 If the CPU display "Run" is lit, stop the program with Concept (in main menu
Online).
Response: The "Run" display is no longer lit; the "Ready" is now lit.
2 Open the directory DAT (CONCEPT\DAT).
3 Double-click on the file LOADER.EXE.
Response: The installation program for the Executive file (EXEC) is started.
4 Select the option Communication Parameters.
Response: The dialog box Communication setup is opened.
5 Select the Modbusoption.
Response: The Modbus communication setup window is opened.

Define Modbus Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus interface:
interface
Step Action
1 Select the programming cable interface on the PC (default setting is COM1).
2 Select the Baudrate (default is 9600).
3 Select the parity (default is EVEN).
4 Select the Option button RTU - 8 Bits for the RTU transfer mode.
Select the option ASCII -7 Bits for the ASCII transfer mode.
5 Select the Stop bits (default is 1).
Note: Data transfer can only take place if you have configured the same transfer
mode (ASCII or RTU) on the CPU (using a button on the front of the module).

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 977


Modbus with DOS Loader

Protocol settings Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus protocol:
Step Action
1 Enter in Enter PLC Address: the node address set on the CPU (using a rotary
switch on the back of the module).
2 Select the TARGET PATH 0 option.
3 Select the ACCEPT CHANGES option.
Response: You return to the main menu.

Select EXEC file Carry out the following steps to select the EXEC file:
Step Action
1 Select the option File Selection.
Response: The File Selection window is opened.
2 Select the *.BIN file CTSX201D.
3 Confirm your selection with RETURN.
Response: You return to the main menu.

Load EXEC file Carry out the following steps to load the EXEC file in the CPU flash RAM:
Step Action
1 Select the option Load File To PLC.
Response: The Loading Process window is opened, and the warning "The
PROGRAM contents of the device being loaded could be lost after loading a new
Executive. The CONTENTS stored in the Micro H H P will always be lost after
loading a new Executive. Would you like to continue (Y/N) ? N" is displayed.
2 Acknowledge the warning with Y.
Response: The message "Node failed to enter normal mode" appears.
3 The DOWNLOAD PROGRESS window appears which shows the transfer rate.
Response: After the transfer is complete, the message "Download Operation
Successful" appears.
4 Confirm the message with RETURN.
Response: You return to the main menu.
5 Select the Exit Program option.
Response: The DOS Loader is exited.

978 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Modbus with DOS Loader

CPU display During transfer the CPU display is as follows:


during transfer
LED Response
Ready lit
Run slow flashing
Modbus not lit
Modbus + fast flashing

CPU display after After transfer the CPU display is as follows:


transfer
LED Response
Ready lit
Run not lit
Modbus not lit
Modbus + fast flashing

Note: The three flash sequence Modbus + display idicates that no communication
is present on the bus. This is displayed on Modbus by a non-lit Modbus display.
The Modbus display is lit again once connection is made with Concept.

Creating the Carry out the steps given in chapter Creating a Project, p. 47.
software
connection

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 979


Modbus with DOS Loader

Momentum first startup for IEC with DOS Loader

Introduction This section describes the first startup of Momentum for IEC when used with
Modbus.
The first startup is subdivided into 5 main sections:
l Start DOS Loader, p. 980
l Define Modbus interface, p. 980
l Protocol settings, p. 981
l Select EXEC file, p. 981
l Load EXEC file, p. 981

Start DOS Loader The procedure for launching DOS Loaders is as follows:
Step Action
1 If the CPU display "Run" is lit, stop the program with Concept (in main menu
Online).
Response: The "Run" display is no longer lit; the "Ready" is now lit.
2 Open the directory DAT (CONCEPT\DAT).
3 Double-click on the file LOADER.EXE.
Response: The installation program for the Executive file (EXEC) is started.
4 Select the option Communication Parameters.
Response: The dialog box Communication setup is opened.
5 Select the Modbus option.
Response: The Modbus communication setup window is opened.

Define Modbus Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus interface:
interface
Step Action
1 Select the programming cable interface on the PC (default setting is COM1).
2 Select the Baudrate (default is 9600).
3 Select the parity (default is EVEN).
4 Select the Option button RTU - 8 Bits for the RTU transfer mode.
Select the option ASCII -7 Bits for the ASCII transfer mode.
5 Select the Stop bits (default is 1).
Note: Data transfer can only take place if you have configured the same transfer
mode (ASCII or RTU) on the CPU (using a button on the front of the module).

980 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Modbus with DOS Loader

Protocol settings Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus protocol:
Step Action
1 Enter in Enter PLC Address: the node address set on the CPU (using a rotary
switch on the back of the module).
2 Select the TARGET PATH 0 option.
3 Select the ACCEPT CHANGES option.
Response: You return to the main menu.

Select EXEC file Carry out the following steps to select the EXEC file:
Step Action
1 Select the option File Selection.
Response: The File Selection window is opened.
2 Click on the *.BIN file that corresponds to your CPU and the desired
programming language. See the table Loading Firmware for Momentum PLC
Types, p. 1025.
3 Confirm your selection with RETURN.
Response: You return to the main menu.

Load EXEC file Carry out the following steps to load the EXEC file in the CPU flash RAM:
Step Action
1 Select the option Load File To PLC.
Response: The Loading Process window is opened, and the warning "The
PROGRAM contents of the device being loaded could be lost after loading a new
Executive. The CONTENTS stored in the Micro H H P will always be lost after
loading a new Executive. Would you like to continue (Y/N) ? N" is displayed.
2 Acknowledge the warning with Y.
Response: The message "Node failed to enter normal mode" appears.
3 The DOWNLOAD PROGRESS window appears which shows the transfer rate.
Response: After the transfer is complete, the message "Download Operation
Successful" appears.
4 Confirm the message with RETURN.
Response: You return to the main menu.
5 Select the Exit Program option.
Response: The DOS Loader is exited.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 981


Modbus with DOS Loader

CPU display During transfer the CPU display is as follows:


during transfer
LED Response
Run slow flashing
COM ACT lit (with some interruptions)
Modbus + 3x flashes with interruptions

CPU display after After transfer the CPU display is as follows:


transfer
LED Response
Run not lit
COM ACT not lit
Modbus + 3x flashes with interruptions

Note: The three flash sequence Modbus + display idicates that no communication
is present on the bus. This is displayed on Modbus by a non-lit COM ACT display.
The COM ACT display is lit again once connection is made with Concept.

Creating the Carry out the steps given in chapter Creating a Project, p. 47.
software
connection

982 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Modbus with DOS Loader

Momentum first startup for LL984 with DOS Loader

Introduction This section describes the first startup of Momentum for LL984 when used with
Modbus.

Note: Loading the EXEC file for LL984 is not necessary with a new computer, since
it is preloaded in the the CPUs Flash RAM. Loading the EXEC file for LL984 is only
necessary if you have already loaded the EXEC file for IEC, and now wish to
change.
You should always check to see if a new EXEC version has been released in the
meantime. This information and the current EXEC file can be found on our website
at www.schneiderautomation.com. You can see the currently loaded version of the
EXEC file in Concept using the Online → Online control panel... menu command.

The first startup is subdivided into 5 main sections:


l Start DOS Loader, p. 983
l Define Modbus interface, p. 984
l Protocol settings, p. 984
l Select EXEC file, p. 984
l Load EXEC file, p. 985

Start DOS Loader The procedure for launching DOS Loaders is as follows:
Step Action
1 If the CPU display "Run" is lit, stop the program with Concept (in main menu
Online).
Response: The "Run" display is no longer lit; the "Ready" is now lit.
2 Open the directory DAT (CONCEPT\DAT).
3 Double-click on the file LOADER.EXE.
Response: The installation program for the Executive file (EXEC) is started.
4 Select the option Communication Parameters.
Response: The dialog box Communication setup is opened.
5 Select the Modbusoption.
Response: The Modbus communication setup window is opened.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 983


Modbus with DOS Loader

Define Modbus Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus interface:
interface
Step Action
1 Select the programming cable interface on the PC (default setting is COM1).
2 Select the Baudrate (default is 9600).
3 Select the parity (default is EVEN).
4 Select the Option button RTU - 8 Bits for the RTU transfer mode.
Select the option ASCII -7 Bits for the ASCII transfer mode.
5 Select the Stop bits (default is 1).
Note: Data transfer can only take place if you have configured the same transfer
mode (ASCII or RTU) on the CPU (using a button on the front of the module).

Protocol settings Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus protocol:
Step Action
1 Enter in Enter PLC Address: the node address set on the CPU (using a rotary
switch on the back of the module).
2 Select the TARGET PATH 0 option.
3 Select the ACCEPT CHANGES option.
Response: You return to the main menu.

Select EXEC file Carry out the following steps to select the EXEC file:
Step Action
1 Select the option File Selection.
Response: The File Selection window is opened.
2 Click on the *.BIN file that corresponds to your CPU and the desired
programming language. See the table Loading Firmware for Momentum PLC
Types, p. 1025.
3 Confirm your selection with RETURN.
Response: You return to the main menu.

984 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Modbus with DOS Loader

Load EXEC file Carry out the following steps to load the EXEC file in the CPU flash RAM:
Step Action
1 Select the option Load File To PLC.
Response: The Loading Process window is opened, and the warning "The
PROGRAM contents of the device being loaded could be lost after loading a new
Executive. The CONTENTS stored in the Micro H H P will always be lost after
loading a new Executive. Would you like to continue (Y/N) ? N" is displayed.
2 Acknowledge the warning with Y.
Response: The message "Node failed to enter normal mode" appears.
3 The DOWNLOAD PROGRESS window appears which shows the transfer rate.
Response: After the transfer is complete, the message "Download Operation
Successful" appears.
4 Confirm the message with RETURN.
Response: You return to the main menu.
5 Select the Exit Program option.
Response: The DOS Loader is exited.

CPU display During transfer the CPU display is as follows:


during transfer
LED Response
Run slow flashing
COM ACT lit (with some interruptions)
Modbus + 3x flashes with interruptions

CPU display after After transfer the CPU display is as follows:


transfer
LED Response
Run not lit
COM ACT not lit
Modbus + 3x flashes with interruptions

Note: The three flash sequence Modbus + display idicates that no communication
is present on the bus. This is displayed on Modbus by a non-lit COM ACT display.
The COM ACT display is lit again once connection is made with Concept.

Creating the Carry out the steps given in chapter Creating a Project, p. 47.
software
connection

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 985


Modbus with DOS Loader

986 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Startup when using Modbus Plus
with the EXECLoader
N
Introduction

Overview This chapter describes loading executive data (EXEC) onto the PLC with the
EXECLoader.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:


Chapter?
Topic Page
Quantum first startup with EXECLoader 988
Compact first startup with EXECLoader 992
Atrium first startup with EXECLoader 996
Momentum first startup for IEC with EXECLoader 999
Momentum first startup for LL984 with EXECLoader 1003

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 987


Modbus Plus with EXECLoader

Quantum first startup with EXECLoader

Introduction This section describes the first startup of Quantum when used with Modbus Plus.
The first startup is subdivided into 5 main sections:
l Start EXECLoader, p. 988
l Define SA85 adapter, p. 988
l Protocol settings, p. 989
l Select EXEC file, p. 990
l Load EXEC file, p. 990

Start The procedure for launching EXECLoaders is as follows:


EXECLoader
Step Action
1 Open the Concept start menu.
Response: All installed Concept programs are displayed as symbols.
2 Click on the symbol with the identifier EXECLoader.
Response: The EXECLoader program is started.
3 Click on the command Next, as soon as you have read the information on the
page.
Response: The dialog Communication Protocol is opened.

Define SA85 Carry out the following steps to define the LAN address set in the CONFIG.SYS file:
adapter
Step Action
1 Select the option button Modbus Plus.
2 Click on the command button Next.
Response: The Modbus Plus Target dialog is opened.
3 Select from the list Devices Online: the adapter address you set when installing
the SA85 in the CONFIG.SYS file (Parameter /n).

988 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Modbus Plus with EXECLoader

Protocol settings Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus Plus protocol settings:
Step Action
1 Click on the command button Scan.
Response: The nodes on the Modbus Plus network are read and displayed
graphically in the left window. A green point in the graphic indicates that the CPU
is in RUN mode. To stop the CPU continue as described in step 3.
2 Double-click on the read network node in the graphical display.
Response: The Modbus address of the node is automatically entered in the
textfeld In the text field Modbus Plus Address.
3 Click the right mouse button in the left window.
Response: A context menu with individual PLC commands is opened.
4 If the "Run" display is lit on the CPU, stop the program using the command Stop
PLC.
Response: A message window appears where you can click OK to confirm
stopping the CPU.
5 Click the command button OK, to confirm stopping the CPU.
Response: You return to the Modbus Plus Target dialog, and the green point
disappears from the graph.
6 Activate the check box Bridge, if the connection to the Modbus network node
should be made via a Modbus network using a Modbus bridge.
7 Press the appropriate Option button for your system (PLC, Local Head, Remote
I/O Drop).
8 Click on the command button Next.
Response: The Operation dialog is opened.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 989


Modbus Plus with EXECLoader

Select EXEC file Carry out the following steps to select the EXEC file:
Step Action
1 Press the Option button Transfer EXEC to Device.
2 Click on the command button Browse....
Response: The Concept directory is opened in a standard window.
3 Double-click on the DAT directory.
Response: All available*.BIN files are displayed.
4 Click on the *.BIN file that corresponds to your CPU and the desired
programming language. See the table Loading Firmware for Quantum PLC
Types, p. 1024.
Response: The selected *.BIN file is displayed in File name: text field.
5 Click on the command button Open.
Response: You return to the dialog Operation, and the path to the selected
*.BIN file is displayed in the Filename text field.
6 Click on the command button Next.
Response: The dialog File and Device Info is opened. Information is provided
here about the selected *.BIN file and also about the PLC.
7 Click on the command button Next.
Response: The Summary dialog is opened. This gives you an overview of the
settings made for you to check.

Load EXEC file Carry out the following steps to load the EXEC file in the CPU flash RAM:
Step Action
1 Click on the command button Transfer.
Response: A message box appears warning you that all data available on the
PLC will be lost, and the configuration and program must be reloaded on the
PLC.
2 Click on the command button Yes, to continue the transfer.
Response: The Progress dialog is opened. This gives information about the
progress of the transfer in a progress bar and text.
3 Click Close once the transfer is complete.
Response: The dialog is closed, and you return to the dialog Summary.
4 Click on the command button Close, to close the EXECLoader.

990 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Modbus Plus with EXECLoader

CPU display During transfer the CPU display is as follows:


during transfer
LED Response
Ready lit
Run slow flashing
Modbus not lit
Modbus + fast flashing

CPU display after After transfer the CPU display is as follows:


transfer
LED Response
Ready lit
Run not lit
Modbus not lit
Modbus + fast flashing

Creating the Carry out the steps given in chapter Creating a Project, p. 47.
software
connection
Note: If you recieve an error message, close Concept and start the
BDRESET.EXE file (in the \Concept directory) to reset the SA85. Then start again
from the first step.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 991


Modbus Plus with EXECLoader

Compact first startup with EXECLoader

Introduction This section describes the first startup of Compact when used with Modbus Plus.
The first startup is subdivided into 5 main sections:
l Start EXECLoader, p. 992
l Define SA85 adapter, p. 992
l Protocol settings, p. 993
l Select EXEC file, p. 994
l Load EXEC file, p. 994

Start The procedure for launching EXECLoaders is as follows:


EXECLoader
Step Action
1 Open the Concept start menu.
Response: All installed Concept programs are displayed as symbols.
2 Click on the symbol with the identifier EXECLoader.
Response: The EXECLoader program is started.
3 Click on the command Next, as soon as you have read the information on the
page.
Response: The dialog Communication Protocol is opened.

Define SA85 Carry out the following steps to define the LAN address set in the CONFIG.SYS file:
adapter
Step Action
1 Select the option button Modbus Plus.
2 Click on the command button Next.
Response: The Modbus Plus Target dialog is opened.
3 Select from the list Devices Online: the adapter address you set when installing
the SA85 in the CONFIG.SYS file (Parameter /n).

992 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Modbus Plus with EXECLoader

Protocol settings Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus Plus protocol settings:
Step Action
1 Click on the command button Scan.
Response: The nodes on the Modbus Plus network are read and displayed
graphically in the left window. A green point in the graphic indicates that the CPU
is in RUN mode. To stop the CPU continue as described in step 3.
2 Double-click on the read network node in the graphical display.
Response: The Modbus address of the node is automatically entered in the
textfeld In the text field Modbus Plus Address.
3 Click the right mouse button in the left window.
Response: A context menu with individual PLC commands is opened.
4 If the "Run" display is lit on the CPU, stop the program using the command Stop
PLC.
Response: A message window appears where you can click OK to confirm
stopping the CPU.
5 Click the command button OK, to confirm stopping the CPU.
Response: You return to the Modbus Plus Target dialog, and the green point
disappears from the graph.
6 Activate the check box Bridge, if the connection to the Modbus network node
should be made via a Modbus network using a Modbus bridge.
7 Press the appropriate Option button for your system (PLC, Local Head, Remote
I/O Drop).
8 Click on the command button Next.
Response: The Operation dialog is opened.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 993


Modbus Plus with EXECLoader

Select EXEC file Carry out the following steps to select the EXEC file:
Step Action
1 Press the Option button Transfer EXEC to Device.
2 Click on the command button Browse....
Response: The Concept directory is opened in a standard window.
3 Double-click on the DAT directory.
Response: All available*.BIN files are displayed.
4 Click on the *.BIN file CTSX201D.
Response: The selected *.BIN file is displayed in File name: text field.
5 Click on the command button Open.
Response: You return to the dialog Operation, and the path to the selected
*.BIN file is displayed in the Filename text field.
6 Click on the command button Next.
Response: The dialog File and Device Info is opened. Information is provided
here about the selected *.BIN file and also about the PLC.
7 Click on the command button Next.
Response: The Summary dialog is opened. This gives you an overview of the
settings made for you to check.

Load EXEC file Carry out the following steps to load the EXEC file in the CPU flash RAM:
Step Action
1 Click on the command button Transfer.
Response: A message box appears warning you that all data available on the
PLC will be lost, and the configuration and program must be reloaded on the
PLC.
2 Click on the command button Yes, to continue the transfer.
Response: The Progress dialog is opened. This gives information about the
progress of the transfer in a progress bar and text.
3 Click Close once the transfer is complete.
Response: The dialog is closed, and you return to the dialog Summary.
4 Click on the command button Close, to close the EXECLoader.

994 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Modbus Plus with EXECLoader

CPU display During transfer the CPU display is as follows:


during transfer
LED Response
Ready lit
Run slow flashing
Modbus not lit
Modbus + fast flashing

CPU display after After transfer the CPU display is as follows:


transfer
LED Response
Ready lit
Run not lit
Modbus not lit
Modbus + fast flashing

Creating the Carry out the steps given in chapter Creating a Project, p. 47.
software
connection
Note: If you recieve an error message, close Concept and start the
BDRESET.EXE file (in the \Concept directory) to reset the SA85. Then start again
from the first step.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 995


Modbus Plus with EXECLoader

Atrium first startup with EXECLoader

Introduction This section describes the first startup of Atrium when used with Modbus Plus. The
hardware requirements for loading EXEC files can be seen in the "Modicon TSX
Atrium" manual.
The first startup is subdivided into 5 main sections:
l Start EXECLoader, p. 996
l Define SA85 adapter, p. 996
l Protocol settings, p. 997
l Select EXEC file, p. 998
l Load EXEC file, p. 998

Start The procedure for launching EXECLoaders is as follows:


EXECLoader
Step Action
1 Open the Concept start menu.
Response: All installed Concept programs are displayed as symbols.
2 Click on the symbol with the identifier EXECLoader.
Response: The EXECLoader program is started.
3 Click on the command Next, as soon as you have read the information on the
page.
Response: The dialog Communication Protocol is opened.

Define SA85 Carry out the following steps to define the LAN address set in the CONFIG.SYS file:
adapter
Step Action
1 Select the option button Modbus Plus.
2 Click on the command button Next.
Response: The Modbus Plus Target dialog is opened.
3 Select from the list Devices Online: the adapter address you set when installing
the SA85 in the CONFIG.SYS file (Parameter /n).

996 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Modbus Plus with EXECLoader

Protocol settings Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus Plus protocol settings:
Step Action
1 Click on the command button Scan.
Response: The nodes on the Modbus Plus network are read and displayed
graphically in the left window. A green point in the graphic indicates that the CPU
is in RUN mode. To stop the CPU continue as described in step 3.
2 Double-click on the read network node in the graphical display.
Response: The Modbus address of the node is automatically entered in the
textfeld In the text field Modbus Plus Address.
3 Click the right mouse button in the left window.
Response: A context menu with individual PLC commands is opened.
4 If the "Run" display is lit on the CPU, stop the program using the command Stop
PLC.
Response: A message window appears where you can click OK to confirm
stopping the CPU.
5 Click the command button OK, to confirm stopping the CPU.
Response: You return to the Modbus Plus Target dialog, and the green point
disappears from the graph.
6 Activate the check box Bridge, if the connection to the Modbus network node
should be made via a Modbus network using a Modbus bridge.
7 Press the appropriate Option button for your system (PLC, Local Head, Remote
I/O Drop).
8 Click on the command button Next.
Response: The Operation dialog is opened.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 997


Modbus Plus with EXECLoader

Select EXEC file Carry out the following steps to select the EXEC file:
Step Action
1 Press the Option button Transfer EXEC to Device.
2 Click on the command button Browse....
Response: The Concept directory is opened in a standard window.
3 Double-click on the DAT directory.
Response: All available*.BIN files are displayed.
4 Click on the *.BIN file that corresponds to your CPU and the desired programming
language. See the table Loading Firmware for Atrium PLC Types, p. 1026.
Response: The selected *.BIN file is displayed in File name: text field.
5 Click on the command button Open.
Response: You return to the dialog Operation, and the path to the selected *.BIN
file is displayed in the Filename text field.
6 Click on the command button Next.
Response: The dialog File and Device Info is opened. Information is provided
here about the selected *.BIN file and also about the PLC.
7 Click on the command button Next.
Response: The Summary dialog is opened. This gives you an overview of the
settings made for you to check.

Load EXEC file Carry out the following steps to load the EXEC file in the CPU flash RAM:
Step Action
1 Click on the command button Transfer.
Response: A message box appears warning you that all data available on the PLC
will be lost, and the configuration and program must be reloaded on the PLC.
2 Click on the command button Yes, to continue the transfer.
Response: The Progress dialog is opened. This gives information about the
progress of the transfer in a progress bar and text.
3 Click Close once the transfer is complete.
Response: The dialog is closed, and you return to the dialog Summary.
4 Click on the command button Close, to close the EXECLoader.

998 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Modbus Plus with EXECLoader

Creating the Carry out the steps given in chapter Creating a Project, p. 47.
software
connection
Note: If you recieve an error message, close Concept and start the
BDRESET.EXE file (in the \Concept directory) to reset the SA85. Then start again
from the first step.

Momentum first startup for IEC with EXECLoader

Introduction This section describes the first startup of Momentum for IEC when used with
Modbus Plus.
The first startup is subdivided into 5 main sections:
l Start EXECLoader, p. 999
l Define SA85 adapter, p. 999
l Protocol settings, p. 1000
l Select EXEC file, p. 1001
l Load EXEC file, p. 1001

Start The procedure for launching EXECLoaders is as follows:


EXECLoader
Step Action
1 Open the Concept start menu.
Response: All installed Concept programs are displayed as symbols.
2 Click on the symbol with the identifier EXECLoader.
Response: The EXECLoader program is started.
3 Click on the command Next, as soon as you have read the information on the
page.
Response: The dialog Communication Protocol is opened.

Define SA85 Carry out the following steps to define the LAN address set in the CONFIG.SYS file:
adapter
Step Action
1 Select the option button Modbus Plus.
2 Click on the command button Next.
Response: The Modbus Plus Target dialog is opened.
3 Select from the list Devices Online: the adapter address you set when installing
the SA85 in the CONFIG.SYS file (Parameter /n).

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 999


Modbus Plus with EXECLoader

Protocol settings Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus Plus protocol settings:
Step Action
1 Click on the command button Scan.
Response: The nodes on the Modbus Plus network are read and displayed
graphically in the left window. A green point in the graphic indicates that the CPU
is in RUN mode. To stop the CPU continue as described in step 3.
2 Double-click on the read network node in the graphical display.
Response: The Modbus address of the node is automatically entered in the
textfeld In the text field Modbus Plus Address.
3 Click the right mouse button in the left window.
Response: A context menu with individual PLC commands is opened.
4 If the "Run" display is lit on the CPU, stop the program using the command Stop
PLC.
Response: A message window appears where you can click OK to confirm
stopping the CPU.
5 Click the command button OK, to confirm stopping the CPU.
Response: You return to the Modbus Plus Target dialog, and the green point
disappears from the graph.
6 Activate the check box Bridge, if the connection to the Modbus network node
should be made via a Modbus network using a Modbus bridge.
7 Press the appropriate Option button for your system (PLC, Local Head, Remote
I/O Drop).
8 Click on the command button Next.
Response: The Operation dialog is opened.

1000 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Modbus Plus with EXECLoader

Select EXEC file Carry out the following steps to select the EXEC file:
Step Action
1 Press the Option button Transfer EXEC to Device.
2 Click on the command button Browse....
Response: The Concept directory is opened in a standard window.
3 Double-click on the DAT directory.
Response: All available*.BIN files are displayed.
4 Click on the *.BIN file that corresponds to your CPU and the desired
programming language. See the table Loading Firmware for Momentum PLC
Types, p. 1025.
Response: The selected *.BIN file is displayed in File name: text field.
5 Click on the command button Open.
Response: You return to the dialog Operation, and the path to the selected
*.BIN file is displayed in the Filename text field.
6 Click on the command button Next.
Response: The dialog File and Device Info is opened. Information is provided
here about the selected *.BIN file and also about the PLC.
7 Click on the command button Next.
Response: The Summary dialog is opened. This gives you an overview of the
settings made for you to check.

Load EXEC file Carry out the following steps to load the EXEC file in the CPU flash RAM:
Step Action
1 Click on the command button Transfer.
Response: A message box appears warning you that all data available on the
PLC will be lost, and the configuration and program must be reloaded on the
PLC.
2 Click on the command button Yes, to continue the transfer.
Response: The Progress dialog is opened. This gives information about the
progress of the transfer in a progress bar and text.
3 Click Close once the transfer is complete.
Response: The dialog is closed, and you return to the dialog Summary.
4 Click on the command button Close, to close the EXECLoader.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1001


Modbus Plus with EXECLoader

CPU display During transfer the CPU display is as follows:


during transfer
LED Response
Run slow flashing
COM ACT not lit
Modbus + fast flashing

CPU display after After transfer the CPU display is as follows:


transfer
LED Response
Run not lit
COM ACT not lit
Modbus + fast flashing

Creating the Carry out the steps given in chapter Creating a Project, p. 47.
software
connection
Note: If you recieve an error message, close Concept and start the
BDRESET.EXE file (in the \Concept directory) to reset the SA85. Then start again
from the first step.

1002 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Modbus Plus with EXECLoader

Momentum first startup for LL984 with EXECLoader

Introduction This section describes the first startup of Momentum for LL984 when used with
Modbus Plus.

Note: Loading the EXEC file for LL984 is not necessary with a new computer, since
it is preloaded in the the CPUs Flash RAM. Loading the EXEC file for LL984 is only
necessary if you have already loaded the EXEC file for IEC, and now wish to
change.
You should always check to see if a new EXEC version has been released in the
meantime. This information and the current EXEC file can be found on our website
at www.schneiderautomation.com. You can see the currently loaded version of the
EXEC file in Concept using the Online → Online control panel... menu command.

The first startup is subdivided into 5 main sections:


l Start EXECLoader, p. 1003
l Define SA85 adapter, p. 1003
l Protocol settings, p. 1004
l Select EXEC file, p. 1005
l Load EXEC file, p. 1005

Start The procedure for launching EXECLoaders is as follows:


EXECLoader
Step Action
1 Open the Concept start menu.
Response: All installed Concept programs are displayed as symbols.
2 Click on the symbol with the identifier EXECLoader.
Response: The EXECLoader program is started.
3 Click on the command Next, as soon as you have read the information on the
page.
Response: The dialog Communication Protocol is opened.

Define SA85 Carry out the following steps to define the LAN address set in the CONFIG.SYS file:
adapter
Step Action
1 Select the option button Modbus Plus.
2 Click on the command button Next.
Response: The Modbus Plus Target dialog is opened.
3 Select from the list Devices Online: the adapter address you set when installing
the SA85 in the CONFIG.SYS file (Parameter /n).

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1003


Modbus Plus with EXECLoader

Protocol settings Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus Plus protocol settings:
Step Action
1 Click on the command button Scan.
Response: The nodes on the Modbus Plus network are read and displayed
graphically in the left window. A green point in the graphic indicates that the CPU
is in RUN mode. To stop the CPU continue as described in step 3.
2 Double-click on the read network node in the graphical display.
Response: The Modbus address of the node is automatically entered in the
textfeld In the text field Modbus Plus Address.
3 Click the right mouse button in the left window.
Response: A context menu with individual PLC commands is opened.
4 If the "Run" display is lit on the CPU, stop the program using the command Stop
PLC.
Response: A message window appears where you can click OK to confirm
stopping the CPU.
5 Click the command button OK, to confirm stopping the CPU.
Response: You return to the Modbus Plus Target dialog, and the green point
disappears from the graph.
6 Activate the check box Bridge, if the connection to the Modbus network node
should be made via a Modbus network using a Modbus bridge.
7 Press the appropriate Option button for your system (PLC, Local Head, Remote
I/O Drop).
8 Click on the command button Next.
Response: The Operation dialog is opened.

1004 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Modbus Plus with EXECLoader

Select EXEC file Carry out the following steps to select the EXEC file:
Step Action
1 Press the Option button Transfer EXEC to Device.
2 Click on the command button Browse....
Response: The Concept directory is opened in a standard window.
3 Double-click on the DAT directory.
Response: All available*.BIN files are displayed.
4 Click on the *.BIN file that corresponds to your CPU and the desired
programming language. See the table Loading Firmware for Momentum PLC
Types, p. 1025.
Response: The selected *.BIN file is displayed in File name: text field.
5 Click on the command button Open.
Response: You return to the dialog Operation, and the path to the selected
*.BIN file is displayed in the Filename text field.
6 Click on the command button Next.
Response: The dialog File and Device Info is opened. Information is provided
here about the selected *.BIN file and also about the PLC.
7 Click on the command button Next.
Response: The Summary dialog is opened. This gives you an overview of the
settings made for you to check.

Load EXEC file Carry out the following steps to load the EXEC file in the CPU flash RAM:
Step Action
1 Click on the command button Transfer.
Response: A message box appears warning you that all data available on the
PLC will be lost, and the configuration and program must be reloaded on the
PLC.
2 Click on the command button Yes, to continue the transfer.
Response: The Progress dialog is opened. This gives information about the
progress of the transfer in a progress bar and text.
3 Click Close once the transfer is complete.
Response: The dialog is closed, and you return to the dialog Summary.
4 Click on the command button Close, to close the EXECLoader.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1005


Modbus Plus with EXECLoader

CPU display During transfer the CPU display is as follows:


during transfer
LED Response
Run slow flashing
COM ACT not lit
Modbus + fast flashing

CPU display after After transfer the CPU display is as follows:


transfer
LED Response
Run not lit
COM ACT not lit
Modbus + fast flashing

Creating the Carry out the steps given in chapter Creating a Project, p. 47.
software
connection
Note: If you recieve an error message, close Concept and start the
BDRESET.EXE file (in the \Concept directory) to reset the SA85. Then start again
from the first step.

1006 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Startup when using Modbus Plus
with DOS Loader
O
Introduction

Overview This chapter describes loading executive data (EXEC) onto the PLC with the DOS
Loader program.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:


Chapter?
Topic Page
Quantum first startup with DOS Loader 1008
Compact first startup with DOS Loader 1011
Atrium first startup with DOS Loader 1014
Momentum first startup for IEC with DOS Loader 1017
Momentum first startup for LL984 with DOS Loader 1020

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1007


Modbus Plus with DOS Loader

Quantum first startup with DOS Loader

Introduction This section describes the first startup of Quantum when used with Modbus Plus.
The first startup is subdivided into 5 main sections:
l Start DOS Loader, p. 1008
l Define SA85 adapter, p. 1008
l Protocol settings, p. 1009
l Select EXEC file, p. 1009
l Load EXEC file, p. 1010

Start DOS Loader The procedure for launching DOS Loaders is as follows:
Step Action
1 If the CPU display "Run" is lit, stop the program with Concept (in main menu
Online).
Response: The "Run" display is no longer lit; the "Ready" is now lit.
2 Open the directory DAT (CONCEPT\DAT).
3 Double-click on the file LOADER.EXE.
Response: The installation program for the Executive file (EXEC) is started.
4 Select the option Communication Parameters.
Response: The dialog box Communication setup is opened.
5 Select the Modbus Plusoption.
Response: The Modbus Plus communication setup window is opened.

Define SA85 Carry out the following steps to define the LAN address set in the CONFIG.SYS file:
adapter
Step Action
1 Select the adapter address you set when installing the SA85 in the CONFIG.SYS
file (Parameter /n).
2 Confirm your selection with RETURN.

1008 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Modbus Plus with DOS Loader

Protocol settings Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus Plus protocol settings:
Step Action
1 Enter in Enter First Routing Path: the node address set on the CPU (using a
rotary switch on the back of the module).
2 Confirm the entry with RETURN.
Response: The option Enter second Routing Path: appears.
3 Acknowledge the option with RETURN.
Response: The window for selecting the TARGET PATH appears.
4 Select the TARGET PATH 1option.
5 Enter in Enter Software Interrupt -> the Interrupt (5c or 5d) selected in the
CONFIG.SYS file.
6 Select the ACCEPT CHANGESoption.
Response: You return to the main menu.

Select EXEC file Carry out the following steps to select the EXEC file:
Step Action
1 Select the option File Selection.
Response: The File Selection window is opened.
2 Click on the *.BIN file that corresponds to your CPU and the desired
programming language. See the table Loading Firmware for Quantum PLC
Types, p. 1024.
3 Confirm your selection with RETURN.
Response: You return to the main menu.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1009


Modbus Plus with DOS Loader

Load EXEC file Carry out the following steps to load the EXEC file in the CPU flash RAM:
Step Action
1 Select the option Load File To PLC.
Response: The Loading Process window is opened, and the warning "The
PROGRAM contents of the device being loaded could be lost after loading a new
Executive. The CONTENTS stored in the Micro H H P will always be lost after
loading a new Executive. Would you like to continue (Y/N) ? N" is displayed.
2 Acknowledge the warning with Y.
Response: The message "Node failed to enter normal mode" appears.
3 The DOWNLOAD PROGRESS window appears which shows the transfer rate.
Response: After the transfer is complete, the message "Download Operation
Successful" appears.
4 Confirm the message with RETURN.
Response: You return to the main menu.
5 Select the Exit Programoption.
Response: The DOS Loader is exited.

CPU display During transfer the CPU display is as follows:


during transfer
LED Response
Ready lit
Run slow flashing
Modbus not lit
Modbus + fast flashing

CPU display after After transfer the CPU display is as follows:


transfer
LED Response
Ready lit
Run not lit
Modbus not lit
Modbus + fast flashing

Creating the Carry out the steps given in chapter Creating a Project, p. 47.
software
connection
Note: If you recieve an error message, close Concept and start the
BDRESET.EXE file (in the \Concept directory) to reset the SA85. Then start again
from the first step.

1010 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Modbus Plus with DOS Loader

Compact first startup with DOS Loader

Introduction This section describes the first startup of Compact when used with Modbus Plus.
The first startup is subdivided into 5 main sections:
l Start DOS Loader, p. 1011
l Define SA85 adapter, p. 1011
l Protocol settings, p. 1012
l Select EXEC file, p. 1012
l Load EXEC file, p. 1013

Start DOS Loader The procedure for launching DOS Loaders is as follows:
Step Action
1 If the CPU display "Run" is lit, stop the program with Concept (in main menu
Online).
Response: The "Run" display is no longer lit; the "Ready" is now lit.
2 Open the directory DAT (CONCEPT\DAT).
3 Double-click on the file LOADER.EXE.
Response: The installation program for the Executive file (EXEC) is started.
4 Select the option Communication Parameters.
Response: The dialog box Communication setup is opened.
5 Select the Modbus Plusoption.
Response: The Modbus Plus communication setup window is opened.

Define SA85 Carry out the following steps to define the LAN address set in the CONFIG.SYS file:
adapter
Step Action
1 Select the adapter address you set when installing the SA85 in the CONFIG.SYS
file (Parameter /n).
2 Confirm your selection with RETURN.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1011


Modbus Plus with DOS Loader

Protocol settings Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus Plus protocol settings:
Step Action
1 Enter in Enter First Routing Path: the node address set on the CPU (using a
rotary switch on the back of the module).
2 Confirm the entry with RETURN.
Response: The option Enter second Routing Path: appears.
3 Acknowledge the option with RETURN.
Response: The window for selecting the TARGET PATH appears.
4 Select the TARGET PATH 1option.
5 Enter in Enter Software Interrupt -> the Interrupt (5c or 5d) selected in the
CONFIG.SYS file.
6 Select the ACCEPT CHANGESoption.
Response: You return to the main menu.

Select EXEC file Carry out the following steps to select the EXEC file:
Step Action
1 Select the option File Selection.
Response: The File Selection window is opened.
2 Select the *.BIN file CTSX201D.
3 Confirm your selection with RETURN.
Response: You return to the main menu.

1012 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Modbus Plus with DOS Loader

Load EXEC file Carry out the following steps to load the EXEC file in the CPU flash RAM:
Step Action
1 Select the option Load File To PLC.
Response: The Loading Process window is opened, and the warning "The
PROGRAM contents of the device being loaded could be lost after loading a new
Executive. The CONTENTS stored in the Micro H H P will always be lost after
loading a new Executive. Would you like to continue (Y/N) ? N" is displayed.
2 Acknowledge the warning with Y.
Response: The message "Node failed to enter normal mode" appears.
3 The DOWNLOAD PROGRESS window appears which shows the transfer rate.
Response: After the transfer is complete, the message "Download Operation
Successful" appears.
4 Confirm the message with RETURN.
Response: You return to the main menu.
5 Select the Exit Programoption.
Response: The DOS Loader is exited.

Creating the Carry out the steps given in chapter Creating a Project, p. 47.
software
connection
Note: If you recieve an error message, close Concept and start the
BDRESET.EXE file (in the \Concept directory) to reset the SA85. Then start again
from the first step.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1013


Modbus Plus with DOS Loader

Atrium first startup with DOS Loader

Introduction This section describes the first startup of Atrium when used with Modbus Plus. The
hardware requirements for loading EXEC files can be seen in the "Modicon TSX
Atrium" manual.
The first startup is subdivided into 5 main sections:
l Start DOS Loader, p. 1014
l Define SA85 adapter, p. 1014
l Protocol settings, p. 1015
l Select EXEC file, p. 1015
l Load EXEC file, p. 1016

Start DOS Loader The procedure for launching DOS Loaders is as follows:
Step Action
1 If the CPU display "Run" is lit, stop the program with Concept (in main menu
Online).
Response: The "Run" display is no longer lit; the "Ready" is now lit.
2 Open the directory DAT (CONCEPT\DAT).
3 Double-click on the file LOADER.EXE.
Response: The installation program for the Executive file (EXEC) is started.
4 Select the option Communication Parameters.
Response: The dialog box Communication setup is opened.
5 Select the Modbus Plusoption.
Response: The Modbus Plus communication setup window is opened.

Define SA85 Carry out the following steps to define the LAN address set in the CONFIG.SYS file:
adapter
Step Action
1 Select the adapter address you set when installing the SA85 in the CONFIG.SYS
file (Parameter /n).
2 Confirm your selection with RETURN.

1014 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Modbus Plus with DOS Loader

Protocol settings Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus Plus protocol settings:
Step Action
1 Enter in Enter First Routing Path: the node address set on the CPU (using a
rotary switch on the back of the module).
2 Confirm the entry with RETURN.
Response: The option Enter second Routing Path: appears.
3 Acknowledge the option with RETURN.
Response: The window for selecting the TARGET PATH appears.
4 Select the TARGET PATH 1 option.
5 Enter in Enter Software Interrupt -> the Interrupt (5c or 5d) selected in the
CONFIG.SYS file.
6 Select the ACCEPT CHANGES option.
Response: You return to the main menu.

Select EXEC file Carry out the following steps to select the EXEC file:
Step Action
1 Select the option File Selection.
Response: The File Selection window is opened.
2 Click on the *.BIN file that corresponds to your CPU and the desired
programming language. See the table Loading Firmware for Atrium PLC Types,
p. 1026.
3 Confirm your selection with RETURN.
Response: You return to the main menu.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1015


Modbus Plus with DOS Loader

Load EXEC file Carry out the following steps to load the EXEC file in the CPU flash RAM:
Step Action
1 Select the option Load File To PLC.
Response: The Loading Process window is opened, and the warning "The
PROGRAM contents of the device being loaded could be lost after loading a new
Executive. The CONTENTS stored in the Micro H H P will always be lost after
loading a new Executive. Would you like to continue (Y/N) ? N" is displayed.
2 Acknowledge the warning with Y.
Response: The message "Node failed to enter normal mode" appears.
3 The DOWNLOAD PROGRESS window appears which shows the transfer rate.
Response: After the transfer is complete, the message "Download Operation
Successful" appears.
4 Confirm the message with RETURN.
Response: You return to the main menu.
5 Select the Exit Program option.
Response: The DOS Loader is exited.

Creating the Carry out the steps given in chapter Creating a Project, p. 47.
software
connection
Note: If you recieve an error message, close Concept and start the
BDRESET.EXE file (in the \Concept directory) to reset the SA85. Then start again
from the first step.

1016 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Modbus Plus with DOS Loader

Momentum first startup for IEC with DOS Loader

Introduction This section describes the first startup of Momentum for IEC when used with
Modbus Plus.
The first startup is subdivided into 5 main sections:
l Start DOS Loader, p. 1017
l Define SA85 adapter, p. 1017
l Protocol settings, p. 1018
l Select EXEC file, p. 1018
l Load EXEC file, p. 1019

Start DOS Loader The procedure for launching DOS Loaders is as follows:
Step Action
1 If the CPU display "Run" is lit, stop the program with Concept (in main menu
Online).
Response: The "Run" display is no longer lit; the "Ready" is now lit.
2 Open the directory DAT (CONCEPT\DAT).
3 Double-click on the file LOADER.EXE.
Response: The installation program for the Executive file (EXEC) is started.
4 Select the option Communication Parameters.
Response: The dialog box Communication setup is opened.
5 Select the Modbus Plus option.
Response: The Modbus Plus communication setup window is opened.

Define SA85 Carry out the following steps to define the LAN address set in the CONFIG.SYS file:
adapter
Step Action
1 Select the adapter address you set when installing the SA85 in the CONFIG.SYS
file (Parameter /n).
2 Confirm your selection with RETURN.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1017


Modbus Plus with DOS Loader

Protocol settings Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus Plus protocol settings:
Step Action
1 Enter in Enter First Routing Path: the node address set on the CPU (using a
rotary switch on the back of the module).
2 Confirm the entry with RETURN.
Response: The option Enter second Routing Path: appears.
3 Acknowledge the option with RETURN.
Response: The window for selecting the TARGET PATH appears.
4 Select the TARGET PATH 1 option.
5 Enter in Enter Software Interrupt -> the Interrupt (5c or 5d) selected in the
CONFIG.SYS file.
6 Select the ACCEPT CHANGES option.
Response: You return to the main menu.

Select EXEC file Carry out the following steps to select the EXEC file:
Step Action
1 Select the option File Selection.
Response: The File Selection window is opened.
2 Click on the *.BIN file that corresponds to your CPU and the desired
programming language. See the table Loading Firmware for Momentum PLC
Types, p. 1025.
3 Confirm your selection with RETURN.
Response: You return to the main menu.

1018 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Modbus Plus with DOS Loader

Load EXEC file Carry out the following steps to load the EXEC file in the CPU flash RAM:
Step Action
1 Select the option Load File To PLC.
Response: The Loading Process window is opened, and the warning "The
PROGRAM contents of the device being loaded could be lost after loading a new
Executive. The CONTENTS stored in the Micro H H P will always be lost after
loading a new Executive. Would you like to continue (Y/N) ? N" is displayed.
2 Acknowledge the warning with Y.
Response: The message "Node failed to enter normal mode" appears.
3 The DOWNLOAD PROGRESS window appears which shows the transfer rate.
Response: After the transfer is complete, the message "Download Operation
Successful" appears.
4 Confirm the message with RETURN.
Response: You return to the main menu.
5 Select the Exit Program option.
Response: The DOS Loader is exited.

CPU display During transfer the CPU display is as follows:


during transfer
LED Response
Run slow flashing
COM ACT not lit
Modbus + fast flashing

CPU display after After transfer the CPU display is as follows:


transfer
LED Response
Run not lit
COM ACT not lit
Modbus + fast flashing

Creating the Carry out the steps given in chapter Creating a Project, p. 47.
software
connection
Note: If you recieve an error message, close Concept and start the
BDRESET.EXE file (in the \Concept directory) to reset the SA85. Then start again
from the first step.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1019


Modbus Plus with DOS Loader

Momentum first startup for LL984 with DOS Loader

Introduction This section describes the first startup of Momentum for LL984 when used with
Modbus Plus.

Note: Loading the EXEC file for LL984 is not necessary with a new computer, since
it is preloaded in the the CPUs Flash RAM. Loading the EXEC file for LL984 is only
necessary if you have already loaded the EXEC file for IEC, and now wish to
change.
You should always check to see if a new EXEC version has been released in the
meantime. This information and the current EXEC file can be found on our website
at www.schneiderautomation.com. You can see the currently loaded version of the
EXEC file in Concept using the Online → Online control panel... menu command.

The first startup is subdivided into 5 main sections:


l Start DOS Loader, p. 1020
l Define SA85 adapter, p. 1021
l Protocol settings, p. 1021
l Select EXEC file, p. 1021
l Load EXEC file, p. 1022

Start DOS Loader The procedure for launching DOS Loaders is as follows:
Step Action
1 If the CPU display "Run" is lit, stop the program with Concept (in main menu
Online).
Response: The "Run" display is no longer lit; the "Ready" is now lit.
2 Open the directory DAT (CONCEPT\DAT).
3 Double-click on the file LOADER.EXE.
Response: The installation program for the Executive file (EXEC) is started.
4 Select the option Communication Parameters.
Response: The dialog box Communication setup is opened.
5 Select the Modbus Plus option.
Response: The Modbus Plus communication setup window is opened.

1020 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Modbus Plus with DOS Loader

Define SA85 Carry out the following steps to define the LAN address set in the CONFIG.SYS file:
adapter
Step Action
1 Select the adapter address you set when installing the SA85 in the CONFIG.SYS
file (Parameter /n).
2 Confirm your selection with RETURN.

Protocol settings Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus Plus protocol settings:
Step Action
1 Enter in Enter First Routing Path: the node address set on the CPU (using a
rotary switch on the back of the module).
2 Confirm the entry with RETURN.
Response: The option Enter second Routing Path: appears.
3 Acknowledge the option with RETURN.
Response: The window for selecting the TARGET PATH appears.
4 Select the TARGET PATH 1 option.
5 Enter in Enter Software Interrupt -> the Interrupt (5c or 5d) selected in the
CONFIG.SYS file.
6 Select the ACCEPT CHANGES option.
Response: You return to the main menu.

Select EXEC file Carry out the following steps to select the EXEC file:
Step Action
1 Select the option File Selection.
Response: The File Selection window is opened.
2 Click on the *.BIN file that corresponds to your CPU and the desired
programming language. See the table Loading Firmware for Momentum PLC
Types, p. 1025.
3 Confirm your selection with RETURN.
Response: You return to the main menu.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1021


Modbus Plus with DOS Loader

Load EXEC file Carry out the following steps to load the EXEC file in the CPU flash RAM:
Step Action
1 Select the option Load File To PLC.
Response: The Loading Process window is opened, and the warning "The
PROGRAM contents of the device being loaded could be lost after loading a new
Executive. The CONTENTS stored in the Micro H H P will always be lost after
loading a new Executive. Would you like to continue (Y/N) ? N" is displayed.
2 Acknowledge the warning with Y.
Response: The message "Node failed to enter normal mode" appears.
3 The DOWNLOAD PROGRESS window appears which shows the transfer rate.
Response: After the transfer is complete, the message "Download Operation
Successful" appears.
4 Confirm the message with RETURN.
Response: You return to the main menu.
5 Select the Exit Program option.
Response: The DOS Loader is exited.

CPU display During transfer the CPU display is as follows:


during transfer
LED Response
Run slow flashing
COM ACT not lit
Modbus + fast flashing

CPU display after After transfer the CPU display is as follows:


transfer
LED Response
Run not lit
COM ACT not lit
Modbus + fast flashing

Creating the Carry out the steps given in chapter Creating a Project, p. 47.
software
connection
Note: If you recieve an error message, close Concept and start the
BDRESET.EXE file (in the \Concept directory) to reset the SA85. Then start again
from the first step.

1022 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


EXEC files

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1023


EXEC files

Loading Firmware

At a Glance You obtain the PLC types of the different firmware by loading the EXEC files (*.BIN).

Loading Assigning the EXEC files:


Firmware for
Quantum PLC
Types
140 CPU Q186Vxxx Q486Vxxx Q58VxxxD Q5RVxxxD QIECVxxx IEC Memory
(IEC+LL984) (IEC+LL984) (IEC+LL984) (IEC+LL984) (IEC only) * (kByte)
113 02 X - - - -
(LL984 only)
113 02S - - - - X max. 150
113 02X X - - - -
(LL984 only)
113 03 X - - - - max. 136
113 03S - - - - X max. 379
113 03X X - - - - max. 136
213 04 X - - - - max. 305
213 04S - - - - X max. 610
213 04X X - - - - max. 305
424 0x - X - - - max. 465
424 0xX - X - - - max. 465
434 12 - - X - - max. 890
534 14 - - X - - max. 2550
434 12A - - - X - max. 890
(Redesigned
CPU)
534 14A - - - X - max. 2550
(Redesigned
CPU)

Note: * After the QIECVxxx.BIN EXEC file is loaded the EMUQ.EXE loadable must
be loaded in Concept in the Loadables (PLC Configuration → Loadables...)
dialog box.

1024 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


EXEC files

Loading The Quantum CPUs not ending in X or S can be used for the LL984-Hot Standby
Firmware for operation. A special EXEC file must be downloaded onto the CPU for this. The
Quantum LL984 loadable for LL984 Hot Standby (CHS_208.DAT) is automatically installed by the
Hot Standby system.
Operation

Loading The CPUs 140 CPU 434 12 and 140 CPU 534 14 can also be used for IEC Hot
Firmware for Standby. A special EXEC file must be downloaded onto the CPU for this. The
Quantum IEC Hot loadables for IEC Hot Standby (IHSB196.EXE and CHS_208.DAT) are
Standby automatically installed by the system.
Operation

Loading The Quantum CPUs not ending in X or S can be used for the LL984- equation editor.
Firmware for A special EXEC file must be downloaded onto the CPU flash for this. This EXEC file
Quantum is not part of the Concept delivery range but can be obtained via the internet at
Equation Editor www.schneiderautomation.com.

Loading Assigning the EXEC files for Momentum PLC type (CPU 171 CCC 7x0 x0):
Firmware for
171 CCC M1Vxxx M1IECxxx IEC Memory
Momentum PLC
(LL984 only) (IEC only) (kByte)
Types
760 10-984 X -
760 10-IEC - X 256
780 10-984 X -
780 10-IEC - X 256

Assigning the EXEC files for Momentum PLC type (CPU 171 CCC 9x0 x0):
171 CCC M1EVxxx M1EWIxxx IEC Memory
(LL984 only) (IEC only) (kByte)
960 20-984 X -
960 30-984 X -
960 30-IEC - X 220
980 20-984 X -
980 30-984 X -
980 30-IEC - X 220

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1025


EXEC files

Assigning the EXEC files for Momentum PLC type (CPU 171 CCS 7x0 x0):
171 CCS M1Vxxx M1IECxxx IEC Memory
(LL984 only) (IEC only) (kByte)
700 10 X -
700/780 00 X -
760 00-984 X -
760 00-IEC - X 160

The stripped EXEC of the M1 supports up to a maximum of 44 I/O modules.

Loading The CTSXxxxD.BIN EXEC file must be downloaded onto the CPU flash for all
Firmware for Compact CPUs.
Compact PLC
Types

Loading A special EXEC file must be downloaded onto the CPU flash for each Atrium CPU
Firmware for (see table below).
Atrium PLC
180 CCO EXEC File
Types
121 01 AI38Vxxx.BIN
241 01 AI58Vxxx.BIN
241 11 AI5Vxxx.BIN
242 02 AI5Vxxx.BIN

1026 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


INI Files

Q
Introduction

Overview This chapter contains settings that can be made in several INI files.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following sections:


Chapter?
Section Topic Page
Q.1 Settings in the CONCEPT.INI File 1029
Q.2 Settings in the Projectname.INI File 1038

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1027


INI Files

1028 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


INI Files

Q.1 Settings in the CONCEPT.INI File

Introduction

Overview This section describes the settings in the CONCEPT.INI file.

What’s in this This section contains the following topics:


Section?
Topic Page
General information on the Concept INI file 1030
INI Print Settings 1031
INI Settings for Register Address Format, Variable Storage and Project Name 1032
Definition
INI Settings for Path Entries and Global DFBs [Path] [Upload] 1033
Representation of Internal Data in the INI File 1035
INI Settings for the LD Section 1035
INI Settings for Online Processing [Colors] 1036
INI Settings for Warning Messages and the Address Format 1036
INI Security Settings 1037

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1029


INI Files

General information on the Concept INI file

Introduction Software settings can be specified in the Concept INI file. Settings generated by the
program are also stored in the INI file. The INI file initially contains defaults that can
subsequently be changed.

Where is the After the installation of Concept, the CONCEPT.INI file can be found in the Windows
CONCEPT.INI file directory.
situated?

Editing the INI Various settings are given (exception: path information) and divided into several
File keywords. The lines that begin with a semicolon (;) represent comments or explain
the subsequent setting.
To edit the INI file, only change the lines without semicolons (;) or insert a new line
after the comment, in which to specify the path. Then save the modified file.

Note: Changes in the INI file are only accepted after Concept/DFB Editor/
Converter is restarted.

1030 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


INI Files

INI Print Settings

Printing FBD Defining default page break values for FBD sections:
Sections
Setting Description
DX_FBD_PORTRAIT= Specify portrait width (default value at delivery = 75)
DY_FBD_PORTRAIT= Specify portrait height (default value at delivery = 100)
DX_FBD_LANDSCAPE= Specify landscape width (default value at delivery = 100)
DY_FBD_LANDSCAPE= Specify landscape height (default value at delivery = 50)

Printing LD Defining default page break values for LD sections:


Sections
Setting Description
DX_LD_PORTRAIT= Specify portrait width (default value at delivery = 70)
DY_LD_PORTRAIT= Specify portrait height (default value at delivery = 35)
DX_LD_LANDSCAPE= Specify landscape width (default value at delivery = 105)
DY_LD_LANDSCAPE= Specify landscape height (default value at delivery = 18)

Printing SFC Defining default page break values for SFC sections:
Sections
Setting Description
DX_SFC_PORTRAIT= Specify portrait width (default value at delivery = 11)
DY_SFC_PORTRAIT= Specify portrait height (default value at delivery = 20)
DX_SFC_LANDSCAPE= Specify landscape width (default value at delivery = 15)
DY_SFC_LANDSCAPE= Specify landscape height (default value at delivery = 11)

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1031


INI Files

INI Settings for Register Address Format, Variable Storage and Project Name
Definition

Defining the Specifying the register address format (e.g. 4x reference):


register address
Setting Description
format
[Common] AddrStyle=0 0 = 400001 (default)
AddrStyle=1 1 = 4:00001 (separator)
AddrStyle=2 2 = 4:1 (compact)
AddrStyle=3 3 = QW00001 (IEC)

Defining variable Store variables in file:


storage
Setting Description
[Common]
ExportVariables=1 After a project has been downloaded and saved, all
variables are stored in a file. This file is called *.VAR and is
found in the "Project directory" → VAR → *.VAR. All
variables and their attributes are shown in this file.
ExportVariables=0 Additional storage of variables in a file does not take place.

Determining the Determining the validity of digits in project names:


validity of digits
Setting Description
in project names
[Common] ProjectPrefixDigit=1 Project names that begin with a digit are allowed.
ProjectPrefixDigit=0 Project names that begin with a digit are not allowed.

Determining the Determining the validity of located variables in DFBs:


validity of
Setting Description
located variables
in DFBs AllowLocatedVarsInDFB=1 Located variables are allowed in DFBs.
[Common] Note: This setting can also be made directly in Concept
in Options → Preferences → IEC Extensions →
Allow Located Variable in DFBs dialog box.

1032 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


INI Files

INI Settings for Path Entries and Global DFBs [Path] [Upload]

Defining the Path Defining paths:


for Global DFBs
Setting Description
and Help Files
[Path] GlobalDFBPath= Specify path for global DFBs.
HelpPath= Specify path for help files.
MBPRoutingPathFile= Specify the path for the MBPPATH.INI file.

Defining the Defining a new directory for global DFBs:


Storage of Global
Setting Description
DFBs during
Upload PreserveGlobalDFBs=1 During the upload process, a GLB directory for the global
DFBs is created in the project directory. By doing this,
existing global DFBs in the Concept DFB directory will not
be overwritten.
Advantage: No impact on other projects, as the global
DFBs in these projects are not overwritten.
Disadvantage: Multiple copies of global DFBs.
Note: Also read the sections entitled How are Global DFBs
Stored?, p. 1034 and How are Global DFBs Read?, p. 1034.
PreserveGlobalDFBs=0 During the upload process, global DFBs are downloaded
into the Concept DFB directory. Different versions of
duplicated DFBs are recognized and overwritten after being
queried.
Advantage: Only one copy of global DFBs for several
projects.
Disadvantage: Existing global DFBs whose versions differ
from the uploaded DFBs are overwritten. This can cause
other projects to be inconsistent in certain circumstances.
Note: Also read the sections entitled How are Global DFBs
Stored?, p. 1034 and How are Global DFBs Read?, p. 1034.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1033


INI Files

How are Global Storage of global DFBs depends on the settings in the INI file:
DFBs Stored?
If a project... then the global DFBs are...
is recreated, and no new DFB path has stored in the x:\CONCEPT\DFB directory.
been defined in the INI file,
is recreated, and a new DFB path has been stored in the DFB directory defined in the path.
defined in the INI file,
is uploaded, and the following settings exist stored in the DFB directory defined in the path
in the INI file: (x:\DFB).
- the [Path] option
"GlobalDFBPath=x:\DFB",
- the [Upload] option
"PreserveGlobalDFBs=0",
is uploaded, and the following settings exist stored in the project’s GLB directory.
in the INI file: Note: The GLB directory is always used first, as
- the [Path] option soon as the "PreserveGlobalDFBs=1" [Upload]
"GlobalDFBPath=x:\DFB", option is specified.
- the [Upload] option
"PreserveGlobalDFBs=1",

How are Global When a project is opened, the system looks for DFBs in the following order:
DFBs Read?
Step Description
1 The project directory is searched for an existing GLB directory.
2 The relevant settings are checked in the INI file.
For example:
[Path]: GlobalDFBPath=x:\DFB
[Upload]: PreserveGlobalDFBs=0
In this example, the DFB directory of the path defined is searched for global
DFBs.
3 The DFB directory in x:\CONCEPT\DFB is searched.

Only the global DFBs from one directory are used, i.e. if step 1 is unsuccessful, then
step 2 follows, step 3 is only performed if neither of the first two are successful.

1034 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


INI Files

Representation of Internal Data in the INI File

Representation The following keywords appear in the INI file and contain internal data according to
of Internal Data specific Concept applications:
l [Debug]
l [Configurator]
l [Search]
l [Registration]
l [Register]

INI Settings for the LD Section

Defining the Defining the contact connection to the power rail:


Contact
Setting Description
Connection
ExtendedAutoConnect=0 Only the contacts from the first column in the LD editor are
automatically connected to the power rail.
ExtendedAutoConnect=1 The contacts from the first and second columns in the LD
editor are automatically connected to the power rail.

Defining the Defining the number of columns/fields (only available when editing with keys):
Number of
Setting Description
Columns/Fields
AutowrapColumn=51 The section contains 51 columns/fields by default. It is
possible to set from 2 to 51 columns/fields.
When the last column/field is reached, the following objects
are automatically placed in the next lines. When this
happens, a link with the previous lines is established, i.e. the
objects are generated within a common rung.
Note: Since with automatic line breaking, the objects that
follow are placed in the second column/field, it is
recommended that you set the contact connection to the
power rail as ExtendedAutoConnect=0.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1035


INI Files

INI Settings for Online Processing [Colors]

Online Specify the representation of the line width and color:


Animation
Setting Description
AnimationSize= Specifying the line width of connections in FBD and LD and for
objects in LD: The default setting is 1. It can be set from 1 to 10.
ColorScheme= Specifying the color scheme for FBD, IL, ST, LD and SFC. It is
possible to make a setting from 0 to 11.
Note: An overview of the 12 different color schemes can be
found in the online help (see "Colors" in the index).

INI Settings for Warning Messages and the Address Format

Multiple Reducing the number of warnings (referring to multiple assignment) in the message
assignment window:
[Warnings]
Setting Description
Multiassignment=1 Warning given if at least one variable X and a component
X.C. was written.
Multiassignment=0 Warning given if one variable X was written at least twice as
a whole.

Address format Define address format in LOG file:


in LOG file
Setting Description
[Logging]
DD_MONTH_YYYY=1 In Concept, the month is shown with 3 characters and in
English. Example: 24-Dec-2002 14:46:24
DD_MONTH_YYYY=0 The format set in Windows is shown. The setting can be
made in Windows with: Control Panel → Regional Options
→ Date → Short date format:

1036 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


INI Files

INI Security Settings

Concept Define the character length of the Concept password (see Concept Security):
Password
Setting Description
Length [Securit]
MinPasswordLength=X The Concept password must have at least X
characters. X = 6 to 12

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1037


INI Files

Q.2 Settings in the Projectname.INI File

Introduction

Overview This section describes the settings in the Projectname.INI file.

What’s in this This section contains the following topics:


Section?
Topic Page
General Information for Projectname.INI File 1039
INI Settings for the Event Viewer [Online Events] 1039

1038 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


INI Files

General Information for Projectname.INI File

Introduction Project specific software settings can be made in the Projectname.INI file. The file
is either created automatically by Concept (after configuration changes) or can be
created by the user. Make sure that the file name always contains the respective
project names, e.g. TESTPRJ.INI. The file can contain preset values which can then
be changed.

Where is the The Projectname.INI file must be in the Concept project directory , e.g.
Projectname.INI C:\CONCEPT\TESTPRJ\TESTPRJ.INI
file situated?

Editing the INI The different settings are separated in keywords, e.g. [Configurator]. To edit the
File INI file, enter the command line with the value or the path for the keyword (see INI
Settings for the Event Viewer [Online Events], p. 1039). Then save the created or
modified file.

Note: Changes to the INI file are accepted directly by Concept.

INI Settings for the Event Viewer [Online Events]

Event Viewer Specifying a user defined error description:


[Online Events]
Setting Description
Error code="Error description" The defined error description is assigned to
Example: the error code.
-2676="Error in process D" Note: The error code is entered in the event
viewer (in the main menu Online).
Parameter value="Error The defined error description is assigned to
description" the parameter value.
Example: Note: For EFB ONLEVT, error code -2696 is
62860="Error in process B" always used. Therefore the value at the
PARAM input is selected for the assignment
of the error description.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1039


INI Files

1040 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Interrupt Processing

R
Introduction

Overview This chapter describes Interrupt processing handling with Quantum and Concept
IEC.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following sections:


Chapter?
Section Topic Page
R.1 General information about interrupt sections 1043
R.2 Interrupt section: Timer event section 1046
R.3 Interrupt section: I/O event section 1059
R.4 Modules for interrupt sections 1064

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1041


Interrupt Processing

1042 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Interrupt Processing

R.1 General information about interrupt sections

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1043


Interrupt Processing

General Information about Interrupt Processing

At a Glance Starting from Concept version 2.6 together with the Quantum modules 140-CPU-
434 A or 140-CPU-534 14 A and the 140-HLI-340-00 if required, Interrupt
processing functions are made available for the configuration of IEC conforming
programs. Special Interrupt sections allows the creation of both Time interrupts
(Timer event sections) and I/O interrupts (I/O event sections).
The following Interrupt processing is possible:
l Timer event sections
l Timer event sections enable program sections to be processed in constant,
programmable time intervals. The internal time interrupt is used for this.
To determine the time interrupts, every Timer event section is assigned a
constant time value for their execution (scan rate) in a range from 10 ms to
1023s in the Section Properties for Timer Event Sections (in the File main
menu) dialog box. Optimal runtime behavior can be configured using the
Interval, Time base and Phase parameters (moving the execution to another
cycle with the same interval). The processing of a cyclic section is immediately
stopped if a time interrupt occurs. After the Timer event section is processed,
the program execution is continued from the point where it was stopped.
Using the direct I/O blocks IMIO_IN and IMIO_OUT on these sections enables
current inputs and outputs to be processed at predetermined intervals. Time
critical problems can be easily resolved, i.e. the realization of control loops in
closed loop control systems.
The maximum permitted execution duration for a Timer event section is 20 ms!
l I/O Event sections
l I/O event sections enable program parts to be processed according to a signal
change on a specific Hardware interrupt input. The Interrupts required for this
(spontaneous I/O) are generated by the 140-HLI-340-00 module.
Every I/O event section is assigned a pin (input) on the 140-HLI-340-00
module via the Section Properties for I/O Event Sections (in the File main
menu) dialog box. Depending on the parameters set in the Configurator, the
signal change on pin (0->1, 1->0 or 0->1 and 1->0) triggers a hardware
interrupt on the CPU logic processor. The processing of a cyclic section or
Timer event section is immediately stopped if a hardware interrupt occurs.
After the I/O event section is processed, the program execution is continued
from the point where it was stopped.
Using the direct I/O blocks IMIO_IN and IMIO_OUT on these sections enables
spontaneous outputs (and further inputs) to be processed extremely quickly.
A critical event can be reacted to immediately, i.e. independently from the
cycle.
Special EFBs for Interrupt sections allow among other things, the program
dependent disable/enable of Interrupt sections.
The maximum permitted execution duration for an I/O event section is 20 ms!

1044 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Interrupt Processing

Note: The direct I/O blocks IMIO_IN and IMIO_OUT only work when the
corresponding I/O module is installed on the local backplane or backplane
expander!

Limitations Interrupt sections cannot be used together with the following functions:
l Hot Standby
l If an additional Hot Standby is configured in a project, an error message is
returned!
l ULEX/ASUP with modules 140-NOA-611-00, 140-NOA-611-10 and 140-ESI-
062-00
l The 140-NOA-622-00 can be used together with Interrupt sections instead of
the 140-NOA-611-x0.
l LL984 sections

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1045


Interrupt Processing

R.2 Interrupt section: Timer event section

Introduction

Overview This chapter contains a description for timer event sections.

What’s in this This section contains the following topics:


Section?
Topic Page
Timer Event Sections 1047
Defining the Scan Rate 1048
Defining the Phase 1049
Execution Order 1051
Operating System 1052
Examples for Parameterization 1054

1046 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Interrupt Processing

Timer Event Sections

Introduction Timer event sections are created in the same way as cyclic sections using the File
→ New Section... menu command. A maximum of 16 Timer event sections can be
created. A Timer event section can only be selected when a CPU 140-CPU-434 A
or 140 CPU 534 A is configured in the Configurator.
The CPU Hardware 140 CPU 434 12 A or 140 CPU 534 14 A is required to execute
a program with Timer event sections!
A new Timer Events group is created automatically for Timer event sections where
the Timer event sections are displayed. This group is placed in before the cyclic
sections and after the I/O Events group in the project browser (see Execution Order,
p. 1051).
Timer event sections are programmed principally as with cyclic sections (see Step
3: Creating the User Program, p. 57), only the selection of existing EFBs is limited.
Blocks (EFB) not available in Timer event sections:
l F_TRIG, R_TRIG (IEC library, group: Edge Detection)
l TOF, TON, TP (IEC library, group: Timer)
l ERR2HMI, ERRMSG (DIAGNO library, group: Diag View)
l ACT_DIA, DYN_DIA, GRP_DIA, LOCK_DIA, PRE_DIA, REA_DIA (DIAGNO
library, group: Diagnostics)
l XACT, XACT_DIA, XDYN_DIA, XGRP_DIA, XLOCK_DIA, XLOCK,
XPRE_DIA, XREA_DIA, (DIAGNO library, group: Extended)

Timer event section parameters are set in the Section Properties for Timer Event
Sections dialog box using the Interval, Time Base and Phase parameters. This
enables you to specify at what intervals (scan rate) the sections is processed.
Simultaneously created Timer event sections, for example with the same scan rate,
are processed consecutively according to the execution order and priority in the
same cycle. The runtimes of these Timer event sections are added in this cycle and
make it longer. This can be avoided by using a time delayed execution of the section
(phase) which allows a more constant total cycle time to be achieved.
After the program is started, the execution of the 1st Timer event section is delayed
by 1 second!

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1047


Interrupt Processing

Defining the Scan Rate

Description Using the entries Time Base and Interval, it is possible to define nearly any scan
rate for a timer event section.
Selectable time base:
l 10 ms
l 100 ms
l 1s

Interval values:
l whole number multiples of the time base in the range from 1 to 1023

scan rate = interval * time base


l can be defined in range from 10 ms to 1023 s
l can be set in steps that correspond to the selected time base

Examples Example 1:
Required scan rate = 0.310 s (310 ms)
Scan rate (ms) Interval Time base (ms)
310 31 10

For a scan rate of 0.31 s, define a value of 31 for the interval


Example 2:
Required scan rate = 0.3 s (300 ms)
Scan rate (ms) Interval Time base (ms)
300 30 10
300 3 100

For a scan rate of 0.3 s, a value of 30 or 3 can be defined for the interval depending
on the selected time base.
Basically, any resulting setting can be selected. However, the possible setting
should take the phase into consideration (see Defining the Phase, p. 1049).

1048 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Interrupt Processing

Defining the Phase

Description To prevent several timer event sections from being processed in the same cycle,
they can be assigned different phase values.
Phase values:
l whole number multiples of the time base
l Range from 0 to interval -1, max. 1022

Examples Example 3:

Scan rate (ms) Interval Time base (ms) Phases Max. number of time
displaced timer event
sections
300 30 10 0...29 30
300 3 100 0...2 3

Example 4:
Several timer event sections with 300 ms scan rate (see Example 3)
Interval Time base (ms) Phase
30 10 0 (defined for all sections)

Result: All sections are processed in the same cycle, i.e. the program cycle time
increased by the sum of the runtimes for all sections to be executed every 300 ms!

Example 5:
3 to 16 timer event sections with 300 ms scan rate (see Example 3)
1. Section
Interval Time base (ms) Phase
30 10 0

2. Section
Interval Time base (ms) Phase
30 10 1

3. Section
Interval Time base (ms) Phase
30 10 2

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1049


Interrupt Processing

... Section
Interval Time base (ms) Phase
30 10 ...

16. Section
Interval Time base (ms) Phase
30 10 15

Result: After the program is started, the 1st execution takes place for the
l 2nd timer event section (phase 1) after 1s+1*10 ms = 1s+10 ms
l 3rd timer event section (phase 2) after 1s+2*10 ms = 1s+20 ms
l ...
l 16. timer event section (phase 15) after 1s+15*10 ms = 1s+150 ms
l 1st timer event section (phase 0) after 1s+30*10 ms = 1s+300 ms

The second execution after the program start takes place for the
l 2nd timer event section (phase 1) after 1s+300 ms+1*10 ms = 1s+310 ms
l 3rd timer event section (phase 2) after 1s+300 ms+2*10 ms = 1s+320 ms
l ...
l 16th timer event section (phase 15) after 1s+300 ms+15*10 ms = 1s+450 ms
l 1st timer event section (phase 0) after 1s+300 ms+30*10 ms = 1s+600 ms
Each further execution of a timer event section takes place after exactly 300 ms, i.e.
the runtimes of the (max. 16) timer event sections are distributed over (max. 30
selectable) different program cycles.

Explanation of If a time base of 10 ms is selected in example 5 (phase 0...29), the maximum


example 5 number of 16 timer event sections can be executed using time displacement. That
means a time displacement between 10 and 300 ms per section can be selected in
steps of 10 ms. Each of the maximum possible 16 timer event sections is executed
in a different program cycle. Every 10...20 ms, a program cycle extended by the
execution duration of a timer event section occurs.

If a time base of 100 ms is selected in example 5 (phase 0, 1 and 2), the execution
of the max. 16 possible timer event sections is distributed over only a max. of 3 time
displaced program cycles. In these 3 program cycles, several timer event sections
must be executed one after the other. Every 100 ms, a program cycle extended by
the sum of the execution times of several timer event sections occurs!
The user should use the time base and phase to guarantee evenly distributed timer
event sections (see timing diagram).)

1050 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Interrupt Processing

Execution Order

Description When creating the first timer event section, a new Timer Events group is created
automatically in which the new section appears. This group is placed in before the
cyclic sections and after the I/O Events group in the project browser. The next timer
event section to be created is automatically always placed at the end in the group
Timer Events.

Priority Timer event sections do not have priorities set between them, i.e. they cannot be
interrupted by another timer event section.
If several timer event sections are triggered at the same time in a program cycle,
they are executed consecutively according to the order in which they were created.
However, an I/O Event Sections, p. 1060 has a higher priority and therefore
interrupts a timer event section. The interrupted timer event section is only returned
to after the execution of the I/O section is completed.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1051


Interrupt Processing

Operating System

Setting Take the following into consideration when setting parameters for timer event
parameters sections:
according to 1. The runtime for a timer event section can be a maximum of 20 ms (see also
runtime aspects Runtime Error, p. 1053).
2. The scan rate (interval * time base) must be larger than the runtime for the timer
event section.
3. Select the phase in a program cycle so that only one timer event section is
executed whenever possible.
4. Take note of the distance between phases for time base 10 ms and a runtime for
the timer event section > 10 ms! (Select a distance between phases >1 to prevent
runtime overlaps.)
5. For optimal processor load:
The execution of all timer event sections must be evenly distributed by selecting
a suitable phase using the time for the scan rates.
6. Sufficient time must be remaining for the execution of the cyclic sections so that
the cyclic I/O is handled in acceptable intervals!
7. Execution of inputs and outputs as direct I/O modules IMIO_IN and IMIO_OUT in
the timer event section. For example if the uneven intervals for the cyclic I/O are
not sufficient to create a control loop.
8. Create a timing diagram (see Examples for Parameterization, p. 1054):
This makes it possible to determine the optimal phase, as well as the actual time
intervals for the cyclic I/O.
9. Do not create all control loops as timer event sections:
Control loops can also be programmed as cyclic sections using the necessary
high-speed CPUs and the SAMPLETM module!

1052 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Interrupt Processing

Runtime Error Any errors that occur when processing the program, e.g. runtime is exceeded,
overflow, etc. are shown in a table in the Event Sections dialog box (in the Online
main menu).
The following table is based on Example 4: Control loops with different scan rates,
with phases, constant cycle time, p. 1058 in section "Examples for Setting
Parameters":
Event Sections - 17.03.02 13:41:18

Section Name Left Interval+Phase Status Events Executions Overflows Net Gross
RK_1 42 80+0 00000100 1.952 1.952 0 43 43
RK_2 2 100+10 00000100 1.480 1.480 0 35 35
RK_3 62 70+20 00000100 2.143 2.143 0 42 42
RK_4 22 130+20 00000100 1.113 1.113 0 43 43

Generated Load IO Event Sections Timer Sections

Last: 33%
Maximum: 49%
Refresh Close Help

Runtime If the runtime for a timer event section is >20 ms, the following process is carried out:
exceeded for a 1. In the Event Sections table, status bit 2 is set (watchdog timer has expired)
timer event 2. The timer event section is disabled.
section Carry out the following steps to detect when the runtime is exceeded in timer event
sections:
Step Action
1 Using the ISECT_STAT function block.
2 Activate the mode to display enable states in the project browser. Then the
symbols for the disabled sections are marked red.
3 Call the status table in Online → Event Sections.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1053


Interrupt Processing

Carry out the following steps if an timer event section is disabled:


Step Action
1 Reduce the runtime of the timer event section to <20 ms.
2 Enabling a timer event section Examples:
l In the project browser, activate the Switch enable state command.
l Programming: 0 -> sectname.disable
Caution: If the runtime error still occurs, the timer event section is not
processed even though the section symbol is marked green in the project
browser!
3 After enabling the timer event section, the RESET function block parameter on
the ISECT_STAT EFB must be set. Only then are current values shown in the
status table (Online → Event Sections).

Examples for Parameterization

Introduction The examples shown here with the values given represent theoretical information
and should mainly be used to clarify the effects of various phase values and
distances between phases on the entire system. With (preset) values determined
using timing diagrams and tests, the user can establish a predictive view and reach
an optimal distribution of the timer event sections and prevent runtime overflows.

1054 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Interrupt Processing

Example 1: Preset values:


Control loops
Preset Scan rate Time base Interval Runtime Phase
with the same
values
scan rates, all
phases = 0 Cyclic 30
Program
RK 1 120 ms 10 ms 12 5 0
RK 2 120 ms 10 ms 12 <20 0
RK 3 120 ms 10 ms 12 15 0
RK 4 120 ms 10 ms 12 10 0
RK 5 120 ms 10 ms 12 10 0

Timing diagram (times in ms)

5 5

RK1

20 20
RK2

15 15
RK3

10 10
RK4

10 10
RK5

30 30 30 30
Zykl. Pr.

Ges.Zykl. 90 30 90 30

RK Control loop
Cyclic Program Cyclic Program
Total Cycle Time Total Cycle Time

Note: The total cycle time switches between 90 and 30 ms.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1055


Interrupt Processing

Example 2: Preset values:


Control loops
Preset Scan rate Time base Interval Runtime Minimum Phase
with the same
values distance
scan rates, with
between
phases,
phases
minimum
distance Cyclic 30
between phases Program
RK 1 120 ms 10 ms 12 5 0
RK 2 120 ms 10 ms 12 <20 5<10 ms->+1 1
RK 3 120 ms 10 ms 12 15 20<30 ms->+3 4
RK 4 120 ms 10 ms 12 10 15<20 ms->+2 6
RK 5 120 ms 10 ms 12 10 10<20 ms->+2 8

Timing diagram (times in ms)


0 120 240
5 5

RK1

20 20
RK2

15 15
RK3

10 10
RK4

10 10
RK5

Zykl. Pr.

Ges.Zykl.
75 45 80 40

RK Control loop
Cyclic Program Cyclic Program
Total Cycle Time Total Cycle Time

Note: The total cycle time (except for the first cycle) switches between 80 and 40
ms.

1056 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Interrupt Processing

Example 3: Preset values:


Control loops
Preset Scan rate Time base Interval Runtime Phase
with the same
values
scan rates, with
phases, constant Cyclic 30
cycle time Program
RK 1 120 ms 10 ms 12 5 0
RK 2 120 ms 10 ms 12 <20 6
RK 3 120 ms 10 ms 12 15 2
RK 4 120 ms 10 ms 12 10 4
RK 5 120 ms 10 ms 12 10 10

Timing diagram (times in ms)


0 120 240
5 5

RK1

20 20
RK2

15 15
RK3

10 10
RK4

10 10
RK5

Zykl. Pr.

Ges.Zykl.
55 65 60 60

RK Control loop
Cyclic Program Cyclic Program
Total Cycle Time Total Cycle Time

Note: The total cycle time (except for the first cycle) is always 60 ms.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1057


Interrupt Processing

Example 4: Preset values:


Control loops
Preset Scan rate Time base Interval Runtime Phase
with different
values
scan rates, with
phases, constant Cyclic 30
cycle time Program
RK 1 80 ms 10 ms 8 5 0
RK 2 100 ms 10 ms 10 5 1
RK 3 70 ms 10 ms 7 5 2
RK 4 130 ms 10 ms 13 5 2

Timing diagram (times in ms)


0 100 200 300

RK1 80 80 80 80

RK2 100 100 100 100

RK3 70 70 70 70 70

RK4 <130 130 130

Zykl. Pr.

Ges.Zykl. 45 30 45 30 45 30 40 40 40

RK Control loop
Cyclic Program Cyclic Program
Total Cycle Time Total Cycle Time

Note: The timing diagram beginning here shows a favorable distribution of the
execution of all sections. The cyclic I/O is also handled in predictable intervals.
However, overlapping of individual runtimes cannot be ruled out.

1058 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Interrupt Processing

R.3 Interrupt section: I/O event section

Introduction

Overview This chapter contains a description for I/O event sections.

What’s in this This section contains the following topics:


Section?
Topic Page
I/O Event Sections 1060
Priority 1061
Runtime Error 1062

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1059


Interrupt Processing

I/O Event Sections

Introduction An I/O event section is carried out depending on the hardware interrupts of a 140-
HLI-340-00.
The 140-HLI-340-00 module is equipped with 16 inputs that can be configured as
either fast inputs or interrupt inputs. Only interrupt inputs can trigger the execution
of an I/O event section with the edge defined. Parameters must be set for the 140-
HLI-340-00 module in the PLC Configuration accordingly.
I/O event sections are created in the same way as cyclic sections using the File →
New Section... menu command. An I/O event section can only be selected when a
CPU 140-CPU-434 oder 140-CPU-534 is configured in the Configurator. The CPU
Hardware 140 CPU 434 12 A or 140 CPU 534 14 A is required to execute a program
with I/O event sections!
A maximum of 64 I/O event sections can be created. The required hardware
interrupts can be created by more than 4 HLI modules.
When creating the first I/O event section, a new I/O Events group is created
automatically in which the new section appears. The I/O Events group appears first
in the project browser, i.e. before the Timer Events groups and the cyclic sections.
Every additional I/O event section to be created is automatically placed in the I/O
Events group according to their priority (from top to bottom).
An execution order has no relevance for I/O event sections, since these sections can
only be processed when a hardware interrupt occurs.
An I/O event section can only be interrupted by hardware interrupts with higher
Priority, p. 1061.
I/O event sections are programmed principally as with cyclic sections (see Step 3:
Creating the User Program, p. 57), only the selection of existing EFBs is limited.
Blocks (EFB) not available in Timer event sections:
l F_TRIG, R_TRIG (IEC library, group: Edge Detection)
l TOF, TON, TP (IEC library, group: Timer)
l ERR2HMI, ERRMSG (DIAGNO library, group: Diag View)
l ACT_DIA, DYN_DIA, GRP_DIA, LOCK_DIA, PRE_DIA, REA_DIA (DIAGNO
library, group: Diagnostics)
l XACT, XACT_DIA, XDYN_DIA, XGRP_DIA, XLOCK_DIA, XLOCK,
XPRE_DIA, XREA_DIA, (DIAGNO library, group: Extended)

I/O event section parameters are set in the Section Properties for I/O Event
Sections dialog box using the Slot and Input Pin parameters. The Slot entry
defines the slot on the local backplane when the 140-HLI-340-00 module is
positioned for the triggered interrupt. The Input Pin defines pin number (1 to 16) for
the 140-HLI-340-00 inputs that trigger the section processing.

1060 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Interrupt Processing

Priority

Description I/O event sections have priorities set between them. An active I/O event section can
be interrupted by an I/O event section with higher priority. The interrupted section is
continued after the section with higher priority has been processed.
If other interrupts with lower priority occur while processing an I/O event section, the
active I/O event section is not interrupted. However, these interrupt signals are
saved and the respective sections are processed according to their priority when the
active I/O event section is complete. If an interrupt which is saved but not yet
processed occurs again, the second interrupt is lost . The overflow counter is
incremented (see the table in the Event Sections dialog box in the Online main
menu).
The priority of an I/O event section is determined by the position of an input pin on
the 140-HLI-340-00 module in the local backplane. Therefore:
The lower the slot address and the lower the pin number, the higher the priority. The
slot and the input pin number of an I/O event section is assigned in the Section
Properties for I/O Event Sections dialog box.
Example 1:
Priority Slot Input Pin
Higher 1 5
Lower 6 1

Example 2:
Priority Slot Input Pin
Higher 3 5
Lower 3 6

Note: I/O event sections can be interrupted over several priority levels (interrupt in
interrupt), therefore the total cycle can be greatly increased.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1061


Interrupt Processing

Runtime Error

Description Any errors that occur when processing the program, e.g. runtime is exceeded,
overflow, etc. are shown in a table in the Event Sections dialog box (in the Online
main menu).
Table in the dialog box Event Sections:
Event Sections - 17.03.02 16:48:36

Section Name Position Status Events Executions Overflows Net Gross


Spont_i1 06:01 00000100 570 570 0 14 14
Spont_i2 06:02 00000100 285 285 0 29 29
Spont_i3 06:03 00000100 285 285 0 15 15
Spont_i4 06:04 00000100 285 285 0 30 30

Generated Load IO Event Sections Timer Sections

Last: 0%
Maximum: 0%
Refresh Close Help

Runtime If the runtime for a timer event section is >20 ms, the following process is carried out:
exceeded for an 1. In the Event Sections table, status bit 2 is set (watchdog timer has expired)
I/O event section 2. The I/O event section is disabled.
Carry out the following steps to detect when the runtime is exceeded in I/O event
sections:
Step Action
1 Using the ISECT_STAT function block.
2 Activate the mode to display enable states in the project browser. Then the
symbols for the disabled sections are marked red.
3 Call the status table in Online → Event Sections.

1062 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Interrupt Processing

Carry out the following steps if an I/O event section is disabled:


Step Action
1 Reduce the runtime of the I/O event section to <20 ms.
2 Enable the I/O event section. Examples:
l In the project browser, activate the Switch enable state command.
l Programming: 0 -> sectname.disable
Caution: If the runtime error still occurs, the I/O event section is not
processed even though the section symbol is marked green in the project
browser!
3 After enabling the I/O event section, the RESET function block parameter on the
ISECT_STAT EFB must be set. Only then are current values shown in the status
table (Online → Event Sections).

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1063


Interrupt Processing

R.4 Modules for interrupt sections

1064 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Interrupt Processing

EFBs for Interrupt Sections

EFBs to disable The following function blocks are available:


and enable l ISECT_OFF
interrupt l The ISECT_OFF block can be used to disable a specific I/O event section or
sections Timer event section, i.e. the interrupt has no effect on this Interrupt section.
The name of the section to be disabled is defined by the SECT_CTRL data
type variable entered at the input. This variable is automatically created for
each section.
l ISECT_ON
l The ISECT_ON block can be used to enable a specific I/O event section or
Timer event section, i.e. the interrupt has effect on this Interrupt section again.
The name of the section to be enabled is defined by the SECT_CTRL data
type variable entered at the input. This variable is automatically created for
each section.
l I_LOCK
l The I_LOCK block is used to disable all I/O event sections or Timer event
sections, i.e. the interrupts have no effect on Interrupt sections.
l I_UNLOCK
l The I_UNLOCK block is used to enable all I/O event sections or Timer event
sections, i.e. the interrupts have effect on the respective Interrupt sections.

Other EFBs for The following function blocks are available:


Interrupt l ISECT_STAT
sections l With the ISECT_STAT block, the status (see Event Sectionsdialog box) of a
section can be read and evaluated by the program.
l I_MOVE
l The I_MOVE block prevents an interruption of value assignments from an
input to an output by an interrupt. This means the processing of an I_MOVE is
not interrupted by an interrupt. This enables data consistency between an
input and an output if the variable is used both in cyclic as well as in interrupt
sections. The MOVE block has the same function, but value assignment is not
interrupt protected (for further details see the block description).

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1065


Interrupt Processing

1066 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Automatic Connection to the PLC

S
At a Glance

Overview This chapter is a description of both methods of automatically connecting with a


PLC.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:


Chapter?
Topic Page
Automatic Connection with Command Line Parameters (Modbus, Modbus +, 1068
TCP/IP)
Automatic Connection with the CCLaunch Tool (Modbus Plus) 1071

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1067


Automatic Connection to the PLC

Automatic Connection with Command Line Parameters (Modbus, Modbus +,


TCP/IP)

At a Glance You can make a connection with any PLC automatically by using the command line
of the Windows dialog Create Shortcut and entering the Modbus Plus Routing path.

Note: If, in dialog Common Preferences option Connect to controller at Startup


(Options → Preferences → Common...) is activated then the extended
parameters for the connection to the PLC are priority.

The command line parameters for automatically connecting are added to the end of
the command line parameters for the project symbol (see following image).
Dialog box: Create connection
Create connection

Enter the path and name of the object, for


which the connection should be created, or try
MS
DOS
xxx it using the "Browse" button.
xxx
xxx Command line:
xxx C:\Concept\Concept.exe plant1.prj /c=mbp:pm,41.0.0.0.0
xxx Browse...
xxx xxx
xxx
xxx
Windows NT

xxx
?
xxx
xxx
xxx

< Previous Next > Cancel

1068 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Automatic Connection to the PLC

Creating an The procedure for connecting automatically using command line parameters is as
Automatic follows:
Connection with
Step Action
Command Line
Parameters 1 Go to Start → Settings → Taskbar... and open the dialog Taskbar Properties.
2 In the register Start Menu Programs/Expanded (Win2000), select the Add...
command button.
3 In the Create Shortcut dialog box, select the Browse... command button.
4 In the Browse dialog box, go to the Concept installation path and double-click
on the file CONCEPT.EXE.
Reaction: The Browse dialog box is closed and the file CONCEPT.EXE
including the path is entered in the command line: E.g.
C:\CONCEPT\CONCEPT.EXE.
5 Now, add the project name of the project in the command line, e.g.
C:\CONCEPT\CONCEPT.EXE PLANT1.PRJ.
6 Now add the Modbus Plus-Routing path of the PLC to the command line, e.g.
C:\CONCEPT\CONCEPT.EXE PLANT1.PRJ /c=mbp : 41.0.0.0.0 and confirm
your entries with the Next >button.
Note: A definition of the various command line parameters can be found in
section Definition of Command Line Parameters, p. 1070.
7 In the Select program group dialog box, select an existing program group for
the symbol or create a new one using New folder... .
Confirm the entry using the Next >command button.
8 In the Select program designation dialog box, select the project name and
confirm using the Finish command button.
9 Close the Taskbar Properties dialog box with OK.
Reaction: The properties dialog box is closed and the project symbol is available
in the start menu of the folder you selected.
10 Open the folder with the project symbol in the Start menu.
Select the project symbol and click the right mouse button.
Reaction: A menu window is opened.
11 Select the Properties command button.
Reaction: The "Project Symbol Name" Properties dialog box is opened.
12 Go to the Connection register and complete the command line Working
directory/Target (Win2000) with the name of the project directory, e.g.
C:\CONCEPT\PROJECTS.
Confirm the entry using the Apply command button.
13 Then exit the dialog box by selecting OK.
14 Open the project by clicking on the project symbol.
Reaction: Concept reads the defined Modbus Plus Routing path and
automatically creates a connection to the PLC.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1069


Automatic Connection to the PLC

Definition of The command line parameters contain the PLC address and the protocol type
Command Line (Modbus, Modbus Plus, TCP/IP).
Parameters
Command line parameters for Modbus:
Protocol type Command line Meaning
parameters
Modbus /c=[x,]mb:p[, m] x - Serial connection (COM): 1 - 4, optional, default is 1
p - PLC address: 0 - 255
m - Modus for device communication: RTU/ASCII, optional, default is
RTU

Note: The settings (Baud Rate, Data Bits, Parity, Stop Bits) for the
serial connection (COM) are made in the Connect to PLC dialog box.

Example:
c:\concept\concept.exe plant1.prj /c=2,mb:001,ASCII

Command line parameters for Modbus Plus:


Protocol type Command line parameters Meaning
Modbus Plus /c=[x,]mbp: n.n.n.n.n x - Modbus Plus connection: 0 -1, optional, default is 0
n - Routing path (PLC address): 0 - 64

Example:
c:\concept\concept.exe plant1.prj /c=mbp:41.0.0.0.0

Command line parameters for TCP/IP:


Protocol type Command line Meaning
parameters
TCP/IP /c=[x,]mbt:m.m.m.m x - Bridge Modbus Plus Index: 0 -255, optional, default is 0
/c=[x,]mbt:HostName m - IP address: 0 - 255
HostName - e.g. for the PLCSIM32, the HostName = Localhost

Example:
c:\concept\concept.exe plant1.prj /c=mbt:139.158.107.9
c:\concept\concept.exe plant.prj /c=mbt:Localhost

Disadvantage In a large Modbus Plus Network, a separate command line is required for each PLC.
If an address changes at any time (e.g. Bridge address the command line
parameters must be redone for every programming device that makes access.

1070 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Automatic Connection to the PLC

Automatic Connection with the CCLaunch Tool (Modbus Plus)

At a Glance You can use the CCLaunch tool to create a complete Routing path, which then
creates a connection to the PLC in the corresponding Modbus Plus segment
automatically.
The CCLaunch tool can also only be used to open the assigned project for making
changes.
The CCLaunch tool is executed with the CCLAUNCH.EXE file in the Concept
directory.

Selection The CCLaunch tool can only be used if a topology file exists and the path is entered
condition in the CCLaunch tool.

Creating an Create an ASCII file (topology file) for the automatic connection to the PLC and
Automatic name it e.g. CCLEXAMP.TXT. Define all Routing paths and segment names of the
Connection entire project network in this *.TXT file. Then, copy the file to your server so that
every programming device can access it. Compared with a command line parameter
entry (See Automatic Connection with Command Line Parameters (Modbus,
Modbus +, TCP/IP), p. 1068), you have the advantage of only having to change one
file when an address (e.g. bridge address) changes in the routing path.
To activate the automatic connection, start the CCLaunch tool. Enter the path of the
topology file, the path for the projects and the address of the Modbus Plus adapter
one time only. The definitions will then remain until they are changed again by the
user. Enter the start segment that must be defined for the programming device (PC).
Define the target segment that must be defined for the PLC to which it will be
connected as another setting. Then select the PLC that you have defined in the
topology file.

Note: For creating the automatic connection, the check box Autoconnect to PLC
(Options → Preferences → Common...) must be activated.

These entries allow CCLaunch to create a complete Routing path, which then
creates a connection to the PLC automatically.

Opening To open the assigned project directly, define the same settings as for the automatic
Associated connection. Then activate the check box Open Associated Project.
Project
Note: If you only want to open this project, deactivate the check box Autoconnect
to PLC.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1071


Automatic Connection to the PLC

Creating the The topology file (*.TXT) only has to be created one time and it contains the
Topology File description of the entire Modbus Plus network as well as an option description of the
(*.TXT) projects assigned to the PLC. These can then be stored centrally on the network/
server.
The topology file (*.TXT) contains the two keywords [Segment] and [Routing]. The
definition of the individual segment begins with keyword [Segment]. The definition of
each individual Routing path begins with the keyword [Routing].

Note: For the definition of the PLC, the PLC name must be unique throughout the
entire Modbus Plus network.

Example:
[Segment]="Segment name"
"PLC Name"="MB+Address" : "Project name" (optional)
"PLC Name"="MB+Address" : "Project name" (optional)
[Routing]SegmentX="Routing path"
[Routing]SegmentY="Routing path"

1072 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Automatic Connection to the PLC

Example of a Example of a Modbus Plus network with different segments:


Topology File
PLC2
PLC5
(*.TXT) PLC1
PLC6
PLC3

14
25 23
3 17
33
20
A B 12
PLC7
PLC4 6 2

MB+ Bridge MB+ Bridge


21
4 44

C 63

9 48
11
MB+ Bridge PLC8 MB+ Bridge

10 37

53 D E
29 5
38 19
PLC9 PLC10 PLC11 PLC12

Ethernet TCP/IP
A Segment A
B Segment B
C Segment C
D Segment D
E Segment E

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1073


Automatic Connection to the PLC

Contents of the Topology File (*.TXT)


[Segment]=SegmentA
PLC1 = 25 : Project 1
PLC2 = 14 : Project 2
PLC3 = 3 : Project 3
PLC4 = 20 : Project 4
[Routing] SegmentB=6.44
[Routing] SegmentC=6
[Routing] SegmentD=6.9
[Routing] SegmentE=6.48
[Segment]=SegmentB
PLC5 = 23 : Project 5
PLC6 = 17 : Project 6
[Routing] SegmentA=2.4
[Routing] SegmentC=2
[Routing] SegmentD=2.9
[Routing] SegmentE=2.48
[Segment]=SegmentC
PLC7 = 21 : Project 7
PLC8 = 11 : Project 8
[Routing] SegmentA=4
[Routing] SegmentB=44
[Routing] SegmentD=9
[Routing] SegmentE=48
[Segment]=SegmentD
PLC9 = 38 : Project 9
PLC10 = 19: Project 10
[Routing] SegmentA=10.4
[Routing] SegmentB=10.44
[Routing] SegmentC=10
[Routing] SegmentE=10.48
[Segment]=SegmentE
PLC11 = 21: Project 11
PLC12 = 11: Project 12
[Routing] SegmentA=37.4
[Routing] SegmentB=37.44
[Routing] SegmentC=37
[Routing] SegmentD=37.9

1074 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Automatic Connection to the PLC

Editing with the After creating the topology file (*.TXT), execute the following steps in the CCLaunch
CCLaunch Tool tool for the automatic connection:
Step Action
1 Double click on the CCLAUNCH.EXE file in the Concept directory.
Reaction: The CCLaunch tool is started.
2 Go to the Settings tab and define the path for the topology file (*.TXT) and the
project path.
Note: This is normally only defined once since this path should not have to be
changed. This means that these settings only have to be made once and they
remain saved until you change them for whatever reason.
Example:
Topology file: C:\CONCEPT\CONNECT\CCLEXAMP.TXT
Path for projects: C:\CONCEPT\TESTPRJ\
3 Select the hardware address for the network connection in the Modbus+ Port
field.
Note: Whether this is port 0 or port 1 can be determined from the Windows
system settings.
4 Select tab Select PLC, and enter the start segment, the target segment and the
PLC that you want to connect with for the Routing path.
Example:
Start Segment: SegmentB
Dest. Segment: SegmentE
PLC: PLC8
In this example, the programming device is in segment B and should create a
connection to the PLC with the name "PLC8" in segment E.
5 Go to the Start Options area and activate the check box Autoconnect to PLC.
6 Press the Start Concept button.
Reaction: Concept reads the created Routing path and automatically creates a
connection to the PLC.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1075


Automatic Connection to the PLC

1076 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Glossary

Active Window The window, which is currently selected. Only one window can be active at any
given time. When a window is active, the color of the title bar changes, so that it is
distinguishable from the other windows. Unselected windows are inactive.

Actual Current connected Input / Output Parameters.


Parameters

Addresses (Direct) addresses are memory ranges in the PLC. They are located in the State
RAM and can be assigned Input/Output modules.
The display/entry of direct addresses is possible in the following formats:
l Standard Format (400001)
l Separator Format (4:00001)
l Compact format (4:1)
l IEC Format (QW1)

ANL_IN ANL_IN stands for the "Analog Input" data type and is used when processing analog
values. The 3x-References for the configured analog input module, which were
specified in the I/O component list, are automatically assigned data types and
should therefore only be occupied with Unlocated Variables.

ANL_OUT ANL_OUT stands for the "Analog Output" data type and is used when processing
analog values. The 4x-References for the configured analog input module, which
were specified in the I/O component list, are automatically assigned data types and
should therefore only be occupied with Unlocated Variables.

ANY In the above version "ANY" covers the BOOL, BYTE, DINT, INT, REAL, UDINT,
UINT, TIME and WORD elementary data types and related Derived Data Types.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1077


Glossary

ANY_BIT In the above version "ANY_BIT" covers the BOOL, BYTE and WORD data types.

ANY_ELEM In the above version "ANY_ELEM" covers the BOOL, BYTE, DINT, INT, REAL,
UDINT, UINT, TIME and WORD data types.

ANY_INT In the above version "ANY_INT" covers the DINT, INT, UDINT and UINT data types.

ANY_NUM In the above version "ANY_NUM" covers the DINT, INT, REAL, UDINT and UINT
data types.

ANY_REAL In the above version "ANY_REAL" covers the REAL data type.

Application The window containing the workspace, menu bar and the tool bar for the application
Window program. The name of the application program appears in the title bar. An
application window can contain several Document windows. In Concept the
application window corresponds to a Project.

Argument Synonymous with Actual parameters.

ASCII-Mode The ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) mode is used to
communicate with various host devices. ASCII works with 7 data bits.

Atrium The PC based Controller is located on a standard AT board, and can be operated
within a host computer in an ISA bus slot. The module has a motherboard (requiring
SA85 driver) with two slots for PC104 daughter-boards. In this way, one PC104
daughter-board is used as a CPU and the other as the INTERBUS controller.

Backup file The backup file is a copy of the last Source coding file. The name of this backup file
(Concept-EFB) is "backup??.c" (this is assuming that you never have more than 100 copies of the
source coding file). The first backup file has the name "backup00.c". If you have
made alterations to the Definitions file, which do not cause any changes to the EFB
interface, the generation of a backup file can be stopped by editing the source
coding file (Objects → Source). If a backup file is created, the source file can be
entered as the name.

1078 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Glossary

Base 16 literals Base 16 literals are used to input whole number values into the hexadecimalsystem.
The base must be denoted using the prefix 16#. The values can not have any signs
(+/-). Single underscores ( _ ) between numbers are not significant.

Example
16#F_F or 16#FF (decimal 255)
16#E_0 or 16#E0 (decimal 224)

Base 2 literals Base 2 literals are used to input whole number values into the dualsystem. The base
must be denoted using the prefix 2#. The values can not have any signs (+/-). Single
underscores ( _ ) between numbers are not significant.

Example
2#1111_1111 or 2#11111111 (decimal 255)
2#1110_0000 or 2#11100000 (decimal 224)

Base 8 literals Base 8 literals are used to input whole number values into the octosystem. The base
must be denoted using the prefix 8#. The values can not have any signs (+/-). Single
underscores ( _ ) between numbers are not significant.

Example
8#3_77 or 8#377 (decimal 255)
8#34_0 or 8#340 (decimal 224)

Binary Connections between FFB outputs and inputs with the data type BOOL.
Connections

Bitsequence A data element, which consists of one or more bits.

BOOL BOOL stands for the data type "boolean". The length of the data element is 1 bit
(occupies 1 byte in the memory). The value range for the variables of this data type
is 0 (FALSE) and 1 (TRUE).

Bridge A bridge is a device, which connects networks. It enables communication between


nodes on two networks. Each network has its own token rotation sequence - the
token is not transmitted via the bridge.

BYTE BYTE stands for the data type "bit sequence 8". Entries are made as base 2 literal,
base 8 literal or base 16 literal. The length of the data element is 8 bits. A numerical
value range can not be assigned to this data type.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1079


Glossary

Clipboard The clipboard is a temporary memory for cut or copied objects. These objects can
be entered in sections. The contents of the clipboard are overwritten with each new
cut or copy.

Coil A coil is a LD element which transfers the status of the horizontal short on its left
side, unchanged, to the horizontal short on its right side. In doing this, the status is
saved in the relevant variable/direct address.

Compact format The first digit (the Reference) is separated from the address that follows by a colon
(4:1) (:) where the leading zeros are not specified.

Constants Constants are Unlocated variables, which are allocated a value that cannot be
modified by the logic program (write protected).

Contact A contact is a LD element, which transfers a status on the horizontal link to its right
side. This status comes from the boolean AND link of the status of the horizontal link
on the left side, with the status of the relevant variable/direct address. A contact
does not change the value of the relevant variable/direct address.

Data transfer Settings which determine how information is transferred from your programming
settings device to the PLC.

Data Types The overview shows the data type hierarchy, as used for inputs and outputs of
functions and function blocks. Generic data types are denoted using the prefix
"ANY".
l ANY_ELEM
l ANY_NUM
ANY_REAL (REAL)
ANY_INT (DINT, INT, UDINT, UINT)
l ANY_BIT (BOOL, BYTE, WORD)
l TIME
l System Data types (IEC Extensions)
l Derived (from "ANY" data types)

1080 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Glossary

DCP I/O drop A remote network with a super-ordinate PLC can be controlled using a Distributed
Control Processor (D908). When using a D908 with remote PLC, the super-ordinate
PLC considers the remote PLC as a remote I/O drop. The D908 and the remote PLC
communicate via the system bus, whereby a high performance is achieved with
minimum effect on the cycle time. The data exchange between the D908 and the
super-ordinate PLC takes place via the remote I/O bus at 1.5Mb per second. A
super-ordinate PLC can support up to 31 D908 processors (addresses 2-32).

DDE (Dynamic The DDE interface enables a dynamic data exchange between two programs in
Data Exchange) Windows. The user can also use the DDE interface in the extended monitor to
invoke their own display applications. With this interface, the user (i.e. the DDE
client) can not only read data from the extended monitor (DDE server), but also write
data to the PLC via the server. The user can therefore alter data directly in the PLC,
while monitoring and analyzing results. When using this interface, the user can
create their own "Graphic Tool", "Face Plate" or "Tuning Tool" and integrate into the
system. The tools can be written in any language, i.e. Visual Basic, Visual C++,
which supports DDE. The tools are invoked, when the user presses one of the
buttons in the Extended Monitor dialog field. Concept Graphic Tool: Configuration
signals can be displayed as a timing diagram using the DDE connection between
Concept and Concept Graphic Tool.

Declaration Mechanism for specifying the definition of a language element. A declaration usually
covers the connection of an identifier to a language element and the assignment of
attributes such as data types and algorithms.

Definitions file The definitions file contains general descriptive information on the selected EFB and
(Concept-EFB) its formal parameters.

Derived Data Derived data types are data types, which are derived from Elementary Data Types
Type and/or other derived data types. The definition of derived data types is found in the
Concept data type editor.
A distinction is made between global data types and local data types.

Derived Function A derived function block represents the invocation of a derived function block type.
Block (DFB) Details of the graphic form of the invocation can be found in the "Functional block
(instance)". In contrast to the invocation of EFB types, invocations of DFB types are
denoted by double vertical lines on the left and right hand side of the rectangular
block symbol.
The body of a derived function block type is designed using FBD language, LD
language, ST language, IL language, however, this is only the case in the current
version of the programming system. Furthermore, derived functions can not yet be
defined in the current version.
A distinction is made between local and global DFBs.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1081


Glossary

Device Address The device address is used to uniquely denote a network device in the routing path.
The address is set on the device directly, e.g. using the rotary switch on the back of
the modules.

DFB Code The DFB code is the section’s DFB code, which can be executed. The size of the
DFB code is mainly dependant upon the number of blocks in the section.

DFB instance The DFB instance data is internal data from the derived function block used in the
data program.

DINT DINT stands for the data type "double length whole number (double integer)".
Entries are made as integer literal, base 2 literal, basis 8 literal or base 16 literal. The
length of the data element is 32 bits. The value range for variables of this datatype
reaches from -2 exp (31) to 2 exp (31) -1.

Direct A method of displaying variables in the PLC program, from which the assignment to
Representation the logical memory can be directly - and indirectly to the physical memory - derived.

Document A window within an application window. Several document windows can be open at
Window the same time in an application window. However, only one document window can
ever be active. Document windows in Concept are, for example, sections, the
message window, the reference data editor and the PLC configuration.

DP (PROFIBUS) DP = Remote Peripheral

Dummy An empty file, which consists of a text heading with general file information, such as
author, date of creation, EFB designation etc. The user must complete this dummy
file with further entries.

DX Zoom This property enables the user to connect to a programming object, to monitor and,
if necessary change, its data value.

EFB code The EFB code is the section’s EFB code, which can be executed. In addition the
used EFBs count in DFBs.

Elementary Identifier for Functions or Function blocks, whose type definitions are not formulated
functions/ in one of the IEC languages, i.e. whose body for example can not be modified with
function blocks the DFB editor (Concept-DFB). EFB types are programmed in "C" and are prepared
(EFB) in a pre-compiled form using libraries.

1082 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Glossary

EN / ENO (Enable If the value of EN is equal to "0" when the FFB is invoked, the algorithms that are
/ Error signal) defined by the FFB will not be executed and all outputs keep their previous values.
The value of ENO is in this case automatically set to "0". If the value of EN is equal
to "1", when the FFB is invoked, the algorithms which are defined by the FFD will be
executed. After the error-free execution of these algorithms, the value of ENO is
automatically set to "1". If an error occurs during the execution of these algorithms,
ENO is automatically set to "0". The output behavior of the FFB is independent of
whether the FFBs are invoked without EN/ENO or with EN=1. If the EN/ENO display
is switched on, it is imperative that the EN input is switched on. Otherwise, the FFB
is not executed. The configuration of EN and ENO is switched on or off in the Block
Properties dialog box. The dialog box can be invoked with the Objects →
Properties... menu command or by double-clicking on the FFB.

Error If an error is recognized during the processing of a FFB or a step (e.g. unauthorized
input values or a time error), an error message appears, which can be seen using
the Online → Online events... menu command. For FFBs, the ENO output is now
set to "0".

Evaluation The process, through which a value is transmitted for a Function or for the output of
a Function block during Program execution.

FFB (Functions/ Collective term for EFB (elementary functions/function blocks) and DFB (Derived
Function blocks) function blocks)

Field variables A variable, which is allocated a defined derived data type with the key word ARRAY
(field). A field is a collection of data elements with the same data type.

FIR Filter (Finite Impulse Response Filter) a filter with finite impulse answer

Formal Input / Output parameters, which are used within the logic of a FFB and led out of
parameters the FFB as inputs/outputs.

Function (FUNC) A program organization unit, which supplies an exact data element when
processing. a function has no internal status information. Multiple invocations of the
same function using the same input parameters always supply the same output
values.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1083


Glossary

Details of the graphic form of the function invocation can be found in the "Functional
block (instance)". In contrast to the invocation of the function blocks, function
invocations only have a single unnamed output, whose name is the same as the
function. In FBD each invocation is denoted by a unique number via the graphic
block, this number is automatically generated and can not be altered.

Function block A function block is a program organization unit, which correspondingly calculates the
(Instance) (FB) functionality values that were defined in the function block type description, for the
outputs and internal variable(s), if it is invoked as a certain instance. All internal
variable and output values for a certain function block instance remain from one
function block invocation to the next. Multiple invocations of the same function block
instance with the same arguments (input parameter values) do not therefore
necessarily supply the same output value(s).
Each function block instance is displayed graphically using a rectangular block
symbol. The name of the function block type is stated in the top center of the
rectangle. The name of the function block instance is also stated at the top, but
outside of the rectangle. It is automatically generated when creating an instance,
but, depending on the user’s requirements, it can be altered by the user. Inputs are
displayed on the left side of the block and outputs are displayed on the right side.
The names of the formal input/output parameters are shown inside the rectangle in
the corresponding places.
The above description of the graphic display is especially applicable to the function
invocation and to DFB invocations. Differences are outlined in the corresponding
definitions.

Function Block One or more sections, which contain graphically displayed networks from Functions,
Dialog (FBD) Function blocks and Connections.

Function block A language element, consisting of: 1. the definition of a data structure, divided into
type input, output and internal variables; 2. a set of operations, which are performed with
elements of the data structure, when a function block type instance is invoked. This
set of operations can either be formulated in one of the IEC languages (DFB type)
or in "C" (EFB type). A function block type can be instanced (invoked) several times.

Function The function number is used to uniquely denote a function in a program or DFB. The
Number function number can not be edited and is automatically assigned. The function
number is always formed as follows: .n.m

n = section number (current number)


m = Number of the FFB object in the section (current number)

1084 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Glossary

Generic Data A data type, which stands in place of several other data types.
Type

Generic literals If the literal’s data type is not relevant, simply specify the value for the literal. If this
is the case, Concept automatically assigns the literal a suitable data type.

Global Data Global data are Unlocated variables.

Global derived Global derived data types are available in each Concept project and are occupied in
data types the DFB directory directly under the Concept directory.

Global DFBs Global DFBs are available in each Concept project. The storage of the global DFBs
is dependant upon the settings in the CONCEPT.INI file.

Global macros Global macros are available in each Concept project and are occupied in the DFB
directory directly under the Concept directory.

Groups (EFBs) Some EFB libraries (e.g. the IEC library) are divided into groups. This facilitates EFB
location especially in expansive libraries.

Host Computer Hardware and software, which support programming, configuring, testing, operating
and error searching in the PLC application as well as in a remote system application,
in order to enable source documentation and archiving. The programming device
can also be possibly used for the display of the process.

I/O Map The I/O and expert modules from the various CPUs are configured in the I/O map.

Icon Graphical representation of different objects in Windows, e.g. drives, application


programs and document windows.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1085


Glossary

IEC 61131-3 International standard: Programmable Logic Controls - Part 3: Programming


languages.

IEC Format There is an IEC type designation in initial position of the address, followed by the
(QW1) five-figure address.
l %0x12345 = %Q12345
l %1x12345 = %I12345
l %3x12345 = %IW12345
l %4x12345 = %QW12345

IEC name An identifier is a sequence of letters, numbers and underscores, which must begin
conventions with either a letter or underscore (i.e. the name of a function block type, an instance,
(identifier) a variable or a section). Letters of a national typeface (i.e.: ö,ü, é, õ) can be used,
except in project and DFB names.
Underscores are significant in identifiers; e.g. "A_BCD" and "AB_CD" are
interpreted as two separate identifiers. Several leading and multiple successive
underscores are not allowed.
Identifiers should not contain any spaces. No differentiation is made between upper
and lower case, e.g. "ABCD" and "abcd" are interpreted as the same identifier.
Identifiers should not be Keywords.

IEC Program The IEC memory consists of the program code, EFB code, the section data and the
Memory DFB instance data.

IIR Filter (Infinite Impulse Response Filter) a filter with infinite impulse answer

Initial step The first step in a sequence. A step must be defined as an initial step for each
sequence. The sequence is started with the initial step when first invoked.

Initial value The value, which is allocated to a variable when the program is started. The values
are assigned in the form of literals.

Input bits The 1/0 status of the input bits is controlled via the process data, which reaches from
(1x references) an input device to the CPU.

Note: The x, which follows the initial reference type number, represents a five-
figure storage location in the user data memory, i.e. the reference 100201 signifies
an output or marker bit at the address 201 in the State RAM.

Input parameter Upon invocation of a FFB, this transfers the corresponding argument.
(Input)

1086 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Glossary

Input words An input word contains information, which originates from an external source and is
(3x references) represented by a 16 bit number. A 3x register can also contain 16 sequential input
bits, which were read into the register in binary or BCD (binary coded decimal)
format. Note: The x, which follows the initial reference type number, represents a
five-figure storage location in the user data memory, i.e. the reference 300201
signifies an input word at the address 201 in the State RAM.

Input/output An input/output marker bit can be used to control real output data using an output
marker bits unit of the control system, or to define one or more discrete outputs in the state RAM.
(0x references) Note: The x, which follows the initial reference type number, represents a five-figure
storage location in the user data memory, i.e. the reference 000201 signifies an
output or marker bit at the address 201 in the State RAM.

Instance Name An identifier, which belongs to a certain function block instance. The instance name
is used to clearly denote a function block within a program organization unit. The
instance name is automatically generated, but it can be edited. The instance name
must be unique throughout the whole program organization unit, and is not case
sensitive. If the name entered already exists, you will be warned and you will have
to choose another name. The instance name must comply with the IEC name
conventions otherwise an error message appears. The automatically generated
instance name is always formed as follows: FBI_n_m

FBI = Function Block Instance


n = section number (current number)
m = Number of the FFB object in the section (current number)

Instancing Generating an Instance.

Instruction (IL) Instructions are the "commands" of the IL programming language. Each instruction
begins on a new line and is performed by an operator with a modifier if necessary,
and if required for the current operation, by one or more operands. If several
operands are used, they are separated by commas. A character can come before
the instruction, which is then followed by a colon. The commentary must, where
available, be the last element of the line.

Instruction When programming electrical controls, the user should implement operation-coded
(LL984) instructions in the form of picture objects, which are divided into a recognizable
contact form. The designed program objects are, on a user level, converted to
computer usable OP codes during the download process. The OP codes are
decoded in the CPU and processed by the firmware functions of the controller in a
way that the required control is implemented.

Instruction (ST) Instructions are the "commands" of the ST programming language. Instructions
must be concluded by semicolons. Several instructions can be entered in one line
(separated by semicolons).

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1087


Glossary

Instruction list IL is a text language according to IEC 1131, which is shown in operations, i.e.
(IL) conditional or unconditional invocations of Functions blocks and Functions,
conditional or unconditional jumps etc. through instructions.

INT INT stands for the data type "whole number (integer)". Entries are made as integer
literal, base 2 literal, basis 8 literal or base 16 literal. The length of the data element
is 16 bits. The value range for variables of this datatype reaches from -2 exp (15) to
2 exp (15) -1.

Integer literals Integer literals are used to input whole number values into the decimalsystem. The
values can have a preceding sign (+/-). Single underscores ( _ ) between numbers
are not significant.

Example
-12, 0, 123_456, +986

INTERBUS (PCP) The new INTERBUS (PCP) I/O drop type is entered into the Concept configurator,
to allow use of the INTERBUS PCP channel and the INTERBUS process data pre-
processing (PDV). This I/O drop type is assigned the INTERBUS switching module
180-CRP-660-01.
The 180-CRP-660-01 differs from the 180-CRP-660-00 only in the fact that it has a
clearly larger I/O range in the control state RAM.

Invocation The process, through which an operation is carried out.

Jump Element of the SFC language. Jumps are used to skip zones in the sequence.

Keywords Keywords are unique combinations of characters, which are used as special
syntactical components, as defined in Appendix B of the IEC 1131-3. All keywords
which are used in the IEC 1131-3 and therefore in Concept, are listed in Appendix
C of the IEC 1131-3. These keywords may not be used for any other purpose, i.e.
not as variable names, section names, instance names etc.

1088 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Glossary

Ladder Diagram Ladder Diagram is a graphic programming dialog according to IEC1131, which is
(LD) optically oriented to the "rung" of a relay contact plan.

Ladder Logic 984 The terms Ladder Logic and Ladder Diagram refer to the word Ladder being
(LL) executed. In contrast to a circuit diagram, a ladder diagram is used by electrotech-
nicians to display an electrical circuit (using electrical symbols), which should show
the course of events and not the existing wires, which connect the parts with each
other. A usual user interface for controlling the actions of automation devices
permits a Ladder Diagram interface, so that electrotechnicians do not have to learn
new programming languages to be able to implement a control program.
The structure of the actual Ladder Diagram enables the connection of electric
elements in such a way that generates a control output, which is dependant upon a
logical power flow through used electrical objects, which displays the previously
requested condition of a physical electrical device.
In simple form, the user interface is a video display processed by the PLC
programming application, which sets up vertical and horizontal grid, in which
programming objects are classified. The diagram contains the power grid on the left
side, and when connected to activated objects, the power shifts from left to right.

Landscape Landscape means that when looking at the printed text, the page is wider than it is
high.

Language Every basic element in one of the IEC programming languages, e.g. a step in SFC,
Element a function block instance in FBD or the initial value of a variable.

Library Collection of software objects, which are intended for re-use when programming
new projects, or even building new libraries. Examples are the libraries of the
Elementary function block types.
EFB libraries can be divided up into Groups.

Link A control or data flow connection between graphical objects (e.g. steps in the SFC
Editor, function blocks in the FBD Editor) within a section, represented graphically
as a line.

Literals Literals are used to provide FFB inputs, and transition conditions etc using direct
values. These values can not be overwritten by the program logic (read only). A
distinction is made between generic and standardized literals.
Literals are also used to allocate a constant, a value or a variable an initial value.
Entries are made as base 2 literal, base 8 literal, basis 16 literal, integer literal, real
literal or real literal with exponent.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1089


Glossary

Local derived Local derived data types are only available in a single Concept project and the local
data types DFBs and are placed in the DFB directory under the project directory.

Local DFBs Local DFBs are only available in a single Concept project and are placed in the DFB
directory under the project directory.

Local Link The local network is the network, which connects the local nodes with other nodes
either directly or through bus repeaters.

Local macros Local macros are only available in a single Concept project and are placed in the
DFB directory under the project directory.

Local network The local node is the one, which is currently being configured.
nodes

Located variable A state RAM address (reference addresses 0x, 1x, 3x,4x) is allocated to located
variables. The value of these variables is saved in the state RAM and can be
modified online using the reference data editor. These variables can be addresses
using their symbolic names or their reference addresses.

All inputs and outputs of the PLC are connected to the state RAM. The program can
only access peripheral signals attached to the PLC via located variables. External
access via Modbus or Modbus Plus interfaces of the PLC, e.g. from visualization
systems, is also possible via located variables.

Macro Macros are created with the help of the Concept DFB software.
Macros are used to duplicate frequently used sections and networks (including their
logic, variables and variable declaration).
A distinction is made between local and global macros.

1090 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Glossary

Macros have the following properties:


l Macros can only be created in the FBD and LD programming languages.
l Macros only contain one section.
l Macros can contain a section of any complexity.
l In programming terms, there is no difference between an instanced macro, i.e. a
macro inserted into a section and a conventionally created section.
l DFB invocation in a macro
l Declaring variables
l Using macro-specific data structures
l Automatic transfer of the variables declared in the macro.
l Initial value for variables
l Multiple instancing of a macro in the entire program with differing variables
l The name of the section, variable names and data structure names can contain
up to 10 different exchange marks (@0 to @9).

MMI Man-Machine-Interface

Multi element Variables to which a Derived data type defined with STRUCT or ARRAY is allocated.
variables A distinction is made here between field variables and structured variables.

Network A network is the collective switching of devices to a common data path, which then
communicate with each other using a common protocol.

Network node A node is a device with an address (1...64) on the Modbus Plus network.

Node Node is a programming cell in a LL984 network. A cell/node consists of a 7x11


matrix, i.e. 7 rows of 11 elements.

Operand An operand is a literal, a variable, a function invocation or an expression.

Operator An operator is a symbol for an arithmetic or boolean operation, which is to be carried


out.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1091


Glossary

Output A parameter, through which the result(s) of the evaluation of a FFB is/are returned.
parameter
(outputs):

Output/marker An output / marker word can be used to save numerical data (binary or decimal) in
words the state RAM, or to send data from the CPU to an output unit in the control system.
(4x references) Note: The x, which follows the initial reference type number, represents a five-figure
storage location in the user data memory, i.e. the reference 400201 signifies a 16 bit
output or marker word at the address 201 in the State RAM.

Peer CPU The Peer CPU processes the token execution and the data flow between the
Modbus Plus network and the PLC user logic.

PLC Memory programmable controller

Portrait Portrait means that the sides are larger than the width when printed.

Print-out Expressions consist of operators and operands.

Program The uppermost program organization unit. A program is closed on a single PLC
download.

Program A function, a function block, or a Program. This term can refer to either a type or an
organization unit instance.

Program A redundancy system consists of two identically configured PLC machines, which
redundancy communicate with one another via redundancy processors. In the case of a
system breakdown of the primary PLC, the secondary PLC takes over the control check.
(Hot Standby) Under normal conditions, the secondary PLC does not take over the control function,
but checks the status information, in order to detect errors.

Project General description for the highest level of a software tree structure, which specifies
the super-ordinate project name of a PLC application. After specifying the project
name you can save your system configuration and your control program under this
name. All data that is created whilst setting up the configuration and program,
belongs to this super-ordinate project for this specific automation task.
General description for the complete set of programming and configuration
information in the project database, which represents the source code that
describes the automation of a system.

1092 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Glossary

Project database The database in the host computer, which contains the configuration information for
a project.

Prototype file The prototype file contains all the prototypes of the assigned functions. In addition,
(Concept-EFB) if one exists, a type definition of the internal status structure is specified.

REAL REAL stands for the data type "floating point number". The entry can be real-literal
or real-literal with an exponent. The length of the data element is 32 bits. The value
range for variables of this data type extends from +/- 3.402823E+38.

Note: Dependent on the mathematical processor type of the CPU, different ranges
within this permissable value range cannot be represented. This applies to values
that are approaching ZERO and for values that approach INFINITY. In these cases
NAN (Not A Number) or INF (INFinite will be displayed in the animation mode
instead of a number value.

Real literals Real literals are used to input floating point values into the decimal system. Real
literals are denoted by a decimal point. The values can have a preceding sign (+/-).
Single underscores ( _ ) between numbers are not significant.

Example
-12.0, 0.0, +0.456, 3.14159_26

Real literals with Real literals with exponents are used to input floating point values into the decimal
exponents system. Real literals with exponents are identifiable by a decimal point. The
exponent indicates the power of ten, with which the existing number needs to be
multiplied in order to obtain the value to be represented. The base can have a
preceding negative sign (-). The exponent can have a preceding positive or negative
sign (+/-). Single underscores ( _ ) between numbers are not significant. (Only
between numbers, not before or after the decimal point and not before or after "E",
"E+" or "E-")

Example
-1.34E-12 or -1.34e-12
1.0E+6 or 1.0e+6
1.234E6 or 1.234e6

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1093


Glossary

Reference Every direct address is a reference that begins with an indicator, which specifies
whether it is an input or an output and whether it is a bit or a word. References that
begin with the code 6, represent registers in the extended memory of the state RAM.
0x range = Coils
1x range = Discrete inputs
3x range = Input registers
4x range = Output registers
6x range = Register in the extended memory

Note: The x, which follows each initial reference type number, represents a five-
figure storage location in the user data memory, i.e. the reference 400201 signifies
a 16 bit output or marker word at the address 201 in the State RAM.

Register in the 6x references are holding registers in the extended memory of the PLC. They can
extended only be used with LL984 user programs and only with a CPU 213 04 or CPU 424 02.
memory
(6x-reference)

Remote Network Remote programming in the Modbus Plus network enables maximum performance
(DIO) when transferring data and dispenses of the need for connections. Programming a
remote network is simple. Setting up a network does not require any additional
ladder logic to be created. All requirements for data transfer are fulfilled via
corresponding entries in the Peer Cop Processor.

RIO (Remote I/O) Remote I/O indicates a physical location of the I/O point controlling devices with
regard to the CPU controlling them. Remote inp./outputs are connected to the
controlling device via a twisted communication cable.

RTU-Mode Remote Terminal Unit


The RTU mode is used for communication between the PLC and an IBM compatible
personal computer. RTU works with 8 data bits.

Runtime error Errors, which appear during program processing on the PLC, in SFC objects (e.g.
Steps) or FFBs. These are, for example, value range overflows with figures or timing
errors with steps.

1094 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Glossary

SA85 module The SA85 module is a Modbus Plus adapter for IBM-AT or compatible computers.

Scan A scan consists of reading the inputs, processing the program logic and outputting
the outputs.

Section A section can for example be used to describe the mode of functioning of a
technological unit such as a motor.
A program or DFB consists of one or more sections. Sections can be programmed
with the IEC programming languages FBD and SFC. Only one of the named
programming languages may be used within a section at any one time.
Each section has its own document window in Concept. For reasons of clarity, it is
however useful to divide a very large section into several small ones. The scroll bar
is used for scrolling within a section.

Section Code Section Code is the executable code of a section. The size of the Section Code is
mainly dependent upon the number of blocks in the section.

Section Data Section data is the local data in a section such as e.g. literals, connections between
blocks, non-connected block inputs and outputs, internal status memory of EFBs.

Note: Data which appears in the DFBs of this section is not section data.

Separator The first digit (the reference) is separated from the five figure address that follows
Format (4:00001) by a colon (:).

Sequence The SFC Language Elements enable a PLC program organization unit to be divided
language (SFC) up into a number of Steps and Transitions, which are connected using directional
Links. A number of actions belong to each step, and transition conditions are
attached to each transition.

Serial With serial connections (COM) the information is transferred bit by bit.
Connections

Source code file The source code file is a normal C++ source file. After executing the Library →
(Concept-EFB) Create files menu command, this file contains an EFB-code frame, in which you
have to enter a specific code for the EFB selected. To do this invoke the Objects →
Source menu command.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1095


Glossary

Standard Format The five figure address comes directly after the first digit (the reference).
(400001)

Standardized If you would like to manually determine a literal’s data type, this may be done using
literals the following construction: ’Data type name’#’value of the literal’.

Example
INT#15 (Data type: integer, value: 15),
BYTE#00001111 (Data type: byte, value: 00001111)
REAL#23.0 (Data type: real, value: 23.0)

To assign the data type REAL, the value may also be specified in the following
manner: 23.0.
Entering a comma will automatically assign the data type REAL.

State RAM The state RAM is the memory space for all variables, which are accessed via
References (Direct representation) in the user program. For example, discrete
inputs, coils, input registers, and output registers are situated in the state RAM.

Status Bits For every device with global inputs or specific inp./outputs of Peer Cop data, there
is a status bit. If a defined group of data has been successfully transferred within the
timeout that has been set, the corresponding status bit is set to 1. If this is not the
case, this bit is set to 0 and all the data belonging to this group is deleted (to 0).

Step SFC-language element: Situation, in which the behavior of a program occurs,


regarding its inputs and outputs of those operations which are defined by the actions
belonging to the step.

Step name The step name is used to uniquely denote a step in a program organization unit. The
step name is generated automatically, but it can be edited. The step name must be
unique within the entire program organization unit, otherwise an error message will
appear.
The automatically generated step name is always formed as follows: S_n_m

S = step
n = section number (current number)
m = Number of the step in the section (current number)

Structured text ST is a text language according to IEC 1131, in which operations, e.g. invocations
(ST) of Function blocks and Functions, conditional execution of instructions, repetitions
of instructions etc. are represented by instructions.

Structured Variables to which a Derived data type defined with STRUCT (structure) is allocated.
variables A structure is a collection of data elements with generally different data types
(elementary data types and/or derived data types).

1096 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Glossary

SY/MAX In Quantum control devices, Concept includes the providing of I/O-map SY/MAX-I/
O modules for remote contolling by the Quantum PLC. The SY/MAX remote
backplane has a remote I/O adapter in slot 1, which communicates via a Modicon
S908 R I/O System. The SY/MAX-I/O modules are executed for you for labelling and
inclusion in the I/O map of the Concept configuration.

Template file The template file is an ASCII file with layout information for the Concept FBD Editor,
(Concept-EFB) and the parameters for code creation.

TIME TIME stands for the data type "time". The entry is time literal. The length of the data
element is 32 bits. The value range for variables of this data type extends from 0 to
2exp(32)-1. The unit for the TIME data type is 1 ms.

Time literals Permissable units for times (TIME) are days (D), hours (H), minutes (M), seconds
(S) and milliseconds (MS) or combinations of these. The time must be marked with
the prefix t#, T#, time# or TIME#. The "overflow" of the unit with the highest value is
permissible, e.g. the entry T#25H15M is allowed.

Example
t#14MS, T#14.7S, time#18M, TIME#19.9H, t#20.4D, T#25H15M,
time#5D14H12M18S3.5MS

Token The network "token" controls the temporary possession of the transfer right via a
single device. The token passes round the devices in a rotating (increasing) address
sequence. All devices follow the token rotation and can receive all the possible data
that is sent with it.

Total IEC The total IEC memory consists of the IEC program memory and the global data.
memory

Traffic Cop The traffic cop is an IO map, which is generated from the user-IO map. The traffic
cop is managed in the PLC and in addition to the user IO map, contains e.g. status
information on the I/O stations and modules.

Transition The condition, in which the control of one or more predecessor steps passes to one
or more successor steps along a directed link.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1097


Glossary

UDEFB User-defined elementary functions/function blocks


Functions or function blocks, which were created in the C programming language,
and which Concept provides in libraries.

UDINT UDINT stands for the data type "unsigned double integer". Entries are made as
integer literal, base 2 literal, basis 8 literal or base 16 literal. The length of the data
element is 32 bits. The value range for variables of this data type extends from 0 to
2exp(32)-1.

UINT UINT stands for the data type "unsigned integer". Entries are made as integer literal,
base 2 literal, basis 8 literal or base 16 literal. The length of the data element is 16
bits. The value range for variables of this data type extends from 0 to (2exp 16)-1.

Unlocated Unlocated variables are not allocated a state RAM address. They therefore do not
variable occupy any state RAM addresses. The value of these variables is saved in the
internal system and can be changed using the reference data editor. These
variables are only addressed using their symbolic names.

Signals requiring no peripheral access, e.g. intermediate results, system tags etc.,
should be primarily declared as unlocated variables.

Variables Variables are used to exchange data within a section, between several sections and
between the program and the PLC.
Variables consist of at least one variable name and one data type.
If a variable is assigned a direct address (reference), it is called a located variable.
If the variable has no direct address assigned to it, it is called an unlocated variable.
If the variable is assigned with a derived data type, it is called a multi element
variable.
There are also constants and literals.

1098 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Glossary

Warning If a critical status is detected during the processing of a FFB or a step (e.g. critical
input values or an exceeded time limit), a warning appears, which can be seen using
the Online → Event Viewer... menu command. For FFBs, the ENO remains set to
"1".

WORD WORD stands for the data type "bit sequence 16". Entries are made as base 2
literal, base 8 literal or base 16 literal. The length of the data element is 16 bits. A
numerical value range can not be assigned to this data type.

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 1099


Glossary

1100 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Index
B
AC
A ASCII message editor, 543, 545, 550
Combination mode, 559, 560
Access Rights, 701, 694, 702 Control code, 549
Action variable, 241 Direct mode, 559, 560
Actions, 240 Flush (buffer), 551
Process, 259 Generals, 546
Activate dialogs, 92 How to continue after getting a warning,
Actual parameters
557, 558
FBD, 182 How to Use, 554
LD, 215 Message Number, 555
Alias designations
Message text, 556
Step, 266 Offline mode, 559, 560
Transition, 266 Repeat, 552
Alternative branch, 248
Simulation text, 556
Alternative connection, 250 Spaces, 549
Animation, 539, 679, 682 Text, 547
FBD, 193
User interface, 553, 554
General information, 606 Variables, 548
IEC section, 607 ASCII messages, 56, 91
IL, 337
Assign instructions
IL/ST, 334 ST, 357
LD, 226 Assignment
LL984 section, 609
=>, 376
Section, 606 Atrium
SFC, 270, 272 Memory optimization, 163
ANY Outputs, 373
Atrium example
Archiving INTERBUS controller, 877
DFB, 674 Atrium first startup
EFB, 674
DOS Loader, 1014
Project, 674 EXECLoader, 996
ARRAY Modbus Plus, 996, 1014
Range Monitoring, 527
Auto-Log-Out, 112

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 i


Index

Automatic Connection, 1068, 1071 Coil – negative edge


Available functions in OFFLINE and ONLINE LD, 208
modes, 76 Coil – positive edge
LD, 207
Coil - reset
B LD, 208
Backplane Expander Coil - set
Configure, 98 LD, 208
Edit I/O Map, 99 Cold restart, 37
Error handling, 100 Comments
Generals, 99 Data type editor, 518
Block call up Derived data type, 518
IL, 320 Communication, 14
ST, 372 Compact
Memory optimization, 147
Compact configuration
C RTU extension, 105
Call Compact example, 871
DFB, 319 Compact first startup
FFB, 319 DOS Loader, 977, 1011
FFB, 327 EXECLoader, 958, 992
Project, 744 Modbus, 958, 977
Chain jump, 246 Modbus Plus, 992, 1011
Chain loop, 247 Concept DFB, 415, 455
Change Concept ModConnect, 915
Coil, LD, 220 Integrating new Modules, 919
Contact, LD, 220 Removing modules, 920
FFB, FBD, 187 Use of Third Party Modules in Concept,
FFB, LD, 220 922
Changing signal states of a Located variable Concept PLCSIM32, 682
Reference data editor, 535 Concept Security, 691, 692, 694, 701, 702
Close Column Concept SIM, 679
LL984, 398 CONCEPT.INI, 1027, 1029
Closer General, 1030
LD, 205 LD section settings, 1035
Code generation Path for Global DFBs, 1033
FBD, 191 Path for Help Files, 1033
IL, 332 Path for MBPPATH.INI, 1033
ST, 381 print settings, 1031
LD, 224 Project Name Definition, 1032
Coil Reading Global DFBs, 1033
Change, LD, 220 Register Address Format Settings, 1032
LD, 206 Representation of internal data, 1035
Replace, LD, 220 Security Settings, 1037
Coil - negated Setting for Online Processing, 1036
LD, 207 Setting for the Address Format, 1036

ii 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Index

Settings for Warning Messages, 1036 Convert


Storage of Global DFBs during Upload, DFBs, 911
1033 Macros, 911
Variable Storage Settings, 1032 Modsoft programs, 923
Configuration, 51, 69 Projects, 911
Backplane Expander Config, 98 RDE templates, 533
Ethernet, 104 CPU selection for the PLC type, 80
Ethernet I/O Scanner, 106 Create
General information, 71 DFB, 436
INTERBUS, 102 FFB, FBD, 186
Network systems, 92 FFB, LD, 219
Optional, 90 Macro, 467
OFFLINE and ONLINE mode, 74 Program, 47
Profibus DP, 103 Project, 47
RTU extension, 105 Project Symbol, 744
Unconditional, 78 Creating a program
Various network systems, 101 IL, 339
Configuration example Cyclical Setting of Variables
Atrium-INTERBUS controller, 877 Reference Data Editor, 536
Compact controller, 871
Momentum-Ethernet bus system, 895
Momentum-Remote I/O bus, 887 D
Quantum-INTERBUS control, 835 Data exchange between nodes on the
Quantum-Peer Cop, 863 Modbus Plus network, 93
Quantum-Profibus DP controller, 849 Data flow, 221
Quantum-Remote control with DIO, 826 FBD, 189
Quantum-Remote control with RIO, 807 Data protection, 55
Quantum-Remote control with RIO Data protection in the state RAM, 94
(series 800), 815 Data Type Definition
Quantum-SY/MAX controller, 841 Extended (larger than 64 Kbytes), 507
Configuration extensions, 92 Data type editor, 499, 501
Connect Comments, 518
PLC, 565 Elements, 510
Automatically with command line Key words, 512
parameters, 1068 Names, 516
Automatically with the CCLaunch Tool, Separators, 517
1071 Short Cut Keys, 765
Connect to IEC Simulator (32-bit), 578 Syntax, 509
Constant Scan, 582 Use of memory, 521
Constants, 35 DDT, 507
Contact Declaration of variables, 480
Change, LD, 220 Declare
LD, 205, 206 Actions, 259
Replace, LD, 220 Step properties, 257
Context help, 746 Transition, 264

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 iii


Index

Defining Colors Dialog boxes, 740


INI File, 1036 Dialog interaction
Defining the LD contact connection LL984, 394
Settings in the INI file, 1035 Direct Addresses, 35
Defining the number of LD columns/fields Disable
Settings in the INI file, 1035 Interrupt Sections, 42
Delete Section, 42
DFB, 676 Document section options, 667
Macro, 676 Documentation
Memory zones from the PLC, 584 Contents, 664
PLC contents, 584 DFB, 663
Project, 676 Keywords, 671
Derived Data Type, 499, 501 Layout, 665
Comments, 518 Macro, 663
Elements, 510 Project, 663
Export, 629 DOS Loader
Global, 505 Atrium first startup, 1014
Key words, 512 Compact first startup, 977, 1011
Local, 505 Momentum first startup, 980, 983, 1017,
Names, 516 1020
Separators, 517 Quantum first startup, 974, 1008
Syntax, 509 Startup when using Modbus, 973
Use of memory, 521 Startup when using Modbus Plus, 1007
Derived Data Types Download Changes, 600
Use, 524 Driver for 16 bit application capability with
Derived Function Block, 418 Windows 98/2000/NT
FBD, 180 Virtual MBX Driver, 940
LD, 211 Driver for connection between ModConnect
DFB, 415, 418 Host interface adapters and 32 bit
Archiving, 674 applications with Windows 98/2000/NT
Call, 319 MBX-Treiber, 941
Convert, 911 Driver for Modbus Plus Function via TCP/IP
Context sensitive help, 434 Ethernet MBX Driver, 943
Create, 436 Driver for Remote Operation
Creating Global Variables, 430 Remote MBX Driver, 942
Delete, 676 DTY, 499, 501, 502
Documentation, 663 DX Zoom
FBD, 180 LL984, 400
Global, 420
Invocation, 321, 373
LD, 211
Local, 420
Protect, 702
Diagnosis
Transition diagnosis, 277
Diagnosis viewer, 610

iv 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Index

E Ethernet / I/O Scanner


Configurator, 106
Edit
How to use the Ethernet / I/O Scanner,
Actions, 259
109
LL984, 393, 397
Ethernet Bus System
SFC, 253
Create online connection, 910
Step properties, 257
Momentum, 896
Transition, 264
Ethernet MBX Driver
Edit I/O Map
Driver for Modbus Plus Function via
Backplane Expander, 99
TCP/IP, 943
Editing local Drop, 808
Ethernet with Momentum, 105
Editing Networks
Ethernet with Quantum, 104
LL984, 398
Event Viewer
Editors, 9
INI Settings, 1039
EFB
Example of hardware configuration
Archiving, 674
Atrium-INTERBUS controller, 877
FBD, 178
Compact controller, 871
LD, 209
Momentum-Ethernet bus system, 895
EFBs for Interrupt Sections, 1065
Momentum-Remote I/O bus, 887
Elementary Function
Quantum-INTERBUS control, 835
FBD, 178
Quantum-Peer Cop, 863
LD, 209
Quantum-Profibus DP controller, 849
Elements
Quantum-Remote control with DIO, 826
Data type editor, 510
Quantum-Remote control with RIO, 807
Derived Data Type, 510
Quantum-Remote control with RIO
EN
(Series 800), 815
FBD, 181
Quantum-SY/MAX controller, 841
LD, 213
Exchange Marking
ENC File, 15, 613, 614
Macro, 462
Encrypt Logfile, 15, 693
EXEC file, 1023
ENC File, 614
CPU 424 02, 125
ENO
CPU X13 0X, 125
FBD, 181
Momentum, 160
LD, 213
EXECLoader
EQUAL, 566
Atrium first startup, 996
Equation network
Compact first startup, 958, 992
LL984, 404, 405
Momentum first startup, 962, 967, 999,
Equation network, Syntax and Semantics
1003
LL984, 409
Quantum first startup, 954, 988
Error handling
Startup when using Modbus, 953
Backplane Expander, 100
Startup when using Modbus Plus, 987
Establishing the hardware connection
Execution Order
Modbus Plus presettings, 945
FBD, 187
Modbus presettings, 950
Section, 41
Ethernet, 578
Timer Event Sections, 1051

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 v


Index

Execution sequence FFB


LD, 221 Call, 319, 327
Export, 619 Change, FBD, 187
Derived Data Type, 629 Change, LD, 220
General Information, 622 Create, FBD, 186
PLC Configuration, 658 Create, LD, 219
Section, 625 FBD, 178
Variable, 629 Insert, FBD, 186
Exporting located variables, 490 Insert, LD, 219
Expressions Invocation, 321, 373, 377
ST, 345 LD, 209
Extended memory, 129 Position, 186, 219
Replace, FBD, 187
Replace, LD, 220
F Function
Factory Link, 656 FBD, 178
FBD, 173 LD, 209
Actual parameters, 182 Function Block
Animation, 193 FBD, 179
Calling a macro, 476 LD, 210
Code generation, 191 Function Block language, 173
Data flow, 187, 189 Function Blocks for Interrupt Sections, 1065
Derived Function Blocks, 180
DFB, 180
EFB, 178 G
Elementary Function, 178 General, 1
Elementary Function Block, 179 Backplane Expander, 99
EN, 181 Hardware configuration, 71
ENO, 181 Loading a project, 598
Execution order, 187 Online control panel, 581
FFB, 178 Online functions, 564
Function, 178 OFFLINE and ONLINE mode, 75
Function Block, 179 PLC configuration, 72
Icon bar, 755 PLC Connection, 566
Link, 182 Reference Data Editor, 532
Loop, 189 Select process information, 593
Online Functions, 193 Variables editor, 480
Program creation, 196 Generate
Short Cut Keys, 768 Project symbol, 743
Text Object, 184 Global data transfer
UDEFB, 181 Peer Cop, 867
User-defined Elementary Function, 181 Global derived data type, 505

vi 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Index

Global DFB, 420 Operands, 285


Defining the Path, 1033 Operators, 288, 295
INI File, 1033 Short Cut Keys, 765
Reading, 1034 Syntax check, 330
Storing, 1034 Tag, 291
Global macro, 460 IL command
Global Variables in DFBs, 430 call function block, 321
Compare, 310, 311, 314
Comments, 294
H Compare, 312, 313, 315
Hardware Declaration, 292
Performance, 707 DFB invocation, 321
Head setup, 53 Function call, 327
Help, 746 Invert, 305
Help Files Reset, 299
Defining the Path, 1033 Set, 298
How to use the Ethernet / I/O Scanner VAR...END_VAR, 292
Ethernet / I/O Scanner, 109 IL operation
addition, 306
Boolean AND, 300
I Boolean exclusive OR, 304
I/O Event Sections, 1060 Boolean OR, 302
Handling, 1041 Call DFB, 319
Priority, 1061 Call function block, 319
Runtime Error, 1062 Division, 309
I/O map, 52, 87 Jump to label, 316
Icon bar, 753, 754, 755, 756, 758 Load, 296
Icons, 751, 753, 754, 755, 756, 758, 759, Multiplication, 308
760, 762 Store, 297
Icons_Project Browser, 762 Subtraction, 307
Identifier, 262 Import, 619
IEC General Information, 622
Hot Standby data, 83 INTERBUS configuration, 884
Momentum first startup, 962, 999, 1017 PLC Configuration, 658
IEC conformity, 779 Profibus DP configuration, 856
IEC section Section, 630, 635, 645, 646, 647
Animation, 607 Structured variables, 653
IL, 279 Variables, 649, 653, 656
Animation, 334, 337 INC
Block call up, 320 Include File, 507
Code generation, 332 Include File
Creating a program, 339 Extended Data Type Definition, 507
Instruction, 283, 284
List of Symbols, 759
Modifier, 287
Online functions, 333, 334

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 vii


Index

INI File, 1027 Interrupt Processing, 1041


CONCEPT.INI, 1029 General, 1044
Event Viewer Settings, 1039 Interrupt Sections
General Information, 1030, 1039 Disable, 42
LD section settings, 1035 EFBs, 1065
Path for Global DFBs, 1033 Examples for Setting Parameters, 1054
Path for Help Files, 1033 Execution Order, 1051
Path for MBPPATH.INI, 1033 I/O Event Sections, 1060
Print settings, 1031 Operating System, 1052
Project Name Definition, 1032 Priority, 1061
Projectname.INI, 1038 Runtime Error, 1062
Project Specific, 1027 Scan Rate for Timer Event Sections,
Reading Global DFBs, 1033 1048
Register Address Format Settings, 1032 Timer Event Sections, 1047, 1049
Representation of internal data, 1035 Invocation
Security Settings, 1037 DFB, 321, 373
Setting for Online Processing, 1036 FFB, 321, 373, 377
Settings for the Address Format, 1036 Project, 743
Settings for Warning Messages, 1036
Storage of Global DFBs during Upload,
1033 J
Variable Storage Settings, 1032 Jump
Initial step, 238 SFC, 246
Insert
FFB, FBD, 186
FFB, LD, 219 K
Install Key combinations, 751, 763, 764, 765, 768,
Loadables, 52 771, 777
EXEC file, 1024 Key words
Modbus Plus driver data type editor, 512
Windows 98/2000/NT, 939 derived data type, 512
Install the SA85/PCI85 Keys, 751, 763, 764, 765, 768, 771, 777
Modbus Plus Preferences, 934
Windows NT, 937
Windows 98/2000/XP, 934 L
Instruction Ladder Diagram, 199
IL, 283, 284 Ladder Logic 984, 387
ST, 358 LD, 199
Instruction list, 279 Actual parameters, 215
INTERBUS controller, 836 Animation, 226
INTERBUS Controller with Atrium, 878 Calling a macro, 476
INTERBUS export settings in CMD, 879 Closer, 205
Interface Settings in Windows 98/2000/XP Code generation, 224
Modbus Preferences, 948 Coil - negated, 207
Interface settings in Windows NT Coil – negative edge, 208
Modbus Preferences, 950

viii 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Index

Coil – positive edge, 207 Semantics, 409


Coil - reset, 208 List of Symbols, 760
Coil - set, 208 Momentum first startup, 967, 983, 1003,
Coils, 206 1020
Contacts, 205, 206 Navigation, 393
Data flow, 221 Online Restriction, 394
Derived function block, 211 Online Search, 401
EFB, 209 Open Column, 398
Elementary function, 209 Open Row, 398
EN, 213 Programming modes, 413, 414
ENO, 213 Reference Offset, 396
Execution sequence, 221 Reference Zoom, 399
FFB, 209 References, 395
Function, 209 Replace References, 401
Function block, 210 Requirements, 393
Icon bar, 758 Section, 390
Link, 214 Segement, 390
Loops, 221 Select, 397
Online functions, 226 Short Cut Keys, 777
Opener, 205 Subroutines, 402
Program creation, 229 Trace, 401
Shortcut keys, 771 Undo, 397
Text object, 217 Variables, 395
UDEFB, 212 LL984 Processing
User-defined elementary function, 212 speed optimized, 585
Learn monitoring times LL984 section
SFC, 274 Animation, 609
Libraries, 8 Load reference data, 542
Limitations Loadables, 84
LL984, 391 Atrium, 166
Link compact, 150
FBD, 182 CPU 424 02, 131
LD, 214 CPU X13 0X, 131
List of Symbols, 751, 759, 760 CPU 434 12, 139
List of Tools, 751, 759, 760 CPU 534 14, 139
Literals, 35 Loading, 599
LL984, 387 Loading a project, 597
Close Column, 398 General information, 598
Combination mode, 414 Loading firmware, 1024
Dialog interaction, 394 Local derived data type, 505
Direct programming, 414 Local DFB, 420
DX Zoom, 400 Local macro, 460
Edit, 393, 397 Located variables
Editing Networks, 398 Changing signal states in RDE, 535
Equation network, 404, 405 Log Encrypting, 15
Equation network, Syntax and LOG File, 613, 614

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 ix


Index

Logging Modbus
LOG File, 614 Compact first startup, 958, 977
Logging Write Access to the PLC, 613 Momentum first startup, 962, 967, 980,
Loop 983
FBD, 189 Quantum first startup, 954, 974
LD, 221 Startup with DOS Loader, 973
Startup with the EXECLoader, 953
Modbus communication, 53
M Modbus network link, 570
Macro, 455, 458 Modbus Plus
Calls from SFC, 473 Atrium first startup, 996, 1014
Calls from FBD, 476 Compact first startup, 992, 1011
Calls from LD, 476 Momentum first startup, 999, 1003, 1017,
Context sensitive help, 465 1020
Convert, 911 Quantum first startup, 988, 1008
Create, 467 Remote MBX Driver, 942
Delete, 676 Startup with DOS Loader, 1007
Documentation, 663 Startup with the EXECLoader, 987
Exchange marking, 462 Virtual MBX Driver, 940
Global, 460 Write Restriction, 112
Local, 460 Modbus Plus Bridge, 576
Maximum supervision time, 238 Modbus Plus Network Connection, 571
MBPPATH.INI Modbus Plus network node, 93
Defining the Path, 1033 Modbus Plus Preferences
MBX Driver Installing the SA85/PCI85, 934
Driver for connection between Installing the Modbus Plus driver in
ModConnect Host interface adapters and Windows 98/2000/NT, 939
32 bit applications with Windows 98/ Establishing the hardware connection,
2000/NT, 941 945
Memory, 115 Startup, 933
Optimize, 119 Modbus Plus Routing Path
Structure, 117 Automatic Connection, 1068, 1071
Memory and optimization Modbus Preferences
Atrium, 163 Interface Settings in Windows 98/2000/
Compact, 147 XP, 948
Momentum, 157 Interface Settings in Windows NT, 950
Quantum, 122, 136 Transfer problems, 951
Memory partitions, 51 Establishing the hardware connection,
Memory statistics, 595 950
Menu commands, 737 Startup, 947
Minimum configuration, 51 ModConnect, 915
Minimum supervision time, 239 MODIFIED, 566
MMS-Ethernet Modifier
Specify coupling modules, 92 IL, 287

x 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Index

Modsoft Online functionen, 14, 561


Convertion, 923 Configurator, 76
Function compatibility, 932 General information, 563, 564
References, 929 FBD, 193
Momentum IL, 333
Memory optimization, 157 IL/ST, 334
Momentum example LD, 226
Ethernet bus system, 895 ST, 382
Remote I/O bus, 887 SFC, 270, 272
Momentum first startup Online help, 746
DOS Loader, 980, 983, 1017, 1020 ONLINE Operation
EXECLoader, 962, 967, 999, 1003 Presettings, 569
Modbus, 962, 967, 980, 983 Online Restriction
Modbus Plus, 999, 1003, 1017, 1020 LL984, 394
MSTR-Read-Operation, 113 Online Search
LL984, 401
Open
N Project, 743, 744
Names Open Column
Datatype editor, 516 LL984, 398
Derived datatype, 516 Open Row
Navigation LL984, 398
LL984, 393 Opener
Network Configuration LD, 205
TCP/IP, 897 Operands
Network Connection IL, 285
Modbus Plus, 571 ST, 346
Network link Operating System
Modbus, 570 Timer Event Sections, 1052
TCP/IP, 578 Operators
NOM/NOE IL, 288, 295
Disable Write Access, 112 ST, 347
NOT EQUAL, 566 Optimize
PLC Memory, 119
Optional Configuration, 90
O
Objects
Insert, LD, 219 P
SFC, 237 Page breaks for sections, 667
Offline functions in the configurator, 76 Parallel branch, 251
Online, 679, 682 Parallel connection, 252
INI File, 1036 Parameterize ASCII interface, 94
SFC, 269 Parameterize interfaces
Online Control Panel, 581, 585, 589 ASCII interface, 94
Online diagnosis, 610 Modbus interface, 94
Parameterize Modbus interface, 94

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 xi


Index

Parameters for Automatic Connection, 744 Print


Password protection, 691 Settings in the INI file, 1031
Path for Global DFBs Sections, 667
Settings in the INI File, 1033 Priority
Path for Help Files I/O Event Sections, 1061
Settings in the INI File, 1033 Proceed in the following way with the
Peer Cop, 93, 864 configuration, 73
Peer Cop communication, 54 Process
Performance Actions, 259
hardware, 707 Program, 30
PLC family, 707 Project, 30
Phase Step properties, 257
Timer Event Sections, 1049 Transition, 264
PLC PROFIBUS
Simulating, 677 Specify coupling modules, 92
Status, 733 Profibus DP controller, 850
PLC configuration, 50, 51, 69 Profibus DP export settings in SyCon, 850
Export, 658 Program
General information, 72 Create, 47
Icons, 761 Processing, 30
Import, 658 Status, 733
PLC Connection Structure, 29, 30
General, 566 Program creation
PLC family FBD, 196
Performance, 707 LD, 229
PLC Memory, 115 ST, 385
Optimize, 119 Programming, 6
Structure, 117 Programming languages, 9
PLC Memory and optimization Programming modes
Atrium, 163 LL984, 413, 414
Compact, 147 Programs, 35
Momentum, 157 Project
Quantum, 122, 136 Archiving, 674
PLC memory mapping, 83 Call, 744
PLC selection, 80 Convert, 911
PLC State, 566, 579, 594 Create, 47
Position Delete, 676
FFB, FBD, 186 Documentation, 663
FFB, LD, 219 Invoke, 743
Precondition for unconditional configuration, Open, 743, 744
79 Processing, 30
Presettings for Modbus Protect, 702
Startup, 947 Structure, 29, 30
Presettings for Modbus Plus
Startup, 933
Presettings for ONLINE operation, 569

xii 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Index

Project Browser, 491 Reading Global DFBs


Keyboard operation, 496 Settings in the INI File, 1033
Mouse operation, 496 Reference data editor, 531
Toolbar, 762 Changing signal states of a Located
Project Name Definition variable, 535
INI File Settings, 1032 Converting RDE templates, 533
Project Symbol Cyclical Setting of Variables, 536
Generate, 743 General, 532
Create, 744 Replacing variable names, 541
Projectname.INI, 1027, 1038 Reference Offset
Event Viewer Settings, 1039 LL984, 396
General Information, 1039 Reference Zoom
Protect LL984, 399
DFB, 702 References
Project, 702 LL984, 395
Register Address Format
INI File Settings, 1032
Q Remote controller with DIO, 831
Quantum Remote controller with RIO, 812
Memory optimization, 122, 136 Remote controller with RIO (series 800), 820
Quantum example Remote MBX Driver
INTERBUS control, 835 Modbus Plus, 942
Profibus DP controller, 849 Replace
Quantum-Peer Cop, 863 coil, LD, 220
Remote control with DIO, 826 contact, LD, 220
Remote control with RIO, 807 FFB, FBD, 187
Remote control with RIO (series 800), FFB, LD, 220
815 Variable names, 541
SY/MAX controller, 841 Replace References
Quantum first startup LL984, 401
DOS Loader, 974, 1008 Requirements
EXECLoader, 954, 988 LL984, 393
Modbus, 954, 974 RTU extension
Modbus Plus, 988, 1008 Compact configuration, 105
Quantum Security Parameters, 112 Configure, 105
Runtime Error
I/O Event Sections, 1062
R
Range Monitoring
ARRAY, 527 S
RDE, 531 Save To Flash, 585
Converting RDE templates, 533 Scan
Cyclical Setting of Variables, 536 Constant, 582
General, 532 Scan rate
Toolbar, 762 Timer Event Sections, 1048
Reactivate flash save, 588

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 xiii


Index

Scan times Initial step, 238


single, 583 Jump, 246
Search and Replace Learn monitoring times, 274
Variable names and addresses, 483 Link, 245
Search and paste Maximum supervision time, 238
Variable names and addresses, 487 Minimum supervision time, 239
Section, 40 Objects, 237
Animation, 606 Online, 269
Disable, 42 Online functions, 270, 272
Execution order, 41 Parallel branch, 251
Export, 625 Parallel connection, 252
Import, 630, 635, 645, 646, 647 Short Cut Keys, 768
Import, 631, 642 Step, 238
LL984, 390 Step delay time, 238
Status, 733 Step duration, 238
Secure Application, 15 Step properties, 257
Security, 691, 692, 694, 701, 702 String, 272
Segement Text object, 252
LL984, 390 Transition, 242, 264
Segment manager, 86 Transition diagnosis, 277
Select Transition section, 243
LL984, 397 Transition variable, 244
Select process information Waiting step, 238
General information, 593 Short cut keys, 751, 763
Status and memory, 592 Simple sequences, 245
Selecting process information Simulation, 677, 679, 682
Status and memory, 592 SPS, 679, 682
Separators Single sweeps, 583
Data type editor, 517 Special options, 96
Derived data type, 517 Specific data transfer
Set/Change PLC Password, 589 Peer Cop, 869
Setting up and controlling the PLC, 580 Speed optimized LL984- Processing, 585
Setup and control PLC SPS
General information, 581 Simulate, 679, 682
SFC ST, 341
’SFCSTEP_STATE’ variable, 240 Animation, 334
’SFCSTEP_TIMES’ variable, 239 Assign instructions, 357
Action, 240, 259 Block call up, 372
Action variable, 241 Code generation, 381
Alternative branch, 248 Expressions, 345
Alternative connection, 250 Instructions, 358
Animation, 270, 272 List of Symbols, 759
Calling up macros, 473 Online functions, 334, 382
Edit, 253 Operands, 346
Icon bar, 756 Operators, 350
Identifier, 262 operators, 347

xiv 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Index

Program creation, 385 OR, 356


Short Cut Keys, 765 REPEAT...UNTIL...END_REPEAT, 370
syntax check, 380 Subtraction, 354
ST Command Use of parentheses, 351
-, 352, 354 VAR...END_VAR, 360
(), 351 WHILE...DO...END_WHILE, 368
*, 352 XOR, 356
**, 351 ST Comment
+, 353 Comment, 371
>, 354 Start behavior
>=, 354 Variable, 37
Addition, 353 Digital outputs, 39
, 355, 355 Startup
&, 356 Presettings for Modbus, 947
=, 354 Presettings for Modbus Plus, 933
/, 353 Startup with DOS Loader
AND, 356 Modbus, 973
Assignment, 359 Modbus Plus, 1007
Boolean AND, 356 Startup with the EXECLoader
Boolean Exclusive OR, 356 Modbus, 953
Boolean OR, 356 Modbus Plus, 987
Call function block, 373 State of the PLC, 579
CASE...OF...END_CASE, 365 Status, 566
Complement formation, 352 Status bar, 733
Declaration, 360 Step, 238
Division, 353 Alias designations, 266
ELSE, 363 Step delay time, 238
ELSIF...THEN, 364 Step duration, 238
Empty instruction, 371 Step properties
Equal to, 354 Process, 257
EXIT, 371 Storage of Global DFBs during Upload
Exponentiation, 351 Settings in the INI File, 1033
FOR...TO...BY...DO...END_FOR, 366 String
FUNCNAME, 351 Control, 272
function invocation, 377 Structure
Greater than, 354 PLC Memory, 117
Greater than/Equal to, 354 Program, 29, 30
IF...THEN...END_IF, 362 Project, 29, 30
Less than, 355 Structured text, 341
Less than or equal to, 355 Structured variables
MOD, 353 Import, 653
Modulo, 353 Subroutines
Multiplication, 352 LL984, 402
Negation, 352 Symax-Ethernet
NOT, 352 specify coupling modules, 92
Not equal to, 355 Symbols, 751, 759, 760

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 xv


Index

Syntax Unconditional Configuration, 78


Data type editor, 509 Precondition, 79
Derived Data Type, 509 Unconditional locking of a section, 538
Syntax check Undo
IL, 330 LL984, 397
ST, 380 Uploading PLC, 603
User-defined Elementary Function
FBD, 181
T LD, 212
Tag Utility program, 17
IL, 291
TCP/IP
Network Configuration, 897 V
Network link, 578 Variable Editor, 479
TCP/IP-Ethernet Declaration, 480
specify coupling modules, 92 Exporting located variables, 490
Text Object Search and replace, 483
FBD, 184 Search and paste, 487
LD, 217 Variable Storage
SFC, 252 INI File Settings, 1032
Timer Event Sections, 1047 Variables, 35
Define Scan Rate, 1048 ASCII message editor, 548
Defining the Phase, 1049 Export, 629
Examples for Parameterization, 1054 Import, 649, 653, 656
Execution Order, 1051 LL984, 395
Handling, 1041 Start behavior, 37
Operating System, 1052 VARINOUT variables, 423
Toolbar, 753, 754, 755, 756, 758 Various PLC settings, 56
Tools, 17 View Tool, 614
Trace Virtual MBX Driver
LL984, 401 Modbus Plus, 940
Transfer problems
Modbus Presettings, 951
Transition, 242 W
Alias designations, 266 Waiting step, 238
Declare, 264 Warm restart, 37
Process, 264 Window elements, 733
Transition diagnosis, 277 Window types, 732
Transition section, 243
Transition variable, 244

U
UDEFB
FBD, 181
LD, 212

xvi 840 USE 503 00 October 2002


Index

Windows, 729
Check box, 742
Command buttons, 741
Dialog boxes, 740
Lists, 741
Menu commands, 737
Option buttons, 741
Status bar, 733
Text boxes, 741
Window, 731
Window elements, 733
Window types, 732

840 USE 503 00 October 2002 xvii


Index

xviii 840 USE 503 00 October 2002

You might also like